Home

- The University of Texas at Dallas

1. 2 Set up and Connection How to set up the equipment 1 2 Screw the two halves of the pole together Slide the grip onto the pole Attach the TR500 holder and tighten the screw Screw the GPS Antenna to the top of the pole Slide the TR500 into the holder until it clicks into place Insert the PC Card into the Receiver and plug in the GEB121 batteries Place the Receiver front panel up in the Minipack with the batteries facing outwards Fasten the strap around the Receiver Connect the GPS Antenna to the Receiver using the two Antenna cables Connect the longest cable to the Receiver pass the cable through the cable brake and down through the opening in the bottom corner of the Minipack flap Draw the required 2 Set up and Connection 10 amount of cable out of the Minipack and tighten the cable brake Refer to the diagram Connect the TR500 to the port labelled Terminal on the Receiver using the 1 8m cable Pass it through the opening in the bottom of the Minipack flap down through a cable brake and then plug into the Receiver Refer to the diagram Switch on the system using the ON OFF button on the Receiver To GPS
2. cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 160 7 1 3 Adding the Antenna Height cccccccseeeeee 161 7 1 4 Adding a Code ccceseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeessanees 161 7 1 5 Adding a Starting Time cceeceeceseeeeeeeeeeeees 163 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 1 6 Measuring procedure cccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 163 7 1 7 Using the ADD key cccecseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 166 7 2 Post processed Kinematic Survey Rover 167 7 2 1 Overview Of Procedure cccssseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 168 7 2 2 Adding the Point Id eeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 168 7 2 3 Adding the Antenna Height ccccsccccseeeeee 169 7 2 4 Adding a COE cccsseeceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseaeees 170 7 2 5 Adding a Starting Time ccsssececeseeeeeeeeeeees 171 7 2 6 Measuring Procedure c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 172 7 2 7 Using the AUTO key ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 174 7 2 8 Using the ADD key ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 174 7 3 Real Time Reference Stations ceeeee 176 7 3 1 Measuring procedure ccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 177 7 3 2 Using the ADD key ccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeees 180 7 4 Real Time Rover Surveying New Points 181 7 4 1 Overview Of Procedure ccccsseeeeceseeeeeeeeeeees 182 7 4 2 Adding the Point Id ccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1
3. 11 1 GPS System 500 Technical Reference Manual Version 4 0 English X wy S GPS SYSTEM 500 Geosystems System GPS500 Congratulations on your purchase of Leica System 500 To use equipment in the permitted manner please refer to the detailed safety instructions in the User Manual A K Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Technical Support Technical Support is provided by Leica Geosystem s worldwide network of representatives We are represented in almost every country in the world A representative directory is available at www leica geosystems com Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Symbols used in this manual Bs Important paragraphs which must be adhered to in practice as they enable the product to be used in a technically correct and efficient manner Symbols used in this manual Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en View of chapters Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Equipment Setup and Connection Chapter 3 Using System 500 without a Terminal Chapter 4 TR500 Terminal Overview Chapter 5 Configuring the Receiver Chapter 6 Jobs and Points Chapter 7 Measuring with System 500 Chapter 8 Coding Chapter9 The CONFIG key Chapter 10 Status Chapter 11 Applications Chapter 12 Utilities Chapter 13 Transfer Appendices P BF View of chapters Ni gt N 4 h oO 7 Contents Tc TAWOGUCT
4. 12 Utilities Transfer enables you to transfer all types of data between different data devices on the Receiver Transfer of data to SKI Pro is carried out from within SKI Pro Select Transfer from the Main Menu SUP Wey SLake Out APPLlicatioht s Utilities Job Cont 1 gdr e T N P i hi e ir OMT HIDE The following screen appears AS Config Set Bs Coordinate System Ad Antenna INFO BS Codelist He ASCII GSI to Job ar GSl User OMT a a 13 Transfer Enables you to Transfer a Job be tween PC Card and Internal Memory 13 Transfer 13 1 Job 13 2 Config Set Enables you to transfer Configuration Sets between Sensors and PC Cards To n Internal Determinat iont OMT ALE TIRE Select From where you wish to transfer the Job The device To which the Job will be transferred will auto matically selected Job Select the Job to be trans ferred Press ALL F3 to select all the Jobs MORE F6 enables you to define which data to transfer Select from Points and Obs Points only or Obs only Sensor Y To PC Card Config Set 12 i F CONT AL E Select From where you wish to transfer the Configuration Set The device To which the Configuration Set will be transferred will be automati cally selected Config Set Select the Configuration Set to be transferred Press ALL F3 to select all the Configuration Sets Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 13
5. Status Icons TRA Directory Bar 2 t ke 0lt 3 APPLlLications SHOW L Main Display Area Softkeys F1 F6 4 TR500 Terminal Overview On certain screens a shift symbol will appear in the bottom right corner above the softkey It indicates that further choices are available on the softkeys At this time the shift key appears so i When it is pressed it appears so t Pressing it again will toggle back to the original softkeys When a function is being carried out that will take a significant amount of time the hourglass symbol shown below will appear This indicates that the system is busy 4 TR500 Terminal Overview Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 4 2 Status Icons Accuracy Status we La 5 aw es 10 45 Le 5 i High Precision Navigation cm level Accuracy No visible GSM Batter Status Satellites Status S ist Precision Navigation 0 5 5m level Position No Satellites Memory Local Mode used on L1 L2 Status Time Navigation lt 100m Radio Observation Auto Position aF avigation lt Status Recording Recording Status Status When no position is available no icon is shown Note that the icons that appear depend upon which System 500 Receiver you are using the options set on it and the configuration that you are using Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 4 TR500 Terminal Overview me Position Mode n Static the GPS Antenna should be
6. COMFIGURE New Coord System Coord 235 P Transform Swiss 1 Projection Swiss Ge0id Models Tes OMT a a Coord Sys Defines the name of the new coordinate system When you have set the parameters press CONT F1 to return to the CONFIGURE Position screen When using EDIT F3 the same descriptions apply Press CONT F1 to return to the CONFIGURE Position screen Further options are available on this screen in Advanced mode See section 5 4 1 for details 5 Configuring the Receiver Formats Format Grid n East orth Wat Format Geodet g Lat Lon Hgt Y GUAality TYPE Defined by OCCUPY COUnter Positions Ce a ee ee You can configure the way in which information is presented when surveying Format Grid The format of grid coordinates if they are being used Format Geodetic The format of geodetic coordinates if they are being used Quality type For real time rover select Quality This will display a Coordinate Quality in cm within which the position lies This is calculated using the standard deviations of the coordinate components Defined by Defines the components used to calculate the Quality Height 1D Height Quality Pos 2D Position Quality Pos Hgt 3D Position Quality Pos Hgt Time 3D Position Quality OCUPY Counter Defines how the length of time spent occupying a point is displayed Select from Time normal time or Positions the
7. UTILITIES Format Memory Moadule Device GUIckK FOrFmMate YES a E ETM Device Select the memory device you wish to format Internal is available when an internal memory module is fitted Quick format Selects the way in which the formatting is carried out When set to YES the data will not be visible any more but in reality still exists on the memory device It will be overwritten as and when required When set to NO all data is really deleted If you want to format the Sensor System RAM press SYSTM F5 and confirm twice by pressing F5 If you format the System RAM all system data such as Almanac User defined Configuraton Sets User defined Antennas Codelists Geoid Model Field Files and CSCS Model Field Files will be lost Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 12 3 Enter Security Code The security code is required to activate optional application programs Select the application program you wish to activate and then enter the security code supplied by Leica Geosystems when you purchased the option Instructions on how to use each optional application program are contained in a separate manual accompanying the security code Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 12 4 Self Test A memory self test can be performed on both the PC card and the internal memory device if fitted The self test will test the chosen memory device for bad sectors or corrupted data and report on the result
8. scale CONT REFLHCURST 0 6 Input the new Horizontal Offset Horz Offset Give the Increment Station Inc a negative value Press CURST F4 current station The next target point will be displayed To use option 2 highlight the Line and press ENTER Press PARAM F5 to enter the Grid parameters STAKE OUT Grid Station Eeg 16 888 m Horz ff et 4 888 m Uert OF FSebe AHAA m TADA m Station INC 20312 n CONT EEF LH CURST Input the new Horizontal Offset Horz Offset Press CONT F1 The next target point will be displayed The REFLN F3 key is used to automatically set the start point of the reference line as the target If this is pressed and the start point has already been recorded the end point will be selected Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en If a point within the grid is obstructed E g a car is parked over it or it is heavily shaded by trees there is a function that allows you to skip that point and carry on to the next one Enter the Line definition screen ETAEKE OGUT tBGH FA RRAe AE Line ETKLine T2zT Li HELP ETATHSTAT HLT Press SHIFT to reveal STAT F3 and STAT F4 STAT F3 will increment to the next point STAT F4 returns to the previous point Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 Measuring with System 500 There are two types of Coding System available on System 500 Thematical Coding
9. An example of what is selected is displayed Use the DEFLT F5 key to reset the format to its original values Define the delimiter used to separate the information for each point and then define the position of each component of each point An example of what you have defined is given at the bottom of the screen Press CONT F1 to return to the CONFIGURE Stakeout screen and CONT F1 again to complete the configuration Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 5 Configuring the Receiver 5 4 1 Advanced Operation Mode for Real Time Rover The Advanced Mode contains extra configurable parameters that may be required for certain specialized applications Select Advanced in CONFIGURE Operation Mode E OFeration Mode AdVanced OMT PT Only the screens that differ from those seen in Standard Mode are described here 5 Configuring the Receiver Position In addition to the functionality given in Standard mode details about the chosen coordinate system are given 1 EF UTM Se Ho distr ibut iorn Retiduals Transf Or ti n Test Ellipsoid MGS 1964 Projection UTM se Geoid Model CONT a Residuals The method by which residuals will be distributed throughout the transformation area is displayed Transform The name of the transformation set used is displayed Ellipsoid The name of the local ellipsoid is displayed Projection The name of the projection used is displayed G
10. Grid Northing meters Meter fixed text M GPS Quality 0 fix not available or invalid 1 No Realtime position navigation fix 2 Realtime position ambiguities not fixed 3 Realtime position ambiguities fixed Number of satellites used in computation GDOP Altitude above below mean sea level for position of marker Note if no orthometric height is available the local ell height will be exported Meter fixed text M Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Appendix E LLQ Leica Local Position and Quality Format SGPLLO hhmmss ss mmddyy eeeeee ecee M nnnnnn nnn M x XX X X X X xhh lt CR gt lt LF gt Appendix E Content Header incl Talker ID message sent from Receiver UTC time of position UTC date Grid Easting meters Meter fixed text M Grid Northing meters Meter fixed text M GPS Quality 0 fix not available or invalid 1 No Realtime position navigation fix 2 Realtime position ambiguities not fixed 3 Realtime position ambiguities fixed Number of satellites used in computation Coordinate Quality Altitude above below mean sea level for position of marker Note if no orthometric height is available the local ell height will be exported Meter fixed text M Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed VTG Course Over Ground and Ground Speed Format SGPVTG i i ps UA SKM SKM HM Ps x
11. Profile n Profile Hos a Medium n Hone Error Rates 39 CONT ACCA TVE Ea Profile Displays the selected User Profiles Profile No Displays the number of the selected profile Medium Displays the currently used medium This may be either GSM 2m Radio or None Error Rate Displays the error rate of the currently active medium 0 99 Press ACCNT F3 to display the currently used Account its Provider the currently used Service e g EPS or HEPS and the Credit Unit and Credit Time CreditUnit Displays the remaining credit units CreditTime Displays the time remaining according to the credit units Press VERS F4 to display the Type and the Serial No of the SMARTgate box the Software Version and its Software Date Using the SMARTgate box Once you have set the configuration for the SMARTgate box the connec tion to the SAPOS station can be established by pressing SHIFT CONEC F4 in the MAIN SURVEY or STAKE OUT panel To disconnect again press SHIFT DISCO F4 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Using the Telemax Service To make use of the Telemax service you first have to transfer the sensor specific Account file to your sensor A maximum of two Account files may be transferred to each sensor e g one for private and one for non private use For details on how to transfer such Account Files refer to chapter 13 15 Transfer Telemax Account File Configuration 1 Res
12. Almanac Telemax Account Files CFC Log Mask Files Beacon Station List When uploading a Sysram sys file to a receiver all existing settings on the receiver will be overwritten 13 Transfer HO To PC Card File SUSP am SUYS OMT TT Select From where you wish to transfer the file The device To which the file will be transferred will be selected automatically File Other namings than Sysram sys are not allowed 13 Transfer 13 20 Any File Type Enables you to transfer any file between the DATA directories on the memory devices To n Internal Crd grP idx OMT Pre Select From where you wish to transfer the File The device To which the File will be transferred will be automatically selected File Select the File Press ALL F3 to select all the Files Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Appendix A Operating and Storage Temperatures Component Operation Storage Receiver 20 C to 55 C 40 C to 70 C Terminal 20 C to 55 C 40 C to 70 C Antenna 40 C to 75 C 40 C to 75 C PC Flash Cards 20 C to 75 C 40 C to 75 C Internal Memory 20 C to 55 C 40 C to 70 C Appendix A Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Appendix B Observation Times Obs Method No sats GDOP lt 8 Baseline Length Approximate observation time By day By night Rapid Static 4 or more Up to 5 km 5 to 10 mins 5 mins 4 or more 5 to 10 km 10 to 20 mins 5 to 10 mins
13. CONT F1 returns you to the survey screen 7 Measuring with System 500 7 4 7 Using the AUTO key lf Log Auto Positions is set to YES in the CONFIGURE Logging screen the Auto F3 key is available in the main Survey screen SURVEY Def au1t Point Id z Ant Height Z000 m a0 uality B A mM ir CUP YAU AD LIT Auto F3 can be used to switch to the mode for measuring Auto Positions in the Auto Pos panel AUTO POS Default Auto Pe Id Time and Date Moy Ant Hgt A Di m a a T P EE ETART SD0 uality AutoPt Id If no Auto Log Pos Point Id template has been chosen the default template Time and Date will be used Alternatively a Point Id template may be defined see chapter 5 4 Configuring the Receiver for Real Time Rover Operations Mov Ant Hgt Sets the Antenna Height when the receiver is in moving mode When a standard System 500 pole setup is used the suggested default will be 2 00m Quality Displays the quality of your current position If a coding system has been defined for use in the Configuration Set it will be possible to add a code to the auto logged point This may be either a thematical code or a free code Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Note that adding a code is only possible if Store Pt DB is set to YES in the CONFIGURE Position Logging screen see chapter 5 4 It is also only possible to change the code for auto logged points when
14. F3 without the need to go to the end You may choose between Standard of the list and Advanced Standard is recommended for most users The Standard operation mode is a Advanced enables definition of described from here on The extra parameters required for specialized configurable features available when applications Advanced is selected are described in Section 5 2 1 Operation Made M When you have made your selection press CONT F1 to go through the fixed order of parameter panels Or press LIST F6 to get a listing of the available parameter panels which Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en O 99 5 Configuring the Receiver Antenna Select the Antenna configuration that you are using CONF IGURE Ant Hame Antenna ATSeS Pole Wert OF FSebe A HADA m Deflt Ht Z000 M Mess Type Vertical OMT Ant Name Displays and selects the currently selected antenna setup Vert Offset Displays the vertical offset defined in the Antenna setup Ant Name Deflt Hgt Displays a default height for the Antenna setup If the antenna will always be mounted at a fixed height E g on a pole or always at the same fixed location enter the value You will also get a chance to enter the height for each set up during survey operations 5 Configuring the Receiver Meas Type Also enter the means by which the Antenna height was measured For kinematic measure ments using a pole this will be
15. If the Receiver is left in the case during use in tempera tures exceeding 25 C the lid should be left open Refer to Appendix A for operating and storage temperatures Use an external battery such as GEB71 to extend the operating time past 6 hours Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 3 Equipment Setup Post Processed Static Rapid Static Reference on Tripod Use Static Rapid Static operations or as Reference for Kine matic The Receiver and TR500 if used can be assembled to make one unit This clips to the tripod leg or is placed in the transport container One connection is made to the Antenna Note that the Receiver can be programmed with the TR500 prior to use which can then be omitted from the set up Assumptions 1 GPS Antenna is mounted directly using screw fitting If using stub and GAD 31 adapter procedures may vary slightly 2 GPS Antennas are AT501 or AT502 Procedures setup may vary if AT503 504 or single frequency choke ring are used Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 Set up and Connection Equipment Checklist GPS Antenna AT501 or AT502 GRT146 Carrier GDF122 or GDF112 Tribrach GST20 GST05 or GSTO5L Tripod 5 GZS4 Height Hook 6 GEV120 2 8m Antenna Cable 7 2 GEB121 Batteries 8 9 1 mON SR510 520 530 GPS Receiver TR500 Terminal if required 0 MCF XMB 3 PCMCIA Flash Card 11 GVP602 System 500 Tra
16. Stake PLS Default Store PLS Def sult Stake Types Antenna z ATOZ Polet Ant Height Z000 m OMT LOG ASCI T Ce The as staked points will always be stored in the Store Pts Job If staking from an ASCII file you may also choose to store the Target points defined there in the Job In this way you have the Target points and the as staked points in one Job To start Slope Stake Out press CONT F1 TAKE OUT Def sult Orient Line Dut 5 03 mM Right 5 2D mM Cut n A a AA mi Duality A B m g ir CUP POLAR REWRS REDRM PC KUP INIT Stake Out starts Orient is along the Slope Line only Details about using Lines as orientation are given in section 7 5 4 The measurements In Out Right Left and Cut Fill are given with respect to the start point of the line When you reach the required point place the stake To record the point press OCUPY F1 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en ETAKE OUT Occupy Point Point Id r BARE 1 Ant Height 7 888 Mm Bez Time at PL s GUSLItY n A A M ir STOP A TT A default Point Id is suggested This comprises of the Line Id followed by any incrementing numbers that you have defined in the Occupy template Alternatively you may press SHIFT and then PT ID F3 to use the Point ID currently defined in the Occupy template If you simply wish to add aditional text to the suggested point Id press Enter The point Id in the display re
17. monthdayyear 2 fixed digits for month 2 fixed digits of day 2 fixed digits of year Leading zeros always included for month day and year to maintain fixed length Some fields are specified to contain pre defined constants most often alpha characters Such a field is indicated by the presence of one or more valid characters Excluded from the list of allowable characters are the following that are used to indicate other field types A a c x hh hhmmss ss Illl ll yyyyy yy Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Numeric Value Fields X X Variable numbers hh_ Fixed HEX field Information Fields c c Variable text aa_ Fixed alpha field XX_ Fixed number field Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Varaible length integer or floating numeric field Optional leading and trailing zeros example 73 10 73 1 073 1 73 Fixed length HEX numbers only Variable length valid character field Fixed length field of upper case or lower case alpha characters Fixed length field of valid characters GGA Global Positioning System Fix Data Format SGPGGA hhmmss ss fi i a es a YYYYY YY a X XX X X X X XXXX hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Content Header incl Talker ID message sent from Receiver UTC time of Position Latitude Hemisphere N S Longitude E W GPS Quality Indicator O fix not available or invalid 1 No Realtime position navigation fix 2 R
18. Antenna Defines the Antenna setup to be used The Setup defined in the Configuration Set will be taken by default although any other setup may be selected For Real Time Refer ence Stations this will normally be AT501 502 Tripod Press CONT F1 when you have made your selection Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 3 1 Measuring procedure SURVEY Def au1t Point Id z Ant Height 1 2354 M Local E 241746 458 M Local H 2d 796 oS M Ortho Hgt oli 43 m CONT COORDLAST HERE SPP You will need to select the way in which you define the reference point You may select either a known point from the drop down list or use the LAST F3 key to use the coordinates that were used when the sensor was last used as a reference station Alternatively use the HERE F4 key to select the present navigation position or use the Single Point Positioning SPP F6 feature to determine the reference point Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Using a known point Select a point from the drop down list box This point will have been previously entered into the database manually from SKI Pro or may bea point resulting from a previous real time rover measurement Use the COORD F2 key to switch display between coordinate systems Measure and input the Antenna Height Ant Height When using a Tripod this will be measured using the Height Hook Further details on measuring the Antenna height can be found in section 2
19. Are PR z n ET Are P 3 z CF Are Dist a 2H mM Enter the three points on the arc or press NEWOC F5 to measure new points Enter the Arc Distance starting from the first point Press COMP F1 to start the computation 11 Applications Results coGgo Dist Point Id on APS F Local E THSGE1 5rd M Local H 215849 457 M Ortho Hgt z250 000 M STORE COOP e TA KE Easting Northing and Height of the new point on the arc are displayed Enter a Point Id change the Height if neccessary and press STORE F1 will bring you back to the COGO Arcs menu Alternatively press STAKE F5 to switch to the stakeout screen and use the coordinates directly for stakeout Input P1 First point on arc E N h P2 Second point on arc E N P3 Third point on arc E N h b Distance on Arc h u Output P New point on arc E N h Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 11 7 Area The Area function enables you to calculate an area based upon points in the database The area segments may be defined as lines or arcs The nodes along the perimeter of the area must be defined clockwise In order to use the area function local grid coordinates must be available i e a local coordinate system must be defined APPLICATIONWN Menu Ai Determine Coord System AS Point Management As Calculator Ad Wake up Sessions AS COGO 76 Ares AT Line Division conto
20. End point D Dst Horizontal Distance B Brg Bearing H H Horizontal component V V Vertical component h Hgt Height difference V H x 100 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Start Endpoint The Line is defined between two points Either 1 Enter the coordinates and height of each point or 2 Use the IMPRT F3 key to import any point contained in the Job you are using Make sure that one of the entry fields for the point start or end point you wish to define is highlighted press IMPRT F3 select the point from the list and press CONT F1 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Start Dst Bg The line is defined by a start point a horizontal distance and bearing from the start point and a percentage slope value Enter Select LocalE Local N and Ortho Hgt for the start point as described in Start Endpoint Enter the horizontal Distance to the end point This end point will be an artificial point If no value other than zero is given a default of 100m will be taken Enter the horizontal Bearing to the end point through which the line passes Enter the Slope percentage value This is defined as described in the diagram Start Dst Bg H V The line is defined by a start point a horizontal distance and bearing from the start point and the ratio of horizontal increment over vertical increment Enter Select LocalE Local N and Ortho Hgt for the start point as describe
21. Leica Geosystems AG CH 9435 Heerbrugg Switzerland Phone 41 71 727 31 31 Fax 4171 727 46 73 www leica geosystems com
22. Select Area from the APPLICATION menu Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Job Area Hew Area Loy File YESY File Name AREA LOG COT BOUT Job Change the current Job if necessary Area Select between defining a New Area or modify the Last Area By default the last area definition will always be retained allowing you to modify it Change Log File to YES and enter a File Name if you want to generate a log file of the area calculation The file will be written in the LOG subdirectory of the PC card or internal memory Press CONT F1 will bring you to the Create Area screen Point Id Area BR E BegAr l r EnGAF l r Hoge Hode CALC HEW JEDIT DEL PLOT J To define the segments of a new area or to add additional segments to an already existing area press NEW F2 Select the points from the list and press ADD F2 after each Node point or click ARC F3 to define an arc Arcs can be defined by two points and a radius or by three points Alter natively you may press NEWOC F5 to measure new points When all segments of the area are defined press CONT F3 To modify the Id of a Node point or to change the arc definitions set the focus on that segment and press EDIT F3 11 Applications Press DEL F4 to delete an seg ment To finish the area definition and start the calculation press CALC F1 The last point is automatically joined with the first point of the definition a
23. Stake points in the form of a grid based on lines A reference line is defined and the grid built up using increments along the line and offsets 7 Measuring with System 500 7 5 3 The Stake OQut Screen When Stake Out has been started the following screen appears 1 Orientation Defines the direction on which the Range Information 3 is based 2 Target Point The current point for which the Range Information 3 is shown 7 Measuring with System 500 uag es mA O FEDRAH 3 Range Information The range to the currently selected point May be one of two formats Orthogonal Range In Out and Offset Left Right plus Cut Fill Polar Range In Out and Bearing plus Cut Fill PCkKUP INIT 4 Quality The quality of your current position 5 Graphics panel Shows your current position a cross relative to the Target Point central circle The scale changes depending on your proximity to the target Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 5 4 Orientation The Orientation defines a reference direction from which all measurements to target points are made The orientation is defined by a point ora line To select a method of Orientation highlight the Orient field and use the left or right cursor keys to cycle through the options or press Enter to open a window containing all the options North The reference direction from which all measurements are displayed to Target points is no
24. Will automatically log positions ata specified rate This is mostly used for real time rover operations See section 5 4 for details Press CONT F1 to continue to the next screen Further options are available on this screen in Advanced mode See section 5 1 1 for details 5 Configuring the Receiver Auto Store Allows you to automatically store a point after the STOP key has been pressed Occupation Settings These settings control the way in which points are occupied and recorded Further options are available on this screen in Advanced mode See section 5 1 1 for details CONF IGURE OCCUPY Modes Occupation Seething Mor mal AULO Shores Hor OMT a T OCUPY Mode Sets the way in which coordinates will be recorded for a point For Static Rapid Static and Post processed Reference Station applications Normal only will be available This means that observations will be recorded until the STOP key is pressed The last observation that is recorded is the one that expired directly before STOP was pressed 5 Configuring the Receiver Id Templates An Id template is used to pre define a Point Id This feature is mainly used in post processed and real time kinematic operations where many points are collected quickly For Static Rapid Static and Real Time Reference operations set all fields to No template used Further options are available on this screen in Advanced mode See section 5
25. 5 or more 10 to 15 km Over 20 mins 5 to 20 mins Static 4 or more 15 to 30 km 1 to 2 hours 1 hour 4 or more Over 30 km 2 to 3 hours 2 hours Appendix B Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Appendix C Seismic Record Format Seismic records may be generated and saved along with Record Content Description the point information They take the following format on ce Automatically stored not user entered GSE Record Type GSE GPS SEismic GSE V M 9g g pp p hh h vv v aaa aaa ss eee ii REC RSN Version Version number of this record M Position type Range 0 1 2 3 4 Default if none available 0 0 position not available 1 navigated position Example 2 differential code position 3 differential phase float solution GSE12 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 220 5 1 2SR530 001899 4 differential phase fixed solution efemes GDOP value Range 0 0 to 99 9 Default if not available 0 0 pp p PDOP value Range 0 0 to 99 9 Default if not available 0 0 hh h HDOP value Range 0 0 to 99 9 Default if not available 0 0 VV V VDOP value Range 0 0 to 99 9 Default if not available 0 0 aaa aaa Antenna Height sum of instrument height and antenna offset Range 99 9 to 999 99 Default if not available 0 0 ss Number of satellites used for solution Range 0 to 12 Default if not available 0 eee Number of epochs spent on point Range 0 to 999 Default if not available 0 Default if not available 0 ii Length of interval
26. F5 to switch to the stakeout screen and use the coordinates directly for stakeout Alternatively enter a Point Id and change the Height if neccessary Press STORE F1 to store the point and continue with the traverse 11 Applications The point stored is associated with a traverse execution Therefore it is suggested as next start point COGO Traverse Point Id 1 Fearing Parall oF Hors Dist COMP TH TRAJ SIDE Enter the Bearing Azimuth the optional Parallel Offset and the Horizontal Distance Instead of entering these values manually you may calculate them from two existing points by pressing INV F2 Pressing TRAV F3 displays the results in the COGO Traverse Results panel There press STORE F1 This leads again to the COGO Traverse panel Enter another Bearing Azimuth the optional Parallel Offset and the Horizontal Distance Press TRAV F3 to con tinue the traverse or SIDE F4 fora single side shot COGO Traverse Results Point Id Sided Local E 6164 161 m Local H 2105 030 m Ortho Hgt 465 754 M TORE COORD A KE In the COGO Traverse Results panel Easting Northing and Height of the side shot are displayed Enter a meaningful point ID and press STORE F1 Again this leads to the COGO Traverse panel To add another traverse point or side shot follow the instructions above To finish the traverse enter the Bearing Azimuth the opt
27. GS50 collect three types of features Points Lines and Areas Because these sensors are configured for GIS use the main programs Survey and Stakeout which are found on the SR510 SR520 SR530 are replaced by the GIS Data Collection and the GIS Navigation Update program GIS Data COLLEChLioKh GIS War 4Sb ion Update ARPLlications das Job Configure TY SMS E wae 1 x 4 Utilities z T OMT HIDE FO Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en If the sensor is configured as a reference station there is no differ ence between the GIS Data Collec tion and the SR5xx Survey program Additionally both GIS programs are situated on the SR510 20 30 in the application menu and are available as a paid upgrade option to the survey program Additional applications On board the GS50 GS50 the applications Determine Coord Sys Point Management Calculator COGO and CFC are available and identical to those running on the SR510 20 30 APPLICATION Meri Determine Coord System Pointe Lih Area Manaqenernt Calculator Ciga Cultivated Field Control ON Fe a a CONT Point Management is located under a submenu Point Line Area Man agement of the main application menu 1 Point 2 Line 3 APES The menu Point leads to the point list which is identical to the point man agement The menus Line and Area lead to lists containing measured lines and areas PLOT F4 shows a graph of the
28. HHEA OU Put ASCII TApPut Hidden Point ir OMT JEDIT eM In the CONFIGURE Interfaces panel highlight Real Time and press EDIT F3 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Set a R Time Data to Rover and set the Data Format to either RTCM 1 2 or RTCM 20 21 RA Time Data Data Formats Por t 1 5i1emens M2er Ref Sensor WAK nG Ref Antenna UAE AoWwre Use PRASE TEZY Radia Down Don t Log bs ir OMT EMCE RTE Press DEVCE F5 to access the device list Select the GSM or Modem attached to your sensor from the list or define a NEW F2 one For details on how to configure and use a GSM phone or Modem refer to the sub chapters GSM and Modem in the Appendix H Press CONT F1 to confirm your selection and return to the CONFIG URE Real Time panel Press the RTCM F6 key to select the Telemax service in setting Telemax to YES Select the appro priate Accountfile which you have transferred to the sensor before RTCH Wersri ean HEits pyte DTF Ref Het Hor Telemax YES ACCOURIL i le O CONT e e a e E eee eae With the Data Format being set to RTCM two different services are available Either RTCM corrections from the closest reference can be received or your own position can be sent via the selected device which then receives corrections based upon a virtual reference station Change Ref Net to YES if corrections for a virtual reference shall be used Press CO
29. In CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight the device to switch stations and press CTRL F5 Appendix H COMF I GORE tati on Humor GSM Connect iorn blue Arirzz06 r Protocol J IZH W118 Accept Aef Uzer def ined Ref Stn Id 5 HeLDatLanates S688 bps ConnE lement Hon Tr anse ar ent Y CONT HEAR CODE A CAN Select the Station to contact The phone Number of the Station Refe rence and the type of Protocol to be used are displayed Accept Ref Defines which reference station to accept real time data from Choose from the following Any Received means that the sensor will accept data from any reference station from which it receives data 1st Received means that data will be received and used from the first reference station that is recognised by the rover If you wish to force the system to try to establish a new connection with a different reference a station press 1st F6 Appendix H User defined enables you to define which reference station data will be received from according to its Ref Stn Id Ref Stn Id The Id of the Reference Station to be used Note that setting Ref Stn Ids is only possible without a survey or stakeout operation running NetDataRate Some GSMs are capable of automatic searching for the network baud rate In this case Autobauding can be set Otherwise one of the predefined network baud rates must be selected ConnElement Choose Non Trans parent for a
30. Log Moving Obs Only available when Log Static Obs YES Acti vates observation recording when the receiver is in moving mode The rate is set in Obs Rate Static Init Available when Log Moving Obs YES Defines whether or not a static initialization will be performed at the beginning of each kinematic chain Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Log Auto Positions Will automati cally log positions at a specified rate Moving Ant Height Sets the Antenna Height when the receiver is in moving mode When a standard System 500 pole setup is used the suggested default will be 2 00m Press CONT F1 to continue to the next screen Further options are available on this screen in Advanced mode See section 5 4 1 for details When Log Auto Positions is set to YES the POS F3 key becomes available Use this key to define the criteria for automatic position record ing Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en COHMFIGURE Position Logging Log Pos bys Time Pos Aate J 1 8 5 Log Factor i Log every n 1 4 ShLore P DE VES SLark Mode Controlled Dlt Infa Only Cor CONT a a Log Pos by Defines the criteria by which an automatic position will be logged When Time is selected the Position Rate defined in Configure Position is displayed This may be multiplied by the Log Factor to give a position logging rate displayed in the Log Every line Store Pt DB If this parameter is set to YES
31. Memor u Batteri Aa RA POC C ard 1 30045 I Memory Int amp ALE CI Battery A z Gra D Battery E 1E Battery Ext a Oo OT EF Press cursor down Memory Batter STATUS Battery A Battery E Battery Ext Bat POC Card s OF Bat Backup OMT CE PC Card Amount of memory remaining on the PC card Memory Int Amount of memory remaining on the internal memory Battery A amount of charge remain ing in internal battery A Battery B Amount of charge re maining in internal battery B Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Battery Ext Amount of charge remaining in the external battery Bat PC Card Battery status of the SRAM PC Card battery The three status levels are OK Low and Error Note that you should change the PC Card Battery when it becomes Low Failure to do so may result in loss of data Ensure that any data on the card is backed up before changing the battery PC Flash Cards do not use a battery Bat Backup Receiver system backup battery When this battery becomes low contact your Leica representative to arrange replacement In case of a Real Time Rover you may press REF F6 to display the Memory and Battery Status of the Reference Station Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 10 10 Sensor Status w General Sensor Ture z ZASA Sensor epialt 139351224 Control Mode TASO Primary Port Terminal PRPS z YES Event Input z YES OMT a a The Receiver model used and its
32. OCUPY Counter Defines how the length of time spent occupying a point is displayed Select from Time normal time or Observations the number of observations recorded Coding If you wish to select a coding system press ENTER and choose from Thematical or Free coding Complete descriptions of the coding systems used by System 500 are given in Chapter 8 Press CODES F3 to review the codes in the chosen codelist You may also edit the codelist here Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Real Time For Static or Rapid Static post processing operations select None and press CONT F1 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Logging Lod Static obs Obs Rate Log Pio Feo YES 15 8F Hor Loy Auto Positions a ee Log Static Obs Switches logging on or off when the Receiver is in Static mode The receiver has to be stationary Obs Rate The rate at which observations will be logged For Static observations over long baselines and long periods of time 15 30 seconds is a reasonable rate For Rapid Static applications 10 15 seconds is normally used For Reference stations for post processed and real time kinematic rovers the rate should be set the same as at the Rover Log Moving Obs Only available when Log Static Obs YES Sets the observation rate when the receiver is in Moving mode This is only used in Real Time kinematic and Post Processed kinematic operations Log Auto Positions
33. OMT JEDIT S TL From CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight Real Time press EDIT F3 Press DEVCE F5 to access the device list Select RTB Module CSI and press CONT F1 to confirm A Time Data Data Formate Por t Radio Down Don t Loy Obes OMT ENCE ETCH Ensure that the Data Format is set to RTCM 9 2 Press RTCM F6 to set the RTCM version and the number of bits byte Press CONT F1 to continue In CONFIGURE Interfaces press CTRL F5 i CZI Frequericy Automat ict Bit Rate Automat i CONT a a At certain locations it is possible that several beacon signals can be received at the same time If Fre quency is set to Automatic the strongest signal available will be used This is not necessarily the closest If you know the frequency of the closest beacon select User defined and enter the frequency Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Frequency User derined SRR we KAS Bit Rate Automatic CONTI ft RST Use the RSTN F4 key to display the Beacon Stations available on the Sensor Note that the Beacon Station list has to be transferred to the Sensor before PSA Hoek Var Aolland St Catherines Hash Point Amelana Flamborough Head CONT n ee ee Depending on the beacon station the Bit Rate may vary Select Auto will detect the bitrate automatically Select User defined and enter a value according to the Beacon station Press CONT F1
34. RieseF Rate 1 67 ir CONT RATES DEWCE REF Data Format There are two extra formats available for RTCM You have the possibility to output both Code corrections together with raw GPS data or high precision phase corrections by selecting the options RTCM 1 2 18 19 or RTCM 1 2 20 21 Also the extra key RATES F3 is available RATES enables different messages to be output at different rates Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en lf RTCM is selected as the Data Format you may select different rates for the various message types E g Message 3 is always output regardless of which RTCM messages are selected As this message does not usually have to be constantly output you may select a lower rate for it lf Leica Data Format is selected you may select different rates for the raw data transmission Data Rate the rate at which the reference coordi nates are output Coord Rate and the rate at which Reference Station information Point Id etc is output Info Rate In addition to the configuration op tions in the standard mode pressing REF F6 enables you to configure Time Slicing Time Slicing is the possibility to send RTK messages delayed This is required when RTK messages from different reference stations are sent on the same radio channel Time Slicing on System500 works for radios GSM and the RS232 interface Ref ttn Id J Time amp lic cin Used Ref Stations 1 Time
35. Session should start Start Time Enter the Start Time when the Session should start Duration Enter the duration of the Session Point Id If the wake up session will be carried out on a known point select it from the listbox If it will be carried out on an unknown point leave it set at Define a Point Id template in the Configuration Set Define a name alone without any automatic increment if you always wish the point to have the same point ID Define a name with an automatic increment if you wish the point to have a different Point ID for each wake up session Ant Height Enter the height of the Antenna above the point Execute The number of times that you wish to repeat this Wake Up session Interval Appears when Execute is set to a value greater than 1 Defines the time interval that must elapse between start times of the different executions of the Session 11 Applications 11 6 COGO The COGO functions enable you to calculate new points using existing data This existing data may be existing coordinates of points existing known distances or existing known angles Instead of using existing points from the Job database points can be measured on the spot and used for computation In order to use the COGO functions local grid coordinates must be available i e a local coordinate system must be defined Only the COGO function Inverse can also handle coordinate systems that woul
36. The Quality will be low a large number Raw GPS data logging will automatically commence at a rate of 1 second after the length of time specified in the Configuration Set Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Then one of three scenarios can When using Post Processing Infill it is ensue useful to note the following points 1 Contact with the Reference is 1 The Reference Station must reestablished within the minimum logging time specified in the Configuration Set Logging will carry on for this minimum time and then stop Contact with the Reference is reestablished after the minimum logging time specified in the Configuration Set Logging will stop Contact with the Reference is not reestablished Logging will continue until the survey is ended or contact with the Reference Station is reestablished Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en also be logging data at the same rate or higher than the Rover The data is logged as a kinematic chain Distinct points within the chain may be logged as in a post processed kinematic survey The data has to be downloaded and processed using SKI Pro All of the data Real Time points and raw data will be imported into the same SKI Pro Project 7 Measuring with System 500 7 5 Real Time Rover Staking Out Switch on The Main Menu will be displayed The system will automatically start searching for satellites If the Receiver is already configured as a
37. When SHIFT is pressed the JOB F3 key enables you to change the current job Note this function is not available if you access Point Management with a Hot Key When SHIFT is pressed the FILT F6 key is available along with the stan dard HOME END PG UP and PG DN keys Use FILT F6 to order the points and to apply a filter to the points Orth BY Filter By Point Id Ho Filter OMT TEE Sort By Sets the method by which the points are ordered Point Id sorts alphabetically Time by the time the point was calculated and Internal Index by the order in which they are stored on the memory device Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Filter By Sets a filter on the points contained in the Job Used if you only want to display points belonging to a specific subset Note that when set the filter also applies to every screen on the list where you can access the point list No Filter No filter set The occupa tion with the highest class that exists for each point is displayed Class is in following descending order CTRL AVRG MEAS Radius from Pt Enables you to filter by selecting a point and all points within a defined radius from it Closest Pt Used in Stakeout When selected finds the closest point to your current position then finds the closest point to that and so on The points are then ordered thus so that in Stakeout you are always sure that you are taking the most efficient route Tech
38. You are completing a survey where you need only one point ID that needs an incrementing number behind the text These points will need the point ID Point However you will also survey some individual points that will need unique point Ids COHMFIGURE OCUPY Ps Pid Mode Change to Indiy Id P oint HHHH In CONFIG OCUPY Pts set up a point ID Num Start template as shown here Auto TAC Note that the Id type is set to Change to Indiv ara pees CONT n e Field Proc Within the Survey panel the first point will SURWEY Def sult automatically show the Point Id Point0001 Upon oa a pressing STORE the next Point Id will at Height automatically show Point0002 JUalituy g A A m 5 Configuring the Receiver Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Working Example 2 cont Field Proc You now wish to survey one individual point and give SURVEYS Det alt cont it the point ID BM98 In the Survey panel enter this i point ID Survey this point and upon pressing Ant Height STORE the next point Id will revert back to Point0002 Bee ocuey ADD Note When entering the individual point Id BM98 you did not need to press SHIFT INDIV F5 as in Working Example 1 This is because the Point template is operating in the Change to Individual mode Suppose you do now wish to survey points using a SURVEYS Default new point Id Fence and you wish this templ
39. case during use in tempera tures exceeding 25 C the lid should be left open Refer to Appendix A for operating and storage temperatures Use an external battery such as GEB71 to extend the operating time past 6 hours Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 8 Equipment Setup Real Time Reference Two Tripods Use The Receiver and TR500 if used can be assembled to make one unit This clips to the tripod leg Connections are made to the GPS and Radio Antenna Note that the Receiver can be programmed with the TR500 prior to use which can then be omitted from the set up The Radio Antenna is mounted on the second tripod This increases the height of the Radio Antenna and therefore maximizes radio coverage The SR510 and SR520 can only be used as a DGPS reference station if they are fitted with the DGPS option They cannot be used as a Real Time Reference station The SR530 can be used as either a DGPS or Real Time reference station Real Time and DGPS are fitted as standard on the SR530 Assumptions 1 GPS Antenna is mounted directly using screw fitting If using stub and GAD 31 adapter procedures may vary slightly 2 Standard Radio modem is used Mounted in Radio Housing Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en AL 2 Set up and Connection Equipment Checklist OONOURWOND GPS Antenna AT501 502 GRT146 Carrier GDF 122 or GDF 112 Tribrach SR510 520 530 GPS Receiver TR500 Terminal if require
40. difference in the accuracy obtained using these messages as compared to messages 18 and 19 RTCM 1 2 Differential and Delta Differential GPS corrections Use for DGPS applications An accuracy of 0 5 5m rms can be expected at the Rover RTCM 9 2 GPS Partial Correction Set and Delta Differential GPS Corrections Use for DGPS applications An accuracy of 0 5 5m rms can be expected at the Rover Use this when a slow data link is being used in the presence of interference Pressing the DEVCE F5 key lets you configure and assign a device to the selected port KS LEMens Mee ir CONT MEW EDIT DEF T Select the device you wish to assign to the port If no default devices are displayed press DEFLT F5 to reveal them Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en A complete description of all available devices and detailed configurations and uses is given in Appendix H Press CONT F1 to return to the CONFIGURE Real Time screen Press CONT F1 again The next screen will depend on the device that has just been chosen For example if the chosen device is the Pacific Crest radio the user will be able to choose the radio channel If the chosen device is a GSM device the user will be able to configure parameters for use with a GSM device such as PIN code A complete description of the different screens is given in Appendix H Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Press SHIFT and then PRED F3 to activate and de
41. keyboard correspond to the six softkeys that appear on the screen when the Terminal is activated Pressing Shift followed by F1 will always activate the Help screen Pressing Shift followed by F6 will quit the Help and return you to the screen you were on Alternatively pressing Shift followed by F6 will quit Survey Stake Out or Application Use the Esc key to step back to the previous screen at any time Use the key combination Alt L to lock and unlock the terminal Use the key combination Alt B to switch the screen illumination on and off 4 TR500 Terminal Overview r F1 F2 HELP ESC F3 F4 SHIFT 0 WO ET TTY a F5 F6 END CE P UO ATI ST DTT c HTT KL ZX CONFIG 7 8 C O 0O SPACE 9 STATUS CAPS N EWTER Use the Shift key when the Shift symbol is displayed to reveal further choices on the softkeys F1 F6 Use the CONFIG key to enter the Configuration menus at any time The CE key is used to clear the last character entered when entering names numbers etc into the Re ceiver Use the ENTER key to confirm an entry into the system Use the STATUS key to access status information at any time Use the Cursor keys to move around the screen The keys F7 F10 are user definable function keys They can be defined to execute commands or access any screen of your choosing See section 9 4 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 4 4 General Oper
42. number of position calculations Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Coding If you wish to select a coding system press ENTER and choose from Thematical or Free coding Complete descriptions of the coding systems used by System 500 are given in Chapter 8 Press CODES F3 to review the codes in the chosen codelist You may also edit the codelist here Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Real Time A Time Data Rover Data Formats Leica Port 1 2345t6111ne ZAT Ref tensor SRS3hF Ref Antennas ATOZ Tripod Wize PRAZE TEST Don t Loa ObS OT PELC E Radio DOWN R Time Data defines the operation mode of the Receiver Select Rover to receive real time data Data Format Defines the format used to broadcast the real time data Port defines the port to where the Real Time receive device will be connected Normally this will be a radio modem or GSM phone When the radio modem is a Satelline 1AS 2ASx 2ASXE Pacific Crest RFM96 W or GSM phone it will be mounted in a housing and attached to either Port 3 or Port 1 You may also attach a radio modem or phone without a housing via a cable to any port Use the right or left cursor keys to select a port for transmission of real time data The device that is currently assigned to this port will be displayed Ref Sensor Select the Receiver type used at the Reference Station If this is not a Leica Receiver select Unknown Ref Antenn
43. otherwise should be left at the default value of 1 00 Refer to the diagrams at the start of this section for more details of each parameter Press CONT F1 to continue 7 Measuring with System 500 Orierit Hor thr ee er a Ot 1 53 m B Left 61 59 mM Cut A A M GDIOF dad ir OCCUPY POLAR RERS REDRM PCEUPLIMIT The first point in the grid is automatically selected as the target point and measurements to that point are given Information about the point you are looking for is given in the Directory Bar od el The point is given as XXXX XX YYYY YY Where X is the distance along the Refer ence Line Y is the Horizontal Offset from the Reference Line Move to the point and record stake it Press OCUPY F1 ETAKE OUT Occupy Point Point Id Wonga Ath Ae Ant Height Z000 m Time at PL As 6 GUSLItY z AAZ M ir STOP A T T The Point Id is automatically chosen according to the format explained previously Alternatively you may press SHIFT and then PT ID F3 to toggle be tween using the Point ID currently defined in the Occupy template and the suggested Line Id as described in section 7 5 13 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en If you simply wish to add aditional text to the suggested point Id press Enter The point Id in the display remains and the cursor will be in the position defined in the current Point Id template You may also enter a completely di
44. the option you have selected Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en When Time is selected set the required observation time for each point The time starts counting when OCUPY is pressed The Receiver stops record ing when the set length of time is reached STOP amp GO Indicator is selected set the baseline range When measuring an observation time will be calculated based on the selected baseline range the number of available satellites and the GDOP This is displayed as a percentage value Observations is selected set the number of epochs that should be recorded at each point of Sats is selected set the length of time to observe depending on the number of satellites available You may edit the value for each number of satellites Should the number of available satellites change during observations the observations already recorded will be taken into account Should the number of satellites decrease more time will be added Should the number of satel lites increase time will be subtracted The Receiver stops recording when the time limit is reached Press CONT F1 to return to CONFIGURE Occupation Settings 5 Configuring the Receiver Working Example Id Templates ld Templates are not normally of use for Static Rapid Static or Kinematic Reference Stations and should be set to No Template Used Application Post Processed Rapid Static Observation Recording Technique Rapid Static Requirem
45. then change to ALL Use ALL F5 to reveal System 300 antenna configurations also You can pick out the antenna configurations that you will use the most and delete the rest All possible antenna configurations may still be accessed in the future by using the DEFLT and ALL keys Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Position This screen defines the rate for and the way in which position is displayed If you wish to work in local coordinates you MUST define the coordinate system here CONFIGURE Position Update Rate PELE Coord 24s BEEE CONT a E Update Rate Defines the rate at which the position will be updated on the display Coord Sys You may also select a coordinate system which will be used to display the positions The WGS84 coordinate system will always be available You may define other coordinate systems in Applications in Determine Coord System see section 11 1 Highlight Coord Sys and press ENTER to reveal the list of coordinate systems currently available GUPE Position SWiss MGSh4 Geodetic ir CONT HEM JEDIT DEL TMP O Ach Select the coordinate system that you wish to use Use NEW F2 to define a new coordinate system Use EDIT F3 to edit a coordinate system Use DEL F4 to delete the selected coordinate system and INFO F5 to reveal the type of transformation used When NEW F2 is pressed the following screen appears 5 Configuring the Receiver
46. vast majority of countries around the world As surveying developed through the centuries individual countries adopted datums that best suited their individual requirements Therefore when surveying with GPS coordinates are first obtained relative to the WGS84 datum These coordinates then have to be transformed into the local coordinate system There are several methods by which this can be done One is the Helmert 273 11 Applications 1 Applications 11 1 Determining a Coordinate System approach where the coordinates are transformed from the WGS84 Datum to the local ellipsoidal datum and then a map projection is applied to obtain grid coordinates Other methods involve transforming the coordinates directly from WGS84 into a local grid System 500 receivers contain three different methods the Helmert method the 1 Step method and the 2 Step method The method used depends on the results required and the quality and extent of known points Which method to use This question largely depends on local conditions and information If you wish to keep the GPS measurements totally homogenous and the information about the local map projection is available the Classical 3D approach would be the most suitable 11 Applications For cases where there is no information regarding the ellipsoid and or map projection and or you wish to force the GPS measurements to tie in with local existing control then the One Step
47. 109 145 5 36 5 GRT44 Carrier with GAD31 Stub to GRT46 Carrier Screw Adapter 2 Set up and Connection 6 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 Tripod Setup Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en VO Vertical Offset VR Vertical Height Reading VE1 Vertical Phase Center Eccentricity for L1 VE2 Vertical Phase Center Eccentricity for L2 MRP Mechanical Reference Plane Although an AT501 502 Antenna is shown the same principles apply to the AT504 and AT303 The Vertical Height Reading VR value is measured using the Height Hook The Vertical Offset VO value is stored in the Antenna Setup record and fora Tripod Setup with the Height Hook as shown is 0 36m This will need to be measured if you are entering a new Antenna Setup Record without using the Height Hook There are two methods for mounting Leica Antennas using a GRT46 with a 5 8 inch screw or using a GRT44 with stub and a GAD31 stub to screw adapter The VO value remains constant whichever setup is used The Vertical Phase Center Eccentricities are stored in the Receiver for all Leica System 500 Antennas and any non Leica Antenna that you define As long as the correct antenna is chosen there is no need to enter any value into the Receiver These values do need to be calculated when a new type of Antenna that does not exist in the Antenna Setup Records is used 2 Set up and Connection 3 Pole Setup 2 Set up and Connection VO Vertical
48. 15 Using the last used Reference Station coordinates To use the same coordinates that were used when the sensor was last used as a reference station choose LAST F3 When a sensor is used as a reference station and is turned off the reference station coordinates are stored within the System RAM They can then be used again the next time the sensor is used as a reference Station This means that even if the PC card that previously contained the reference station coordinates is formatted the last used coordinates can still be used 7 Measuring with System 500 Using the current Navigation Position To use the current navigation position as the coordinates for the reference point press the HERE F4 key MANAGE Hew Point Point Id Hani Local E z 245621 25 r Sa Local H n 22d TAGS 300 m Ortho Hgt 211 426 m wa ETOREICOURD The current navigation position will be taken Input the Point Id and press STORE F1 The point will be added to the database and will be taken over into the Main Survey screen 7 Measuring with System 500 SURVEY Default Point Ig Hawi Ant Height ME EEE ri Local E S45621 879 M Local N S247036 300 M Ortho Hyt 511 426 m CONT COORDLAST HERE SPP Measure and input the Antenna Height Ant Height When using a Tripod this will be measured using the Height Hook Further details on measuring the Antenna height can be found in section 2 15 The navigat
49. 3 digit Racal reference station ID If 1 is displayed the necessary license is not available Channel Demodulator channel number Signal Strength of signal For good reception a signal of 1 5V or higher is recommended AGC Automatic Gain Control indicating the voltage being fed to the variable gain amplifier on the de modulator Freq Offset The difference be tween the occupied carrier frequency and the entered frequency Bit Error Rate The bit error rate between 0 and 7 Appendix H SAPOS SAPOS is a reference station service available for Germany To make use of this service there are three different options 1 SAPOS reference decoder box 2 SMARTgate box 3 Telemax Service Appendix H Using a SAPOS decoder box Configuration COMFIGURE Interfaces Port Device 1 Fe HMEA OU Put ASCII TApPut Hidden Point ir OMT JEDIT TL From CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight Real Time and press EDIT F3 Press DEVCE F5 to access the device list Select SAPOS Box and press CONT F1 to confirm A Time Data Data Formats Poor t z Ref Sensor Ref Antenna Use Phase n Radio Down 1 SnPOS TON F UAE AoWwr UAE nown Hor Don t Log Obs OMT ECE TCM Select one of the following Data Formats RICM 1 2 RTCM 18 19 or RTCM 20 21 Two different services are available RTCM corrections from the closest reference can be received or your
50. 7 3 ARTK rover is prepared and pre programmed according to chapter 5 4 The same type of radios are used on reference repeater and rover station The radio modem at the repeater station is programmed to repeater mode All radio modems at reference repeater and rover operate on the same frequency The reference and rover receivers run standard firmware 3 00 or higher 2 Set up and Connection 58 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Equipment Checklist AARWN CoO N GAT1 GAT2 Radio Antenna GAD34 Short Antenna Arm GAD32 Telescopic Rod GHT36 Base for Telescopic Rod GEV120 2 8m Antenna Cable Radio Modem in GFU5 6 Housing GHT38 Repeater Box 1 8 m Connection cable for external battery GEB71 Battery GST20 GST05 05L Tripod Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 Set up and Connection How to set up the equipment 1 Set up the tripod 2 Screw the Base for the Telescopic Rod onto the Tripod Push the Telescopic Rod into the Base 3 Screw the Short Antenna Arm onto the Telescopic Rod Screw the Radio Antenna onto the Arm 4 Connect the Radio Modem to the Repeater Box Attach the Repeater Box to the tripod 5 Connect the Radio Modem to the Radio Antenna using the 2 8m Antenna Cable 6 Connect the Repeater Box to the GEB71 battery 2 Set up and Connection The Next Steps As soon as the Repeater Box is connect
51. AHAA m AHAA m ARR Ae Bee M False East False North Lat Origin CONT Enter the name of your projection and select the type of projection Although the majority of projections are Transverse Mercator UTM or Lambert a variety are available Input the parameters of your projection not forgetting to scroll down the complete list and enter all parameters Press CONT F1 to continue The next step in the process is to match the common points ir CONT HEM JEDIT MATCH Points from the two systems with the same point Id will be suggested for matching by default If you do not wish to match two points highlight the point pair concerned and press MATCH F5 This key is also used when determining a 1 Step or a 2 Step transformation and you wish to match the points in height or position only To match a new coordinate pair press NEW F2 and select the WGS84 and local point to be matched Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en New WGS84 points may be mea sured from here using NEWOC F5 Press CONT F1 to return to this panel To edit an existing coordinate pair select the pair and press EDIT F3 Make any necessary adjustments and press CONT F1 to return to this panel Use DEL F4 to unmatch the se lected coordinate pair When a Classical type transformation is being selected the PARAM F5 key is available after pressing SHIFT This enables you to define the type of transforma
52. Coding AL i 181 Code Hame n Control Ant Height cr GDOP 6 6 OCue yy ATR T The fields Point Code and Code Name will be displayed as above Highlight the Point Code and either 1 Use the left or right cursor keys to cycle through the code list 7 Measuring with System 500 or 2 Press ENTER and select the code from the list or 3 Type in the first few characters of the code until the desired code is displayed The Code Name will be displayed for the Point Code that you have chosen Enter any attributes for the code using the ATRIB F4 key The code is stored along with the Point Id information Free Coding Point Id Last Code 2Last Code ZAR Ant Height Z000 m GDOP dad A CUP YP OE The Last Code and second last code 2Last Code that were used are shown The CODE F4 key will be available Press this key to access the codelist es a Free Coding Free Code 168 Description Fence Line Info 1 STORE LAST NEH I DEFLT CLEAR Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en To select the code 1 Use the left or right cursor keys to cycle through the code list or 2 Press ENTER and select the code from the list or 3 Type in the first few characters of the code until the desired code is displayed ZOREY Free Coding Free Code gt 126 Fence Line ae zA Fence Post TAR Shori Drain Road Gully ir CONT MEW LAST C IHF late An asterisk next
53. Contains all codelist files CONVERT Contains all format files defined in Format Manager DTM Contains any DTM stakeout file to be used with this application 307 12 Utilities 12 1 Directory of Memory Device DATA Contains user defined ASCII files including the line definition file STK_Line txt as well as the sub directory GPS GPS contains any almanac files that have been trans ferred from the Receiver as well as the GEOID the CSCS and the RINGBUF sub directory GEOID contains any Geoidal Model files CSCS contains any CSCS Field Files and RINGBUF contains any Ring Buffer Data files GEODB Contains all Job files including GPS raw data and point information GPS Contains any coordinate system files transferred from the Receiver as well as the sub directo ries CONF and PROG CONF contains any configuration set files transferred from the Receiver PROG contains Receiver firmware and text files 12 Utilities GSI Contains any GSI files created through the Transfer command on the Receiver IDEX Contains any IDEX files created through the Transfer command on the Receiver LOG Contains any log files generated from the optional application programs See Appendix G for further details on the directory structure of the memory device 12 Utilities 12 2 Format Memory Module Enables you to reformat a memory device All data will be erased and a fresh directory structure created
54. Data 2 Hidden Point s CONT Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Adding Point Annotations Point Annotations may be used as an electronic notepad where events notes etc may be written They are then taken with the Point Id information into SKI Pro Point Annotations may only be added when a distinct point is being recorded To add Point Annotations select Point Annotations from the list and press CONT F1 vs Point annotations J se a bu Dot Hz Tree fell on head H3 Coglgnt Fingd paint H4 Packed up and Went home EEE You may type in 4 notes with up to 26 characters in each note Press CONT F1 when you are finished Press CLEAR F6 to delete the content of all fields Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Adding Meteorological Data Meteorological data may be required when very precise work is being carried out or when very different weather conditions exist between the Rover and Reference When carrying out post processed kinematic work it only makes sense to input meteorological data at distinct points not during the moving parts This data will not be used by SKI Pro but may be exported in RINEX format from SKI Pro and used in a scientific processing software that accepts meteorological data for tropospheric modelling Select Meteorological Data from the list and press CONT F1 Y Hetereologdical Data Teme Dry eC Teme Het C Atmos Pres 146135 88 mbar Rel Humid 168 68 r
55. F1 to return to CONFIGURE Logging Occupation Settings Additional functionality available in this panel over Standard mode is Auto OCUPY Auto Stop STOP P PRC and END Survey LCOMFIGURE Occupation Settings OCCUPY Mode Mor mal Auto OCCUPY YESe Auto Shop STOP P PRC Timer Auto Store HOY END ur Wey Automat iot OMT E PAE Auto OCUPY will automatically occupy the point as soon as the survey is started Timed is chosen for automatic point occupations at a certain time The time is specified in the SURVEY panel Auto Stop will automatically stop the measurements according to the setting in the STOP P PRC function The measurements stop when the criteria for the setting reach 100 5 Configuring the Receiver STOP P PRC Defines the method used for Auto Stop when Auto Stop is set to YES When Auto Stop is set to NO a percentage value will be displayed next to the Time or Epochs in the Main Survey screen This indicates how much of the Auto Stop criteria has elapsed The Auto Stop criteria is defined using the P PRC F5 key see below END Survey Defines how the survey will be ended Manual lets you exit the survey yourself Automatic will exit the survey automatically Auto amp Shut down will exit the Survey and turn the sensor off When one of the STOP P PRC options is selected the P PRC F5 key will become available Pressing this key will enable you to configure the option you ha
56. Go Indicator gives infor Static Mode mation regarding the amount of time spent on a point and the amount of ed a Real Time DI tpt i i STATUZ 2TOFAGO Ingicator Data Format Leica time required at a point Completed Ae Time to Go Aaa Sats LivL2 TY 7 Time at Pt cine EE i i i wcle ips Last Sent is The information displayed differs GDOP et to lt max 73 S d i j ec i depending on whether you are in Stetic Obs static or moving mode OMT DATA CE OMT a a Data Format The data format being Completed A percentage value sent indicating how much data is required Sats L1 L2 The number of satellites for successful processing 100 and on L1 L2 being used in the how much has been collected The computation criteria used to display this value Last sent The amount of time since depend on what has been set in the the last message was sent Configuration Set See explanation below The DATA F3 and REF F6 keys are available The information Time to Go If set a timer showing displayed there is exactly the same how much time is left before you can as with a Real Time Rover cease observations for this point Time at Pt The amount of time spent recording at the point Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 10 Status Cycle Slips The number of cycle slips that have occurred on L1 L2 since recording commenced on the current point GDOP The current calculated value for PDOP or GDOP
57. Num of Segs and a positive integer value may be entered By Interval means that the interval at which the new points are created along the line can be entered lf By Interval is chosen the next line in the panel reads Interval and a positive integer value may be entered 11 Applications Strt Pnt Id Allows a point ID to be entered from which all subsequently created points from this line division will be assigned PtIDInc Dec Allows to enter a positive or negative integer value which will be used to create the point Ids that the newly created points will be assigned The new points will be stored in the chosen job as user entered grid points and can then be staked out using the usual stake out routines 11 Applications Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The Utilities menu item is revealed by pressing SHOW F4 from the Main Menu UTILITIES Meru 1 Directory of Memory Device Format Memory Module 3 Enter Security Code q Se Test OMT a a Utilities contains file memory and security utilities Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The directory of the currently se lected memory device is displayed ir OMT TE E If an internal memory is fitted DEVCE F5 will be available Use this to access the directory of the internal memory To enter a directory highlight it and press ENTER To move up a level out of a sub directory highlight the double points and press ENTER CODE
58. Obs Rec Rate The Observation Recording Rate currently set Static Obs The number of Static Observations epochs recorded at this point Completed Criteria If no special settings have been made in the Configuration Set the percentage is a conservative estimate based on a 10 15km baseline This is also the default setting for Real Time Reference Stations 10 Status In a Post Processed Survey where Auto Stop and or STOP P PRC have been set the value may be displayed according to Time A minimum time is specified Observations A certain number of observations have been specified Stop and Go Indicator A baseline length is selected and a percentage calculated using the baseline length number of satellites and GDOP No Sats A length of time is specified that varies with the number of satellites available In a Real Time Rover Survey where Auto Stop and or STOP R TME have been set the value may be displayed according to Accuracy when the specified accuracy is reached measurement will stop This is impossible to predict in percentage terms and so the default Stop and Go indicator 10 15km is displayed Positions The number of real time positions required on each point are specified Stop and Go Indicator A baseline length is selected and a percentage calculated using the baseline length number of satellites and GDOP No Sats A length of time is specified that varies with the numbe
59. Offset VR Vertical Height Reading VE1 Vertical Phase Center Eccentricity for L1 VE2 Vertical Phase Center Eccentricity for L2 MRP Mechanical Reference Plane Although an AT501 502 Antenna is shown the same principles apply to the AT504 and AT303 The Vertical Height Reading VR value fixed at the height of the pole Witha standard Leica System 500 pole this is 2 0m There are two System 500 upper pole halves One has a 5 8 inch screw the Antenna screws on directly The other has a stub and uses a GAD931 stub to screw adapter Whichever pole type is used the height remains at 2 00m Additional 1 00 m pole sections maybe easily added or subtracted In some special cases where the lower half of the pole alone is used the height will be 1 00m The Vertical Offset VO value is zero in this case The Vertical Phase Center Eccentricities are stored in the Receiver for all Leica System 500 Antennas and any non Leica Antenna that you define As long as the correct Antenna is chosen there is no need to enter any value into the Receiver These values do need to be calculated when a new type of Antenna that does not exist in the Antenna Setup Records is used eS o Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 15 3 Measuring Slope Heights HO Py VE2 veE1 a MRP Vo a E Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en MRP Vertical Offset Horizontal Offset Slope Height Reading Vertical Phase Center Eccentricity for L1 Vertical Phase Ce
60. POLAR REVRSREDAHFPCKUP IMIT Stake Out starts Select the orientation Then move to the Target field shown empty here You must select a line as the target Press ENTER TAKE OLIT STELine TxT r Line ir CONT HEW EDIT DEL AlPARAM MUM You may select the line from this panel If no lines are defined as here press NEW F2 to define one 227 Descriptions of how to define lines are given in section 7 5 4 Although this section is concerned with orientation the principles of defining lines are exactly the same When you have selected defined a line use the PARAM F5 key to define the grid parameters TAKE OLT Grid Station Beqe mM Horz Offset 8 888 M Vert Offsets ABBA M Station Inc 8 888 M Scale i 2aaeeee OMT REPL CURST Station Beg The distance along the Reference Line to the first grid point Horz Offset The Horizontal Offset from the Reference Line to the first grid point Vert Offset The Vertical Offset from the Reference Line to the first grid point 7 Measuring with System 500 Station Inc The distance between each grid point in the direction of the Reference Line Scale Depending on the transformation method used and the stake out design criteria you may specify a scale factor to be applied to the increment value within the map projection plane This is only used when staking out grids over large areas tens of kilometers and
61. PORT 2 PWR PORT 1 Terminal PWR Pin Function Pin Function 1 KDU_ON 1 Bat 2 KDU_PWR 2 12V2 3 GND 3 GND 4 Rx 4 5 TX 5 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 1 Input into sensor 2 Output out from sensor Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Sockets Port 1 and 3 Lemo FGA 1B 308 CLCD x2Z Port 2 PWR Lemo FGG 1B 305 CLCx xxZ Event Lemo ERN OS 250 CTL PPS Lemo HGP 00 250 CTL Appendix F Appendix G Data Device Directory Structure The following structure refers to PC Cards and Internal Memory It shows where files are stored for transfer to and from the System RAM and where data is stored All Codelists CODE CONVERT All Format files from Format Manager Cultivated Field Control Log Mask File DATA User defined ASCII files STK_Line txt Line Definition File Point Files GPS Alamanac files DTM DTM Stakeout file GEOID Geoid Model Field files GEODB All Jobs CSCS CSCS Field Files Coordinate System Files RINGBUF Ring Buffer Files RS500 Appendix G Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en GPS Antenna Info Record Files beacon txt Beacon Station List Stations bin Modem GSM Station List CONF Configuration Sets PROG oo Firmware Files Language Files Sysram sys System RAM file SERVICES Telemax Accountfiles GSI GSI Files IDEX _ ___IDEX Files LOG __ Log Files from Application
62. Pacific Crest RFM96 and PDL Models A radio which is programmed as a repeater can still be used for refer ence and rover applications How ever this is not recommended for power consumption reasons It is important that all radio modems at reference repeater and rover operate on the same frequency For a channel switch the repeater requires connection to the sensor The GHT38 is a repeater box for the Leica housings for radio modems By using this box the housings can be fixed to a tripod The power supply for the modem is enabled with an exter nal battery and a power cable For more information on how to set up a repeater with a repeater box see a section 2 13 Appendix H GSM GSM devices are normally used to transmit or receive Real Time data Additionally a GSM device may also be used to steer and communicate with the Sensor e g to download raw data from a remote location etc The following standard GSM models are directly supported with System 500 and fit into a Radio Housing Siemens M1 Siemens M20 Siemens TC35 Wavecom WMOD2 Wavecom M1200 Series The following GSM models are also supported but do not fit into a hous ing Bosch 908 909 Sagem MC850 Siemens S25 S35i Bs Before using GSM phones for data transmission make sure your network operator supports data transmission Appendix H If you are using a third party GSM phone make sure it supports AT command language Configur
63. Point ld and any Thematical Code that you may have assigned If Auto Store has been set in the Configuration this will happen automatically Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 Measuring with System 500 Once the point is stored again the OCUPY F1 key becomes available and the start time line is shown with the current time and the seconds rounded to zero To start a new occupation either the first point recording after initialization or a subsequent point recording enter the next start time Then press OCUPY F1 7 Measuring with System 500 7 2 7 Using the AUTO key lf Log Auto Positions is set to YES in the CONFIGURE Logging screen the Auto F3 key is available in the main Survey screen SURWEY Def sult Point Id z Ant Height GUOP dad r acae AUTO T ADDI Auto F3 can be used to switch to the mode for measuring Auto Positions in the Auto Pos panel This functionality is mostly used in Real Time Rover operations For details on measuring Auto Positions refer to chapter 7 4 7 Using the AUTO key in Real Time Rover measurement procedures 7 2 8 Using the ADD key When the Advanced Mode is selected the ADD F5 key is available SURVEY Defa lt Point Ig EEr i nt Ant Height 1 24354 M GOOF n Bc This key can be used to add Point Annotations Meteorological Data and Hidden Points Press ADD F5 SURWEY Add Henu ee ee iornz Z Meterecnlogical
64. Points to Stake and Staked Points are available When you have set the required Filter press CONT F1 to continue 11 Applications 11 4 Calculator The Calculator functions according to the RPN principle This has the advantage that complicated calculations require less keystrokes It is available for any calculation you wish to make 11 5 Wake up Sessions You may program the Receiver to automatically start measure and then shut down again without any interaction from an operator You may define several Wake Up Sessions in order that the Receiver will make several measurements automatically one after the other a Henu Bil Determine Coord System Point Hanagement Calcula F Line Division CONT a Select Wake up Sessions from the APPLICATION menu Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en ir COMT HEM JEDIT DEL IMFO Any existing Wake up Sessions are displayed Use NEW F2 to enter a new Wake up Session Use EDIT F3 to edit an existing Wake up Session Use DEL F4 to delete an existing Wake up session When NEW F2 is pressed the following screen appears Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Cort id set Start Date Start Time Durat ion OMT a a 13 81 99 AAG 0A Ae DA As 0A Job Select the job which should be used to record the point s data Config Set Select the Configuration Set which should be used Start Date Enter the date when the
65. Real Time Rover and a signal is available from a reference station the Receiver will also automatically start the ambiguity resolution process Stake Out is the staking out of predetermined points These points may have been surveyed earlier and uploaded through SKI Pro may already exist in a Job on the Receiver or may have been uploaded in an ASCII file System 500 offers the possibility to stake out points slopes and grids Stakeout must always be performed in Real Time normally using a SR530 in order that centimeter level accuracies can be achieved Therefore a Real Time Rover type Configuration Set should always be used Set up the equipment as described in Chapter 2 Attach the Terminal 7 Measuring with System 500 7 5 1 Entering Stakeout From the Main Menu select Stake Out 1 Surve 3 IA 4 Utilities 5 Job 6 Conf igure T TRAaNSter ian OMT IE The following screen will then appear Default Store PLS Def sult Stake Types Foint Anite z ATOZ Polet Ant Height OMT E EE Config Set The Configuration Set used for the stakeout Stake Pts The Job or ASCII file used as the source for the points to be staked The source type can be configured in CONFIG Survey Stakeout Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Store Pts The Job where the staked points are stored Stake Type The type of Stake Out operation to be performed Antenna The Antenna setup used defined i
66. Receiver front panel 10 Port 2 5 pin Lemo Power data in out Pressure equalisation vent Port 1 8 pin Lemo Power data in out PC Card door Terminal in out or Remote Interface in out 2 Set up and Connection 2 2 Equipment Setup Post Processed Static Rapid Static Reference on Pillar Use a Static Rapid Static operations or as Reference for Kin ematic The Receiver and TR500 if used can be assembled to make one unit One connection is made to the GPS Antenna which is mounted on the Pillar The Receiver and TR500 can be kept in the case Note that the Receiver can be programmed with the TR500 prior to use which can then be omitted from the set up Assumptions 1 GPS Antenna is mounted directly using screw fitting If using stub and GAD 31 adapter procedures may vary slightly 2 GPS Antennas are AT501 or AT502 Procedures setup may vary if AT503 504 or single frequency choke ring are used 2 Set up and Connection Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Equipment Checklist 1 i SOANAOTRWN GPS Antenna AT501 502 503 504 or 505 GRT146 Carrier GDF 122 or GDF 112 Tribrach Pillar Plate if required GEV120 2 8m Antenna Cable 2 GEB121 Batteries SR510 520 530 GPS Receiver TR500 Terminal if required MCF XMB 3 PC Flash Card GVP602 System 500 Transport Case Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 Set up and Connectio
67. Slot a7 End of Mog Hoi CONT Time Slicing Activates time slicing If set to Yes two more lines become available Used Ref Stations Set the number of reference stations in use You can have up to 4 reference stations from where RIK messages are sent Time Slot The time slot represents the actual time delay The number of time slots is the number of reference stations in use The time delay equals 1 sec devided by the total number of reference stations If two reference stations are used the number of time delay is 0 50 5 Configuring the Receiver Therefore the time slots are at 0 00 sec and at 0 50 sec With three reference stations the time delay is 0 33 The time slots are at 0 00 0 33 and 0 66 sec The second Real Time 2 interface is completely independent to the Real Time 1 interface so that the number of reference stations and time slots can be configured differently 5 Configuring the Receiver Logging In addition to the functionality given in Standard mode you can also specify the observables to be recorded and access further functionality via the FILES F6 key COMFIGURE Loaairg Lod Static Obs VES Obs Rate J OhSepYvsahles Hor mal OMT PLES Observables Defines what is recorded in the raw GPS data Extended records extra observables including the Doppler observable Pressing the FILES F6 key enables you to configure further options Low File Seamernt
68. TR500 GLS20 Lower half aluminium pole GEV141 1 2m Antenna cable GEV142 1 6m Antenna cable TR500 Terminal 2 GEB121 Batteries SR510 520 or 530 GPS Re ceiver Radio Modem in GFU5 6 Hous ing MCF XMB 3 PCMCIA flash card GEV97 1 8m 5pin Lemo cable GEV141 1 2m Antenna cable GAT1 GAT2 Radio Antenna GAD34 Small Antenna Arm GAD32 Telescopic Rod GVP603 Minipack Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 Set up and Connection How to set up the equipment Follow steps 1 5 as described in al section 2 4 6 10 Attach the Radio Modem Hous ing containing the Radio Modem to the GPS Receiver Place the GPS Receiver front panel up in the Minipack with the batteries facing outwards Fasten the strap around the Receiver refer to diagram Push the Telescopic Rod through the slit in the top of the Minipack Ensure it is located in the sleeve inside the Minipack and push it all the way to the bottom Adjust the height of the Telescopic Rod to suit Screw the Short Antenna Arm onto the Telescopic Rod Screw the Radio Antenna onto the Short Antenna Arm Connect the Radio Modem to the Radio Antenna using a 1 2m Antenna Cable The cable should pass down underneath 2 Set up and Connection 11 12 13 the Receiver and then up through the slit in the top of the Minipack Connect the GPS Antenna to the Receiver
69. YES is chosen an additional line appears below Monitor CQ to enter the specified quality Use Annot This line is visible if Store Pt DB is set to YES If YES point annotations will be stored in the GeoDB with each auto logged point too Point Annotations may be used as an electronic notepad where events notes etc may be written They are then taken with the point Id information into SKI Pro 5 Configuring the Receiver Point annotations for auto logged points are independant from point annotations for manually occupied points Position Logging TEZ Start Mode Immediat et G1lty Info Only Cor Use Beep m Hor Monitor Co TEZ SD Quality oe FIRE Use Annot CONT AAT An ANNOT F5 key becomes available Vs Point annotations Ss es ee Hz 5 Tree fell on head fi Coulda t Find point H4 Packed UP and went home cant T O O CLEAR You may type in 4 notes with up to 26 characters in each note Press CLEAR F6 to delete the content of all input fields and CONT F1 to leave the panel After doing so and reentering the panel SURVEY Point Annotations with ANNOT F5 the keys LAST F3 and LAST F5 will be active stands for the numbers 1 to 4 of the point annotations and changes with the cursor position LAST F3 reactivates all previous four point annotations LAST F5 only reactivates the previous annotation of the last line Annotations are ignored when entering point annotat
70. all available devices is given in Appendix H 5 Configuring the Receiver Press CONT F1 to return to CON FIGURE Real Time1 Pressing REF F6 enables you to configure further options concerning the broadcast messages from the reference station Ref ttn Ig End of MSc Hothinar RTCH MVersn fai CONT You may define a number for the reference station ID select a carriage return at the end of each message and if RTCM format has been selected choose the RTCM Version to output Note that the Reference and Rover must use the same RTCM version You will need to define a Ref Stn ld if 1 You intend to work with 2 reference stations simultaneously broadcasting on different frequency channels and use frequency switching at the rover or 2 The Reference is being moved from one point to another If it is required to configure the sec ond real time interface press SHIFT R T 2 F2 in the CONFIGURE Real Time 1 panel A Time Data Data Formate Reference Leica 1 2ate11ine AF n 1 67 Por t Rate Li HELP A T A EIT Configure the parameters for the Real Time 2 interface as described above The second Real Time 2 interface is completely independent to the Real Time 1 interface so that a different Data Format and Rate may be selected Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Note that a different port must be Logging For Real Time Reference stations the selected to that used for the Real If r
71. and Free Coding Thematical Codes are point based information recorded together with the other point information Free Codes are time based information independent of the points A time stamp is recorded with each free code allowing the subsequent export of points and codes in chronological order This information can then be used in third party mapping software 8 Coding Thematical Coding is point based information recorded at the point you are occupying Thematical Codelists consist of Layers Codes and Attributes The Layer is the primary block of the codelist and describes a group of related codes For example the Layer Vegetation could describe the Codes Tree Grass Shrub etc The Code is the secondary block and usually describes a single object A Code may have one or more Attributes attached to it Attributes describe properties of the Code For example the Code Tree could have the Attributes Type Height Age Girth Spread etc 8 Coding Coding 8 1 Thematical Coding Although it is possible to create a new empty Codelist on the Receiver and then create new Layers Codes and it is far more practical to create the complete Codelist in SKI Pro Codelist Manager and upload it to the Receiver Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 8 1 1 Importing Selecting and Defining a Thematical Codelist Codelists can be transferred to the PC Card or Internal Memory using the Transfer function in SKI Pro Cod
72. and you wish to switch from one reference station to another Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en CONF IGURE Radio Type Radio Channel Sabelline SASxXE Channel Accept Ref User defined Ref Str Ig a CONT EA With User defined you may press SCAN F5 to access a list of refer ence stations transmitting on the particular channel The list shows the reference station IDs the RTK format used for transmitting and the latency time delay with which the messages are sent This SCAN functionality is independant from time slicing and can therefore always be used to check the RTK format of the refer ence Conf igure can Ref Str Strid ECE Format ise ir CL se Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Highlight the reference station you wish to use CONT F1 returns to the previous panel The number of the selected reference station is taken over into the Ref Stn Id line Note that setting Ref Stn Ids is only possible without a survey or stakeout operation running Repeaters and Repeater Box Firmware 3 00 and higher supports the use of repeaters A repeater is a radio which is set up for repeater mode A repeater receives data from the reference and broadcasts the data further to the rover Consequently the range increases The total range depends on the set up of reference repeater and rover Since not all radio modems are suitable as repeaters we recommend the Satelline 3AS d and all
73. approach may be the most suitable The 2 Step approach takes the local ellipsoid and map projection into account and can therefore be used for larger areas than 1 Step trans formations Compared to the Classical 3D approach it treats position and height information separately which allows for position only control points to be used as well In order to determine a Coordinate System you will require the coordinates of points in both the WGS84 and local coordinate system Depending on the type of transformation you wish to use you may also need details of the map projection local ellipsoid and a local geoidal model program 11 Applications 1 3D Helmert Transformation Ellipsoid and Projection must be known Geoid information is optional 2 1 Step Transformation Geoid information is optional no other information is required 3 2 Step Transformation Ellipsoid Projection and a Pre transformation must be known Geoid information is optional ll Hernu Determine Coord System AS Point Managenent As Calculator Ad Wake up Sessions AS COGO b Ares AT Line Division Ce ee From the Application Menu select Determine Coord System and press CONT F1 Determination Beair COORDS Ym Coord us ee ee ee HG54 PRS Determinat iont Local PRS Cregg ig ttt caT O O LOCAL SCEE Coord Sys Type in a new name for the new coordinate system WGS84 Pts Select the Job from which the points w
74. at one time Status Indicates if the currently chosen ring buffer is ACTIVE log ging or INACTIVE not logging Obs Rate The rate at which obser vations will be logged to the chosen ring buffer Choose between 0 1s to 60s Data Interval The size of the ring buffer This sets the duration for how long data should be recorded to the ring buffer before newly observed data is recorded over the oldest data Flag Obs Defines the dynamic mode for the selected Ring Buffer Choose between Static and Moving Device If the sensor has internal memory installed then the data recorded to the ring buffer can be stored on the sensor internal memory or the PC Card Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Starting the Ring Buffer Once the chosen ring buffer has been configured pressing START F3 activates logging to the ring buffer COMFIGURE Bind Buffer Rina Buffer Woe SLatLus Inactive jbs Rate n A i Data Interval 16 mins Flag Ob n SLaLic Dewi ce PC Card OMT TAAT TE Note that if there is insufficient memory available on the chosen device for the ring buffer then it will not become active Either the ring buffer configuration is reduced in size by choosing a different interval or shorter period or the memory available on the chosen device is increased by erasing data from the card Once the chosen ring buffer is active the STOP F3 button then becomes available to stop logging to the r
75. by pressing CTRL F5 For information about all supported Real Time devices refer to Appendix H For information about Real Time Reference parameters refer to section 5 3 Configuring the Receiver for Real Time Reference Operations 9 The CONFIG Key 9 11 Interfaces NMEA Output For information about Real Time The NMEA Output interface enables Use the MESGS F3 key to display Rover parameters refer to section 5 4 you to configure which NMEA the messages that can be output the Con figuring the Receiver for Real messages to output through which port rates and the output timing method Time Rover Operations using which device Set the focus on NMEA Output and press EDIT F3 to select the NMEA messages to be output Uze Devices YES it CONT JEDIT USE ALL J Port Wes testelline 2AS Messages GGA 2DA Highlight the message that is to be output and press F3 EDIT to CONT CONT MESGS ID DEUCE configure how a particular message is sent Select the port to which the NMEA a S messages should be sent Use the a E E DEVCE F5 key to configure the ra Vesey device itself Refer to Appendix H fora Suteut Time At Epoch complete list of all supported devices cutout Deisi m Use the ID F4 key to define the talker a a ID that appears at the beginning of each message This will normally Rate Choose a rate between 0 1 remain at the default GP for GPS and 3600s at which the message sh
76. conditions the Re ceiver can be placed in the transport case during use for extra protection Try to shut the case as completely as possible If the Receiver is left in the case during use in tempera tures exceeding 25 C the lid should be left open Refer to Appendix A for operating and storage temperatures Use an external battery such as GEB71 to extend the operating time past 6 hours 2 Set up and Connection 2 4 Equipment Setup Post Processed Kinematic Minipack and Pole Use a Post Processed Kinematic Rover The Receiver is placed in the Minipack Connections are made to the Antenna and TR500 Recommended for extended periods of use in the field Assumptions 1 GPS Antenna is mounted directly using screw fitting If using stub and GAD 31 adapter procedures may vary slightly 2 Aluminium poles are used You may replace them with their Carbon Fiber equivalents without any change to these instructions 2 Set up and Connection Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Equipment Checklist 1 2 GPS Antenna AT501 or 502 GLS21 Upper half aluminium pole with screw GHT25 Grip for pole GHT27 Holder for TR500 GLS20 Lower half aluminium pole GEV141 1 2m Antenna cable GEV142 1 6m Antenna cable TR500 Terminal 2 GEB121 Batteries SR510 520 or 530 GPS Re ceiver GVP603 Minipack MCF XMB 3 PCMCIA flash card GEV97 1 8m 5pin Lemo cable Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en
77. confirm the entry and return to JOB PC Card or Deleting a Job JOB Internal To delete a Job select the Job and a press the DEL F4 key You will be asked for confirmation before the Job Name Defines the Job name The is deleted All points and data con name may be up to 16 characters tained in the Job will be lost long and may include spaces Selecting the Device Description A description of the job Jobs may be stored on the PC Card can be entered This could be for or the Internal Memory if fitted To example work to be performed or the change the device viewed press the type class of points contained in the DEVCE F5 key job Optional Creator The name of the person that created the job may be entered Optional 6 Jobs Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 Measuring with System 500 The use of System 500 with the most common techniques of measurement are described The correct Receiver must be used for the technique chosen An overview is given below Application Post Processed Post Processed Post Processed Real Time Real Time Static R Static Kinematic Static Kinematic on DGPS 1 5 m RTK 1 5cm Post Processed Initialisation Kinematic Reference SR510 with RTCM2 0 option SR520 with RTCM2 0 option 7 Measuring with System 500 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 1 Static and Rapid Static Survey Post Processed Kinematic Reference Set up the equipment as descri
78. csv Now you have two choices You may either automatically match the new points and calculate the new parameters by pressing AUTO F5 Alternatively you may proceed manually through the Coordinate Determination as described in the last section When adding new points manually the points matched in the previous parameter calculation are recalled and used again even if they did not have matching point Ids The new point s have to be selected by you using the NEW F2 key When AUTO F5 is pressed the coordinates that were matched in the previous parameter calculation are recalled and used again even if they did not have matching point Ids The new point s that have identical point Ids will be matched and included in the computation You are then presented with the results Press CONT F1 to accept them or if there is a problem press ESC to return to the Determination Begin screen and recompute manually 11 Applications 11 3 Point Management Enables you to manage the points contained in the currently selected Job You may also set a point filter according to varying criteria APPLICATION Meru Determine Coord System 2 Point Manaqement AS Calculator Ad Wake up Sessions AS Coco FG Ares ar Line Division a es ee ee Select Point Management and press CONT F1 11 Applications ir CONT HEM JEDIT DEL IMFO jotted Each point is displayed with the time and date on which it was
79. example of what you have defined is given at the bottom of the screen Press CONT F1 to return to the previous screen When GSI File is selected a GSI coordinate switch may be defined This is necessary in case of left handed coordinate systems The W181 value normally the easting value is then imported as the northing and the WI82 value normally the northing value as the easting 13 Transfer TRANSFER ASCIiI Gel to Job THRE x GSI Filet From File ee To Job n Hat Tupe Ortho Aah Li HELP TES TT Use SHIFT LHS F3 to define the GSI coordinate switch Switch 81 82 YES activates the coordinate switch TRAHSFER GSI Coord SuWitch Switch 51752 BEE Ce a ee Press CONT F1 to return to the previous screen 13 Transfer 13 7 GSI User Enables you to convert a Job into an ASCII file using a Format file Format files define the format of the final ASCII file and are created using Leica Format Manager software z PC Card Ta z PC Card Job Determinat iont Foor mat n GZilb frtY Destinatn Gol Filet File z ili TA OMT A e FU UF LIL Select From which device you wish to select a Job and To which device you wish to store the ASCII file The ASCII file can either be written to the PC card Internal Memory or alternatively to another device via a serial port Job Select the Job from which you wish to write the data Format Select the Format File th
80. fell on head H3 Coglgnt ting paint Hed Packed up and Went home EEEE You may type in 4 notes with up to 26 characters in each note Press CONT F1 when you are finished Press CLEAR F6 to delete the content of all fields Adding Meteorological Data Meteorological data may be required when very precise work is being carried out or when very different weather conditions exist between the Rover and Reference When carrying out Real Time Rover work it only makes sense to input meteorological data when recording data for post processing as well as recording points in real time The meteorological data should be entered at distinct points not during the moving parts This data will not be used by SKI Pro but may be exported in RINEX format from SKI Pro and used in a scientific processing software that accepts meteorological data for tropospheric modelling Select Meteorological Data from the list and press CONT F1 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Teme Dry eC Teme Het C Atmos Pres 1413 88 mbar Rel Humi 168 68 rm STORET Enter the data and press STORE F1 The data will be stored with a time tag During long observation periods you may need to store several sets of meteorological data as the weather changes Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Hidden Points A hidden point is a point that cannot be measured by GPS This is normally due to satellite shading caused by trees overhead t
81. indicate automatically incrementing numbers Num Start Defines the start position of any automatically incrementing number Num End Defines the end position of any automatically incrementing numbers Auto Inc Defines whether the number will increment automatically at subsequent points Num Inc defines the amount by which any automatically incrementing number will increment Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Cursor Pos Defines the position at which the cursor will start at Press CONT F1 until you return to the CONFIGURE Id Templates screen Further options are available on this screen in Advanced mode See section 5 4 1 for details 5 Configuring the Receiver Working Example 1 Requirement You are completing a survey where you will require many different point IDs Most point IDs will need an incrementing number behind the text The first points you measure will need the point ID Bolt In CONFIG OCUPY Pts set up a point ID template as shown here Note that the Id type is set to Remain Running Field Proc Within the Survey panel the first point will automatically show the Point Id Bolt 001 upon pressing STORE the next Point Id will automatically show Bolt 002 5 Configuring the Receiver CONFIGURE OCCUPY PLe Id Type n Remain RUA Td Bolt FEE Hum Sharh Hum Eng Auto ING Hum ING n CuUrsOrt Pos 1Y CONT s es ee EY Def sult z B
82. information about the data being received from the satellites Sat Be F ase Li Cyc FR hase LE 8 SS Cyc Code Li Fo eee m Code LZ Fo eee M CONT AT A Sat The number of the chosen satellite Phase L1 The number of phase cycles from the Antenna to the satellite on L1 Phase L2 The number of phase cycles from the Antenna to the satellite on L2 Code L1 The pseudorange to the satellite from L1 data Code L2 The pseudorange to the satellite from L2 data 10 Status Press AMBIG F4 for information about the ambiguity resolution pro cess Z gt AMT aah OMT a a Each Satellite used in the real time computation is displayed with the ambiguity status on each frequency YES indicates a fixed ambiguity NO that the ambiguity is not yet fixed Press REF F6 for information about the Reference Station STATUS Reference Stn Coords Point Id Hew 1 Ant Height Z000 m Hark er Local E 242555 AzS M Local H n D456 829 M Local EWat a ol eS M CONT COORD PT The Point Id and Antenna Height Ant Height of the reference point are displayed Then either Marker or Antenna is displayed indicating from where the coordinate is given Press COORD F2 to view the coordinates in WGS84 Geodetic and Cartesian formats and local grid coordinates if a Coordinate System is being used Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 10 2 Stop and Go Indicator 2 Real Time Reference The Stop amp
83. many advan tages to stake out points stored in a job rather than staking from an ASCII file For example points stored ina job can be filtered and sorted indi vidual points can be found more quickly and so on The ASCII file may be in a simple Format e g Pt Id East North Height or in GSI8 or GSI16 format e g Pt ld East North Height Code Attributes In all cases the imported height can be selected to be orthometric or ellipsoidal Codes and attributes can be imported with GSI8 and GSI 16 This is restricted to thematical coding which uses WI71 for code IDs and WI72 to 79 for attribute values 13 Transfer Example for an ASCII file in GSI8 format 110001 00000015 81 00 64340360 82 00 52962354 83 00 00000689 71 000sheep 72 000black 73 40000DEAD 74 23102001 75 40011h02m The converted points will be added attributes are attached to the point in to the Job database Points are the GSI file the program then always imported with the point class performs a subsequent check It controll If a point already exists in prompts when a code or attribute the database with the point class value is different controll the program will prompt you to overwrite it or not If a point already exists in the database with the point class measured the program will prompt you to add the point that is to be imported as controll point If this is answered with yes and codes and possibly 312 Technical R
84. messages will appear If however the point is outside the Required CQ it may warrant further investigation Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 1 Measurement Stakeout of transi The Line is defined as the section tion points of slopes for cross line through the terrain You ensure sections that you follow this line by observing the Left Right value and keeping it at or near zero When you arrive at a i point where the level of the terrain begins to change record the point You can also stake this point for future reference SCG Section a ae S Startpoint of slope x Transition point to be measured staked Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 Staking out of slope intercepts points where design slopes and terrain intersect I O S Startpoint of Slope Line E Endpoint of Slope Line P Current Position I O Horizontal Distance In Out to Start Point C F Vertical Distance Cut Fill to Slope Line Slope Intercept 7 Measuring with System 500 The Slope Line is defined and se lected Proceed along the line You can ensure that you keep on the line by observing the Left Right value and keeping it at or near zero Observe the Cut Fill value At the intercept s it will be zero When you arrive at such a point stake it and record it 7 Measuring with System 500 Procedure Slope is selected as the Stake Type when entering Stake Out STAKE OUT Beair Confid Sethe RT TAERE
85. no auto logged points are being measured Thematical Coding with auto logged points The procedure of thematically coding auto logged points is very similar to the thematical coding of Occupy Points For further information on coding Occupy Points see chapter 7 4 4 Adding a Code Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en AUTO POE Default Auto Pe Id Time and Date Auto Pt Cod CE Code Hame Mow ANE Hat SD Quality A B M l SURU ATRIE FOS START The fields AutoPt Code and Code Name will be displayed as above Highlighting the AutoPt Code you may either select a code from the given codelist or enter a new code The Code Name will be displayed for the AutoPt Code that you have chosen Using the ATRIB F4 key you may enter up to three attribute values for the code The code is stored then along with the AutoPt Id information Free Coding with auto logged points The procedure of free coding auto logged points is very similar to the free coding of Occupy Points For further information on coding Occupy Points see chapter 7 4 4 Adding a Code Def sult Time and Date AUTO PoOS Auto Pe Id Last Code Ae ala zL st Code Hou Ant Hgt Positions oe a0 uality AAZ M AORN CODE POS amp TOF The Last Code and the second last code 2Last Code that were used are shown To access the codelist and enter a different or new code press the CODE F4 key 7 Measuring w
86. points lines or areas Appendix K The CONFIG Key Described below are the changes that apply to the use of the CONFIG key in the GS50 and GS50 For example the main configuration menu uses the wording GIS Data Collection instead of Survey COMFIGURE Test crf 1 Dats Collection OFPEr ation 3 General 4 Interfaces CONT STORE CONG Appendix K Configuration Satellite The Satellite configuration option uses an additional choice for the track mode The default choice is Max Accuracy the additional choice on GS50 GS50 is MaxTrak Flew Mask Sl Health AULOnat1cF Track Mode Max ACCU ACH Lotsoflock Ho Beep CONT ee ee With the MaxTrak option satellite tracking is much more stable under poor GPS conditions For long time static measurements under good conditions the accuracy of the default Max Accuracy setting is higher than with the MaxTrak setting The MaxTrak should be used when no GPS measurement would normally be possible Track Mode as well as the SV Health configurations options are visible in Advanced mode only LossOf Lock When losing all satellite signals for example due to satellite shading caused by tall buildings trees etc a message Complete loss of lock appears The sensor may be configured to beep with this loss of lock message or not Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Configuration Coding The GS50 GS50 only allows themat
87. sensors Operating temp 20 C to 60 C Storage temp 40 C to 70 C The operating and storage tempera tures of all other MC500 components are the same as detailed in Appendix A Shock and Vibration Specifications Exceeds MIL STD 810C Proc VIII Equip Cat F for Tracked Vehicles Mounting Diagram The attached diagram shows the dimensions for mounting the MC500 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 291 8 11 43 260 1 10 24 a a e CLO 17 96 TYP WS 0 707 GE l i 30 TYF 177 MC500 GPS receiver Mounting Dimensions Appendix Documentation Packages Please see the following documenta tion to learn more about the MC500 MC500 User manual OWI Manual Dozer 2000 Installation and Mainte nance Manual Dozer 2000 User Manual Dozer 2000 Equipment List Appendix Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Introduction The RS500 receiver has been de signed specifically for use as a reference station The RS500 uses the same housing and meets the same environmental specifications as the SR5xx sensors which are detailed in Appendix A Generally the RS500 operates in the same manner as the SR530 but is designed to operate for specific reference station applications using remote control software i e Leica Geosystems ControlStation soft ware It supports internal logging of GPS raw data but can also log data from speci
88. serial number are displayed Control Mode Displays the device that is used to control the sensor Normally this the TR500 Additionally it indicates whether the PPS output and the Event Input ports are available 10 11 Software Version Status Displays the Firmware version the Boot software of the sensor Measurment Engine software Measurement Engine Boot software and the Firmware for the Keyboard Display TR500 currently installed MORE F6 provides information on special software settings 10 Status 10 12 Interfaces Status Gives an overview of all interfaces and the port and device currently assigned for that interface For example a sensor is being used as a real time rover with a Satelline radio attached to port 1 and hidden points are being collected using a DISTO connected to port 2 The NMEA output and the ASCII Input are not currently configured STATUS Interfaces HMEAR OU Put ASCII TApPut Hidden Point Heten T Pe C Da E OMT TFACE E For this type of operation the Interfaces panel would look as shown above 10 Status To get detailed information on the status of single interfaces press the IFACE F3 button Specific status information is available for the following interfaces Real Time Pressing IFACE F3 allows you to view the Real Time Input status For details see chapter 10 1 ASCII Input Pressing IFACE F3 allows you to view the ASCII Input s
89. standard equipment employs either public coastguard beacon or satellite differential signal provided by Racal Landstar for differential corrections Both equipment set ups are shown to you in the Equipment Setup chapter Real Time Rover GIS Rover Both require the use of GIS DataPRO software While the Racal Landstar signal provides global coverage except in the Polar Regions beacon stations only broadcast the public signal in certain areas With either option a typical accuracy of 40cm to 70cm can be expected but is dependent upon location Other DGPS sources are also available depending on your location In most countries one or more sources of public signal should be available The GS50 GS50 is able to work with any of these sources Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en provided there is a radio or modem capability to transmit the data ina standard RTCM data format The GS50 GS50 is also capable of transmitting standard RTCM corrections in real time TReasonable baseline length for best quality is about 100km depending on the atmosphereic conditions The measurement range for the baseline length is gt 1000km For additional information on locations and information please visit http www csi dgps com Appendix K Hardware and Accessories cont RACAL LANDSTAR RTS In addition to the standard features previously listed additional accesories can be used in conjunc tion with the GS50 to enhance da
90. the Auto Points will be stored to the GeoDB This is the setting that is needed if it is intended to store codes with Auto Points Auto Points stored to the GeoDB may additionally be viewed and edited in the Point Management they may be output with an FRT file they may be staked out or viewed in the Graph panel Note if it is chosen to store Auto Points to the GeoDB the maximum recording rate is 1Hz Start Mode You may select from either Immediate or Controlled If you select Immediate the system will automatically start with logging Auto Points as soon as you start the survey If you select Controlled you will decide when you start the logging of Auto Points Press the AUTO key in the main Survey panel to enter the mode for measuring Auto Positions In the AUTO POS panel the START F6 key will be available to you ae ae a ee Cogyiny Log every n 1 4 g Store Pt DE YEZY Start Moge Controlled alty Info Only Cor Use peep m TEZY Monitor om YES SD guality CE A a 5 Configuring the Receiver Quality Info Defines which quality information should be recorded with the position You may select from the Full covariance information or just the coordinate quality CQ only Use Beep If YES the terminal will beep when an automatic position is logged Monitor CQ If YES the CQ of the automatic position will be monitored and the point will only be recorded if less than the specified quality When
91. the upper pole halves with stub ensure that the Antenna and GAD31 screw stub adapter slide down the full length of the stub before tightening the locking ring An incorrectly mounted Antenna will have a direct effect on your results Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 6 Equipment Setup Post Processed Kinematic All on Pole TR500 and Sensor separated Use Post processed Kinematic Rover The TR500 is fixed to the pole grip with a holder With another metallic holder and a holder piece the receiver is fixed to the pole One connection is made from the Re ceiver to the Antenna Another connection is made from the Receiver to the TR500 Recommended for short periods of use especially where there are many obstacles fences etc Assumptions 1 GPS Antenna is mounted directly using screw fitting If using stub and GAD 31 adapter procedures may vary slightly 2 Aluminium poles are used You may replace them with their Carbon Fiber equivalents without any change to these instructions Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 Set up and Connection Equipment Checklist GPS Antenna AT501 or 502 GLS18 Upper half aluminium pole with screw GHT25 Grip for pole GHT27 Holder for TR500 GLS17 Lower half aluminium pole GHT37 Holder piece for GPS Receiver with antenna cable and 5pin Lemo cable GHT26 Holder for GPS Receiver TR500 Terminal 2 GEB121 Batteries SR510 520 or 530 GPS Re c
92. these two options will be used to log raw data again automatically If the chosen Data Format is RTCM the RTCM F6 button is available RTCH Wersri 1 HEit pyte DTF Ref Het TEZY Telemax n Accountfiles account tm Y OMT a a RTCM Versn Choose between RTCM v2 1 and v2 2 Bits Byte Choose between 6 and 8 bits per byte Change Ref Net to YES if corrections for a virtual reference shall be used Telemax To make use of the German SAPOS reference station service via Telemax set to YES For more information see Appendix H Accountfile Only available if Telemax YES Select the appropriate Accountfile which you have transferred to the receiver before Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Logging In addition to the functionality given in Standard mode you can also specify the observables to be recorded and access further functionality via the FILES F6 key Loy Static Obs Obs Rate Log Hovinga Obs Static Init ObSer Vab les n Loy Auto Positions Hovinga Ant Height Z000 M Ce a I LEE Observables Defines what is recorded in the raw GPS data Extended records extra observables including the Doppler observable Pressing the FILES F6 key enables you to configure further options Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Log File teamernts Auto Del Low Files Hever t OMT a T Log File Segments will split up the recorded data into files of a specific length unless 1 Fi
93. to a code indicates that it has attributes Press CONT F1 to select the code Further information about Coding Systems is available in Section 8 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 2 5 Adding a Starting Time It will be possible to add a starting time for a point occupation if auto occupy has been set to Timed in the Occupation Settings of the Configuration Set SURWEY Point Id Def sult Ant Height 1 2354 M Start Time 12 z4 0 GOOF z Bc Initially the time displayed in Start Time is the current time with the seconds rounded to zero Enter the time in Start Time in hours minutes seconds 7 Measuring with System 500 7 2 6 Measuring Procedure The exact measuring procedure varies depending upon which Receiver you are using and the Configuration Set When using an SR510 you must perform a Static Initialization before commencing the moving part of the survey The option to do this is activated in the Configuration Set When using a SR520 or SR530 you may also perform a Static Initialization if required although there is not strictly any need to do so When using the SR520 and SR530 the normal way to work will be to initialize on the fly No Static Initialization is then required 7 Measuring with System 500 Measuring with Static Initialization without starting time If you have selected to perform a static initialization press OCUPY F1 as soon as you are ready The stati
94. to the previously suggested Point Id If you define a Point Id Template in the Configuration Set you have even more flexibility to automatically define your Point Id s Further information about Point Id Templates and two working examples are given in Chapter 5 2 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 4 3 Adding the Antenna Height SURWEY Def sult Point Id n Ant Height A iz m CUP T HIT GUSLItY Usually in Real Time Rover surveys the Antenna will be mounted on a pole and therefore will remain constant When an AT501 502 Antenna is used together with a System 500 pole the Antenna Height is 2 00m This may have been specified as the default height in the Configuration Set Otherwise measure the Antenna height and enter it The only time when the Antenna height will not remain constant is when a Static Initialization is carried out on a Tripod and the Antenna is then transferred onto a pole In this case measure the Antenna height on the Tripod and enter it Then after pressing STOP F1 to finish the initialization the Moving Antenna height specified in the Configuration Set will be used for the moving part of the Real Time Rover work It will be possible to add a code if a coding system has been defined in the Configuration Set 7 Measuring with System 500 7 4 4 Adding a Code It will be possible to add a code toa point if a coding system has been defined for use in t
95. will bring you back to COGO Inter section Alternatively press STAKE F5 to switch to the stakeout screen and use the coordinates directly for stakeout Input P1 Start point of first line E N h a Bearing Azimuth P2 Start point of second line E N h B Bearing Azimuth Output P Intersection point E N h Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Intersection Bearing Distance This function enables you to calculate the intersection point s of a line and a circle The line is defined by a point and a bearing azimuth and the circle by the centre point and the radius COGO Bra Distintersectiorn Point Id 1 Ay Bear iid n 35020A AA Parall of a AAA i Point Id 2 ET Distance 7A FAR mM Enter the start point 1 of the line or press NEWOC F5 to measure a new point Enter the Bearing Azimuth and the optional Parallel Offset Enter the centre point 2 and the radius Distance of the circle Instead of entering the values manually you may calculate them from two existing points by pressing INV F2 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Press COMP F1 to start the computation THABS2 LSS M S3HH1S 691 Mm z250 000 M Local E Local H Ortho Hat T RE C DOFRDOTHER j TAKE Easting Northing and Height of the first intersection point are displayed To display the second intersection point press OTHER F3 Enter a Point Id change the Height if neccessary and pres
96. you will also be able to enter a start time for the point occupation As soon as the receiver has enough information the DOP will be displayed The PP_KIS default post processed kinematic configuration set is defined such that you must perform a static initialization 7 Measuring with System 500 This will always be the case when using a SR510 SR520 and SR530 users may set the static initialization parameter to NO and perform initialization on the fly Further details about this procedure are given in the sections that follow 7 2 2 Adding the Point Id SURVEY Def au1t Point Id z Ant Height AHAA m GOOF n Ba The Point Id is an identifier for a particular point It also collates all measurements made on that point and all other associated data such as codes point annotations and meteorological data If a point Id template has been configured in the Configuration Set a Point Id will be suggested You can overwrite this with a different Id if required If no point Id is suggested then enter a point Id By default if the point Id contains any numerical values these will be incremented by 1 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en To break the auto numbering press Shift INDIV F5 and enter an individual Point Id After this point has been stored it will return to the previously suggested Point Id If you define a Point Id Template in the Configuration Set you have even more flexibility to automati
97. 0en Position This screen defines the way in which position is displayed These settings are mosily used for Real Time Rover setups COMFIGURE Position Update Rates Coord Sys Ph HG54 Geodetice m ee ee Update Rate Defines the rate at which the position will be updated on the display Coord Sys You may also select a coordinate system which will be used to display the positions The WGS84 coordinate system will always be available and should be sufficient for post processed kinematic work You may define other coordinate systems in Applications in Determine Coord System see section 11 1 Further options are available on this screen in Advanced mode See section 5 2 1 for details Highlight Coord Sys and press ENTER to reveal the list of coordinate systems currently available ir CONT HEM JEDIT DEL TMP O Jch Select the coordinate system that you wish to use Use NEW F2 to define a new coordinate system Use EDIT F3 to edit a coordinate system Use DEL F4 to delete the selected coordinate system and INFO F5 to reveal the type of transformation used 5 Configuring the Receiver When NEW F2 is pressed the following screen appears Formats CONF IGURE Hem Coorg bd Coord EYZ Tr anst orm EWiss 1 Projection EWLlsSs GEoid Model Test OMT a a Coord Sys Defines the name of the new coordinate system Further information about Coordinate Systems i
98. 0en The following screen will appear the first time you switch on 2 ShLake OuUt 3 APPlicatiohs a OMT HON The most frequently used functions are displayed Use SHOW HIDE F4 to reveal hide all of the functions This chapter covers configuration using the sequential configuration Configure from the Main Menu Details about configuration using the CONFIG key can be found in Chapter 9 Select Configure from the Main Menu Press CONT F1 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The following screen will appear COMFIG SET CHE Description PP_STAT Default AT REF Default AT AROM Default ir CONT HEM JEDIT DEL J IMFO jour You can select a Configuration Set by moving up and down the list and pressing CONT F1 or entering the name of the Configuration Set Press EDIT F3 to edit it Changes in default Configuration Sets are only temporary until the sensor is turned of Permanent changes require the creation of a new Configuration Set To enter a new Configuration Set press NEW F2 To delete a Configuration Set press DEL F4 You will be asked for confirmation before the Configuration Set is deleted Pressing INFO F5 toggles between the date of creation creator and description of the Configuration Sets Entering a new Configuration Set After NEW F2 has been selected the following screen will appear CONFIGURE Hew Configuration Hame n Description Crestor C
99. 1 1 for details Press CONT F1 to complete the configuration You will return to the Main Menu Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 5 1 1 Advanced Operation Mode for Static and Rapid Static The Advanced Mode contains extra configurable parameters that may be required for certain specialized applications Select Advanced in CONFIGURE Operation Mode GURE OFPerPathion Pode AdVanced OMT PT Only the screens that differ from those seen in Standard Mode are described here Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Position In addition to the functionality given in Standard mode details about the chosen coordinate system are given CONFIGURE Position Update Rates 1 BFS Coord SYS JTHZA Residuals Ho distribution Transf orm n Test Ellipsoid MGS 1964 Projection UTM se Geoid Model CONT Residuals Available when editing a coordinate system The method by which residuals will be distributed throughout the transformation area is displayed This may help the transformation result be more realistic and help disperse any strains in the transformation 1 Dist 1 Dist and 1 Dist distributes the residuals of the control points according to the distance between each control point and the newly transformed point Multiquadratic distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic interpolation approach Transform The name of the transformation set used is displayed Ellipsoid The name of t
100. 3 Coordinate System Enables you to transfer Coordinate Systems between Sensors and PC Cards Coordinate System To n enz0r Coord Sys OMT rT Select From where you wish to transfer the Coordinate System The device To which the Coordinate System will be transferred will be automatically selected Coord Sys Select the Coordinate System to be transferred Press ALL F3 to select all the Coordinate Systems Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 13 4 Antenna Info Enables you to transfer Antenna Info Records between Sensors and PC Cards To n Sensor Antenna n k CONT Te TC Select From where you wish to transfer the Antenna Info Record The device To which the Antenna Info Record will be transferred will be automatically selected Antenna Select the Antenna Info Record Press ALL F3 to select all the Antenna Info Records 13 5 Codelist Enables you to transfer Codelists between Sensors and PC Cards 1 Codelist Fr Om POC C ar gY Ta z Sensor Codelist P OMT Th ree TT Select From where you wish to transfer the Codelist The device To which the Codelist will be transferred will be automatically selected Codelist Select the Codelist Press ALL F3 to select all the Codelists 13 Transfer 13 6 ASCII GSI to Job Enables you to convert an ASCII file into a Job The reason to convert an ASCII file to a job is mainly for Stake Out When staking points there are
101. 3 JZ COHT TRACK THELTH SKY REF Sat The PRN number of each observed satellite is given Elev The elevation of the satellite above the horizon is given together with the direction in which it is moving rising or setting Azi The azimuth of the satellite is given SN1 amp SN2 The signal to noise ratio on L1 SN1 and L2 SN2 is given Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en QI1 amp QI2 The quality indicator of the phase measurement reconstruc tion is given for L1 QI1 and L2 QI2 TRACK F2 Allows toggling between elevation azimuth and tracking searching information Sat Li Lz SH1 SH2 QII HIZ 13 TR TR ol 5 33 J9 zr TR TR vl 5i 33 99 18 TR TR 2A 5i 33 99 ig TR TR 49 5A 33 J9 15 TR TR 45 dqr 33 JZ 24 TA TR dd 46 33 Jz CONT JELA JHELTH SkY FEF Sat The PRN number of each observed satellite is given L1 amp L2 The tracking status of each satellite TR Tracking SH search fa E SN1 amp SN2 The signal to noise ratio on L1 SN1 and L2 SN2 is given QI1 amp QI2 The quality indicator of the phase measurement reconstruc tion is given for L1 QI1 and L2 QI2 10 Status HELTH F4 STATUS Satellite Health Bad fats i 27 OK Sats i l O82 8S a4 0S 86 r BS 89 18 15 16 17 16 22 45 24 25 SR ET CONT a T Press cursor down key ZT OF Sate 01 82 85 O84 85 Be a 2 HA Sats 11 12 26 25 Se a OMT a a The PRN numbers of Bad unhea
102. 30 users No Static Initialization is required Observations will be recorded as soon as CONT F1 in the SURVEY Begin screen is pressed Recording Distinct Points without starting time To record distinct points within the moving part of the kinematic chain whether a static initialization has been performed or not occupy the point level the pole and press OCUPY F1 The point will be recorded in accordance with what has been defined in the Configuration Set Check the Point Id and Antenna Height Add a code if required Press STOP F1 followed by STORE F1 to store the point Initialization and point recording with starting time After entering a point ID the antenna height and a start time press the OCUPY F1 key SURWEY Def sult Point Id n Ant Height 1 254 m Time to GO t e245 GDOP Awd ir STOP The line Start Time changes to Time to go The time before the measurement starts automatically is displayed in hours minutes seconds and is counted down Once the entered start time is reached the measurement beginns SURVEY Def au1t Point Id z Ant Height 1 2354 M Static ObS Ira 4 GOOF z dad ir STOP PT The line Time to go changes to Static Obs Time When the required length of time has passed press the STOP F1 key to stop raw observation recording If Auto Stop has been set in the Configuration this will happen automatically Press STORE F1 to store the
103. 3600 seconds Note the maximum rate possible also depends on the type of Tilt device attached Appendix J If the rate is set higher than the device is able to deliver data if may happen that no complete data sets can be received at all or the data will not have changed from the previous measurement Please refer to the documentation related to the attached device Log to File Select YES to activate direct logging of the Tilt data to a file Data will be logged always into the same file job where the GPS raw data is being logged to No data will be logged unless raw data logging is active Data will also be logged to ring buffer raw data files if ring buffer logging Is active Notify Msg Select BINARY to directly output the Tilt data to external application software via a selected communication port Press NPORT F4 to select the remote port and configure the device through which the message shall be transmitted 376 The output message format is Leica Binary V2 LB2 message type Meteorological and Inclination Data ID 10 Documentation for the LB2 Interface Control is available on request from your Leica Geosystems representative Press DEVCE F5 to access the device list Select a Tilt device from the list and press CONT F1 to confirm Power Failures Like the SR5xx sensors the RS500 will automatically power itself up and return to the previous operating mode after any temporary power f
104. 82 7 4 3 Adding the Antenna Height ccccccceeeeee 183 7 4 4 Adding a Code cccsseeececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseaaees 184 7 4 5 Adding a Starting Time ccssceeceseeeeeeeeeeeees 185 7 4 6 Measurement Procedure ccccseceeeseeeeeeeeees 186 7 4 7 Using the AUTO key cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 190 7 4 8 Using the INIT Key ccceecceeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseees 193 7 4 9 Using the ADD key ccccecseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 194 7 4 10 Using the NEAR key cccseceeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeees 206 7 4 11 Radio Down Infill cc cececeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 206 Contents Contents continued Contents 7 5 Real Time Rover Staking Out cccceeeeees 208 9 The CONFIG Key cceseeeseeeneeeeeeees 241 7 5 1 Entering Stakeout cceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 208 9 1 Survey Satellite c cccccccecsecessesessesereseeseseererees 242 A OTE see re eae eee eee pari 9 2 General Units oo ccecceceeccescesceseeseesceseeseeseeseees 243 i pes aon RTS eaat mi 9 3 General Language ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeesees 244 5 4 Orientation cccccceccseceeecsseeeeseeeeeseeecseeaeeeeees 211 7 5 5 Polar and Orthogonal eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 215 9 4 General Hot Keys a acai ee eee ee ee 244 7 5 6 Using the Reverse function ccesceeeeee 216 9 5 General Time and Initial Position s ss
105. Antenna To Terminal Connecting the TR500 Terminal and GPS Antenna in the Minipack Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The Next Steps If the Receiver has been pre pro Ensure a dry plastic weather Zs When using the upper pole grammed and the TR500 is being protection cap is fitted to the halves with stub ensure that used further guidance is available in socket on the TR500 that is not the Antenna and GAD31 screw stub Chapter 7 connected to the sensor adapter slide down the full length of If the Receiver requires programming the stub before tightening the locking ring An incorrectly mounted Antenna with the TR500 further guidance is EEE in nee A i available in Chapter 5 Mee a er your appear in the socket that is results not used on the TR500 allow the socket and plastic weather protection cap to dry naturally Advice on using the Minipack is given in Section 2 14 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 Set up and Connection 2 5 Equipment Setup Post Processed Kinematic All on Pole Direct Clip of TR500 on to Sensor Use a Post processed Kinematic Rover The TR500 is mounted on the Receiver which is screwed onto the pole grip One connection is made from the Receiver to the Antenna Recommended for short periods of use especially where there are many obstacles fences etc Assumptions 1 GPS Antenna is mounted directly using screw fitting If using stub and GAD 31 adapter procedures may vary slight
106. Antenna heights and offsets for Leica and non Leica Antennas is given in Chapter 2 15 a Use the EDIT F3 key to edit the highlighted Antenna configuration Note that factory default Antenna configurations can only be viewed and not edited Use the DEL F4 key to delete an Antenna configuration Use the DEFLT F5 key to reveal factory default Antenna configurations with current Leica GPS Antennas This will then change to ALL Use ALL F5 to reveal System 300 Antenna configurations also You can pick out the Antenna configurations that you will use the most and delete the rest 5 Configuring the Receiver All possible factory default Antenna configurations may still be accessed in the future by using the DEFLT and ALL keys Position This screen defines the way in which position is displayed GURPE Position Maka MHGS54 Geodet ict Coord Sys Ce a es ee Update Rate Defines the rate at which the position will be updated on the display Coord Sys You may also select a coordinate system which will be used to display the positions The WGS84 coordinate system will always be available You may define other coordinate systems in Applications in Determine Coord System see section 11 1 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Further options are available on this screen in Advanced mode See section 5 3 1 for details It is especially important to define a local coordinate system for
107. Auto Stop has been set in the Configuration this will happen automatically 7 Measuring with System 500 Press STORE F1 to store the Point Id and any Thematical Code that you may have assigned If Auto Store has been set in the Configuration this will happen automatically Leave the survey by pressing SHIFT followed by QUIT F6 To switch off press the ON OFF key on the terminal Measuring procedure with starting time After entering a point ID the antenna height and a start time press the OCUPY F1 key SURVEY Des alt Point Id i Ant Height 1 254 m Time to Go B45 GDOP Awd ir STOP A TT The line Start Time changes to Time to go The time before the measurement starts automatically is displayed in hours minutes seconds and is counted down Once the entered start time is reached the measurement beginns The icon changes to a tripod indicating that the Receiver should remain stationary Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en SURVEY Def au1 t Point Id z Ant Height 1 2354 M Static ObS lfas 4 GOOF z dad ir STOP PT The line Time to go changes to Static Obs Time Static Obs Time The method by which you have selected to count time will be shown In Advanced mode you may select to display the amount of data required according to one of four criteria If this has been set a percentage value will be shown next to the expired Epochs Time This percentage value is th
108. CF XMB 3 PC card 2 GEB121 Batteries GVP602 Transport Case Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 Set up and Connection How to set up the equipment a Follow steps 1 10 as described in section 2 3 11 Clip the Antenna Arm to the GPS Antenna Screw the Radio Antenna onto the Arm 12 Attach the Radio Modem in its housing to the GPS Receiver 13 Connect the Radio Antenna to the Radio Modem using the 1 2m Antenna Cable 14 Switch the System On using the On Off button on the Receiver 2 Set up and Connection The Next Steps If the Receiver has been pre pro grammed and the TR500 is not being used further guidance is available in Chapter 3 If the Receiver has been pre pro grammed and the TR500 is being used further guidance is available in Chapter 7 If the Receiver requires programming with the TR500 further guidance is available in Chapter 5 When Using the GAD31 adapter and GRT 144 carrier ensure that the Antenna and GAD31 assembly slide down the full length of the GRT144 stub An incorrectly mounted Antenna will have a direct effect on your results In wet conditions the Re ceiver can be placed in the transport case during use for extra protection Try to shut the case as completely as possible If the Receiver is left in the
109. CII NMEA type message format from Leica as well as the compact Leica Binary 2 format can be used Integration assistance and OWI documentation is available on request from Leica Geosystems Powering the RS500 The RS500 can be powered using the Leica standard internal Camcorder batteries or Leica standard external batteries for temporary use For a more permanent setup a universal 100V 240VAC 50 60Hz to 12VDC power converter is available Alterna tively 12VDC power sources may be utilised by means of a user configurable 12VDC power cable with in line fuse Appendix J Turning the RS500 On Off The RS500 can be powered on or off by the TR500 Terminal the sensor integrated ON OFF button or by a remote control command OWI Using the ON OFF button will reset the receiver All programmed outputs data logging parameters and interface configuration options that have been set by OWI commands will be lost Like the Sr5xx sensors the RS500 will automatically power itself up and return to the previous operating mode after any temporary power failure Cabling Connections Options Cable connections are identical to other System 500 receivers Operation of the RS500 Like the SR5xx sensors the RS500 can be operated either with the TR500 Terminal or by remote control However the TR500 cannot be used for running a survey stakeout or any of the other applications available for System 500 Used with an RS500 the Te
110. CIl file target point having no topological information point data collection is started to measure the coordinates and to enter new code and attribute values For a job target point OCUPY replaces the old point coordinates with the new measured coordinates SHIFT AUXPT F5 leading to auxiliary point stake out is not available on GIS Navigation program Appendix K Codelist administration on GS50 From chapter 8 Coding only the chapters up to 8 1 2 apply to the GS50 GS50 The GIS thematical coding does not use layers but differentiates coding types for points lines and areas Therefore defining a new code on the GS50 GS50 allows entering of the new code with the choice of the type COMFIGURE Hem Code Code Type Faint Coge H Code More CONT ATI Appendix K Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Leica Geosystems AG Heerbrugg Switzerland has been certified as being equipped with a quality system which meets the International Standards of Quality Management and Quality Systems ISO standard 9001 and Environmental Management Systems ISO standard 14001 712646 4 0 0en Printed in Switzerland Copyright Leica Geosystems AG Heerbrugg Switzerland 2002 Original text TOM ISO 9001 1SO 14001 Total Quality Management Our commitment to total customer satisfaction Ask your local Leica agent for more information about our TQM program Seica Geosystems
111. Codelist press NEW F2 with l The Codelist is then selected for use A Free Code consists of a Code in Configuration Name a Description and then up to 20 Information Blocks which may contain any data you wish to write in them COMFIGURE Codel ist Hame COMFIGURE Coding Creator Coding Type n Frese Coding Codelist Freecodei a a es es a ae The Output Mask defines how this data will then be translated when it is downloaded hr Enter the Name of the new Codelist and if required the name of the Creator Press CONT F1 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 8 Coding 8 2 2 Defining New Codes Codes can be added to a Codelist Ine SEN TS ETE Use the NEW F2 key to add more When Free Coding has been se Free Code erie EEE information blocks iption lected the CODES F3 key will be available Press CONT F1 to continue COMFIGURE Coding OMT f IMF ae a Ce e code Tarija ich Coding Tupe n Free Coding Codelist Freecodei Free Code Input the identifier Description Input the description of the Indentifier CONT CODES if CONT MEW J CHIME La Press C INF F4 to add information To create new Codes press CODES blocks for the code F3 The new code is displayed in the list An asterisk at the end of the line CONFIGURE Free Code Infos tg S a TEJ indicates that the codes has _ TETINE MEM Description Tree information
112. D line is used to search the input for that particular gas reading COMFIGURE ASCII Input Annotation tit Weer defined ESF Description Gas i Message Id Gai Data Prefix Reply CONT a Hone When each annotation is configured for each particular gas reading the CONFIGURE ASCII Input panel should look as follows ASCIT Input Use Device n Port Z HRSe 529 End of Msg i Annot 1 Gas 1 Annot Z Gas 2 Annot 3 Gas 3 Annot 4 Gas 4 CONT ANHO T EWC YE2 The waste land site can now be surveyed The co ordinates of any points can be measured and before storing this point the gas analyser is activated to take a gas reading at this point The point can then be stored and the 4 gas readings are stored as individual annotations along with this point Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 9 13 Interfaces Hidden Point The Hidden Point interface enables you to configure the port and device used for Hidden Point measurements The port 1 2 or 3 and the device are displayed Set the focus on Hidden Point and press EDIT F3 to modify the Hidden Point device If you want to use an external device set Use Device to YES Select the port to which the device is connected Use the DEVCE F5 key to configure the device itself For information about all supported Hidden Point devices refer to Appendix H If no device is connected the Hidden Point measurement may also be ente
113. DOF be CUP Press ADD F5 SURWEY Add Hernu 1 Point Annotations Z Meterecnlogical Data 2 Hidden Poirnt ss CONT a a 7 Measuring with System 500 Adding Point Annotations Point Annotations may be used as an electronic notepad where events notes etc may be written They are then taken with the Point Id information into SKI Pro To add Point Annotations select Point Annotations from the list and press CONT F1 Vs Point annotations n Chased bu Dos Hr Tree fell on head H3 Coglgnt ting paint Hed Packed up and Went home EEEE You may type in 4 notes with up to 26 characters in each note Press CONT F1 when you are finished Press CLEAR F6 to delete the content of all fields Adding Meteorological Data Meteorological data may be required when very precise work is being carried out or when very different weather conditions exist between the Rover and Reference This data will not be used by SKI Pro but may be exported in RINEX format from SKI Pro and used in a scientific processing software that accepts meteorological data for tropospheric modelling Select Meteorological Data from the list and press CONT F1 Y Hetereologdical Data Teme Dry Teme Het Atmos Pres Rel Humid 1413 88 mbar 168 68 rf STORET Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Enter the data and press STORE F1 The data will be stored with a time tag During long observation periods
114. Dist OF fsSets A m Hat OF FSeb Inst amp Trat Hatt Inst Heights A DAA m Treat Height A DAD mM OMT ERO EMCE Set Use Device to YES If NO is set the Hidden Point measurements need to be entered manually Press DEVCE F5 to access the device list Select a Hidden Point device form the list For the Disto memo or Disto pro select Disto When using a Disto pro or Disto pro a select Disto 4 Press CONT F1 to confirm Enter a distance Dist Offset if neces sary A negative offset means the distance measured will be reduced by the offset Positive Dist Offset Negative Dist Offset To Hidden Point Measuring Offsets when using the Disto Appendix H Hgt Offset Available if Use Device sured or estimated the result is the The instrument height is the distance in the current panel and Include Hgt ground height difference between from the ground to the center of the in the panel CONFIGURE Hidden rover and aimed point Enter the external device Point in the current configuration set values in the corresponding two new see chapter 5 4 1 are set to YES lines The target height is the distance from The options are the ground to the aimed point None Neither instrument nor target height is considered The result is the delta height between the center of the external device and the aimed point This delta height can be measured estimated or left as zero Inst Heig
115. Event Pork 1 Polarity Hegative Egger CONT PORA Select Port 1 or 2 or if you want to use both at the same time 1 amp 2 Select the Polarity according to the external device you are using The polarity selected effects both ports in the same way Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Press PARAM F5 to modify additional parameters COMFIGURE Event IAPut Par ameter if Event Pork Info to Loge Hone Bias Intern Uzer Y Intern Biase nS Extern Biase A nS Time Guard A 00A S Hotit Mog Bihar y Description U OMT HPE T If both event input ports are used select the Event Port number and set the parameters for each Info to Log Select the information that shall be logged with the Event record Bias Intern Set to User for setting your own calibaration value for a particular sensor Factory uses default settings Intern Bias When Bias Intern is set to User set a calibration value here for a particular sensor Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Extern Bias Enables you to define a calibration value according to the external event device and cable used Time Guard If two or more events take place during the time in seconds defined only the first event will be recorded Enter O to accept all events The shortest recording time is 1 second however all events will be counted If an external device is connected to the sensor an OWI or LB2 message can be transmitted at the tim
116. Field Control Log Mask File between PC Card and Sensor To n Sensor Log Mack n T CONT AL E Select From where you wish to transfer the CFC Log Mask File The device To which the CFC Log Mask File will be transferred will be auto matically selected Log Mask Select the Log Mask Press ALL F3 to select all the Log Mask Files available Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 13 17 Beacon Station List Enables you to transfer a Beacon Station List between PC Card and Sensor 13 18 Modem GSM Station List Enables you to transfer Modem GSM Station details between PC Card and Sensor Podenm GEh Station List To Sersor File A OMT rT Select From where you wish to transfer the Beacon Station List The device To which the Beacon Station List will be transferred will be automatically selected File Select the beacon txt file Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en To n ensor tati ons oint e A ee Select From where you wish to transfer the Modem GSM Station List The device To which the Modem GSM Station List will be transferred will be automatically selected File Select the Stations bin file 13 19 System Enables you to transfer the complete System RAM between PC Card and Sensor in a file called Sysram sys This includes All information from the Config Sets Coordinate Systems Format Files Codelists Language Files Application Text Files
117. GPS RTCM Real Time GPS position from RTCM code corrections Pressing this key gives information about the satellites being tracked at the Reference station Further information is available by Unknown Unknown source pressing the INFO F5 key User enterd coordinate entered by user The column Crd Source appears and displays the source of the coordinates Pressing INFO F5 again reveals the for each point CQ coordinate quality in and the coordinate class The coordinate La Calculated calculated from other class may be either sets of coordinates E g via COGO routines or averaged MEAS Point measured once GPS Navigtd GPS navigated AVRG Point measured more than position once and coordinates averaged PPRC Code Post processed GPS CTRL Point user entered or held code only fixed with no accuracy matrix Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 269 10 Status 10 7 Code Log Status The last 5 codes that have been used from the current codelist are displayed Should you select a different codelist for use this log will be cleared Pressing INFO F5 reveals the time at which the code was recorded 10 Status 10 8 Message Log Status The last 100 messages displayed on the terminal are listed in order of time most recent first This log can only be deleted by pressing DEL A F4 Pressing INFO F5 reveals the time and date that the message appeared 10 9 Memory Battery Status STATUS
118. GSM working with RLP Radio Link Protocol and Transpar ent for a GSM working without RLP Please refer to the GSM manual to see if the GSM uses RLP Before RLP can be used with a GSM it must be support by the network Check with the network provider Search for the nearest GSM Refer ence Station to the current sensor position by pressing NEAR F2 The current sensor position is the position at the time when the NEAR key is pressed A GSM station is only included in the search when Use Coord in panel CONFIGURE GSM Station is set to YES Once the nearest GSM Reference Station has been found the Station field is updated accordingly Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The SCAN functionality can be used to check the data format of a GSM reference Pressing SCAN F5 establishes a connection to the GSM reference The reference station id the data format used for transmitting and the latency time delay of the GSM reference station is displayed Scan Ref Stn StHld Data Format Sie Cont i aur e CONT CONT F1 cuts the GSM connection and returns to the previous panel The station id of the highlighted reference station is taken over into the Ref Stn Id line if Accept Ref is set to User defined To enter a new GSM station highlight Station in panel CONFIGURE GSM Station and press ENTER CONF IGURE Stat ign GEM Connection Ci CONT HEW EDIT DEL All existing stations are
119. Height if neccessary and press STORE F1 will bring you back to the COGO Intersection menu Alternatively press STAKE F5 to switch to the stakeout screen and use the coordinates directly for stakeout P4 Input P1 Centre point of 1 circle E N h ri Radius P2 Centre point of 2 circle E N h r2 Radius Output P3 1 Intersection point E N h P4 2 Intersection point E N h Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Distance Offset This function enables you to calculate the distance and offset values of an offset point from a line defined by two points the bearing and distance of the baseline the location of the offset point in relation to the baseline and the bearing from the offset point to the baseline Line PR EY Offset Pt CY Enter the start and end point of the line or press NEWOC F5 to measure new points Enter the offset point Press COMP F1 to start the computation Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Offset PL C Distance z Z rda mM Pere Dist 17 6654 M CONT TORE The Distance along the line and the Perpendicular Distance Offset are displayed A negative Perp Dist Offset indicates that the point lies on the left hand side of the line P1 P2 A negative Distance indicates that the point lies behind the start point of the line P1 P2 Press MORE F5 to display the bearing and the distance from the start point to the end point of t
120. IONN sissssisietivesicesssicscesnecemrscawevinatns 11 1 1 The GPS Antenna cccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneees 12 1 2 The GPS Receiver cceccceeeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 13 1 3 The TR500 Terminal cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 1 4 Data SIOVAG Ce isicccesvessseincsicnnssuativrsendesaesalvesesdeer caeen 16 1 5 Batteries Power Supply ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 18 1 5 1 Charging the Batteries ccceeecssseeeeeeseeeeeeees 19 2 Equipment Set Up and Connection 20 2 1 GPS Receiver ports c cccccsecccseesceeeceeeseeees 21 2 2 Equipment Setup Post Processed Static Rapid Static Reference on Pillar cccecceceeeeeeeeeeee ee 22 2 3 Equipment Setup Post Processed Static Rapid Static Reference ON Tripod cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 25 2 4 Equipment Setup Post Processed Kinematic Minipack and Pole cccccesccseeceeeseseseeeceeesaes 28 2 5 Equipment Setup Post Processed Kinematic All on Pole Direct Clip of TR500 on to Sensor 32 2 6 Equipment Setup Post Processed Kinematic All on Pole TR500 and Sensor separated 35 2 7 Equipment Setup Real Time Reference MAG TD OG ere S 38 2 8 Equipment Setup Real Time Reference PWO MID OGG e tcc decaneaseceatedecnceet nacceneesetgencd 41 2 9 Equipment Setup Real Time Rover Pole and Minipack sencsusncestnoreGosaceseeecdiesnoterecensarexs 44 Contents 2 10 Equ
121. LT CCE CETTE C CLEC a a 259 8 1 3 Defining and Activating Deactivating Layers 235 10 1 Real Time Input Status ccececseeeeeeeeeeeeees 259 8 1 4 Adding a Thematical Code to a Point 236 10 2 Stop and Go Indicator oo cece e eee e eee 261 8 2 Free Coding 1 sseessesesseseteeteesseeeeeeeetenteteneens 237 10 3 POSTION scissitincnsictsoneqescisitoterostaatoisirdocssiunciendss 263 8 2 1 Importing Selecting and Defining a 10 4 Logging Status c cccccccseecceceseseresereserereeseres 266 Free Codelist ccccccccsseecceeseeeeseseeeseeeesseeeeees 237 8 2 2 Defining New Codes cccccccceeessseeeeeeeesseees 238 ee a EEE EEE a 8 2 3 Adding a Free Code cccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 239 Pe EE eee Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Contents continued 10 7 Code Log Status ccccccsseecseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeees 270 10 8 Message Log Status ccccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 270 10 9 Memory Battery Status ccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 270 10 10 Sensor Status 0 0 0 eccceecceseeceeseseeeeeeesseees 271 10 11 Software Version Status cccccseseeseeeeeneees 271 10 12 Interfaces Status cccccecccseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 272 11 Applications wicecceterceeecsscccsccsteesiessieccens 273 11 1 Determining a Coordinate System 608 273 11 2 Adding Points to Existing Coordinate Systems 283 11 3 Point Management cccccesseee
122. NT F1 to confirm Appendix H Using Telemax Once you have set the configuration for your GSM phone or the Modem and selected the Telemax service you can establish the connection to the SAPOS station by pressing SHIFT CONEC F4 in the MAIN SURVEY or STAKE OUT panel Based upon the Account file the Telemax software checks if you have the right to receive uncoded RTCM corrections from the SAPOS station To disconnect again press SHIFT DISCO F4 in the MAIN SURVEY or STAKE OUT panel Appendix H Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Hidden Point Hidden Point devices are special devices to measure distances angles and azimuths to points which are not accessible by means of GPS e g house corners or trees These mea surements can be used to feed the Hidden Point application which is accessible in the Survey and Stake out screen when the operation mode is set to Advanced The following devices are supported Leica Disto memo distance only Leica Disto pro distance only Leica Disto pro distance only Leica Disto pro a distance only Laser Ace 300 Criterion 400 Criterion Compatible Leica Vector Leica Laser Locator Leica Laser Locator Plus All devices support reflectorless distance measurements using laser technology Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Configuration From CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight Hidden Point and press EDIT F3 Use Device Por t z 2 EDL stor
123. Note that the Id type is set to Change to Indiv ara pees CONT n e Field Proc Within the Survey panel the first point will SURWEY Def sult automatically show the Point Id Point0001 Upon oa a pressing STORE the next Point Id will at Height automatically show Point0002 JUalituy g A A m 5 Configuring the Receiver Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Working Example 2 cont Field Proc You now wish to survey one individual point and give SURVEYS Det alt cont it the point ID BM98 In the Survey panel enter this i point ID Survey this point and upon pressing Ant Height STORE the next point Id will revert back to Point0002 Bee ocuey ADD Note When entering the individual point Id BM98 you did not need to press SHIFT INDIV F5 as in Working Example 1 This is because the Point template is operating in the Change to Individual mode Suppose you do now wish to survey points using a SURVEYS Default new point Id Fence and you wish this template i to operate in the Remain Running mode Ant Height Enter the point Id 001Fence and then press SHIFT Quality RUN F5 Occupy and store this point The next HELP GRAPH FOH QUIT point Id will be 002Fence Note Numerical characters in front of any text will also increment This allows any type of incrementing point Ids to be created Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 5 C
124. O F3 key becomes visible again to enter the AUTO POS panel While Auto Positions are collected the number of Positions already measured will be displayed AUTO POS Default Time and Date Auto Pe Id Mow Ant Hgt Positions is a0 uality I TPS ETOP Press STOP F6 to terminate the logging of Auto Points Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 4 8 Using the INIT key The INIT F6 key shows in the main survey screen and is available in Advanced Mode SURVEYS Def au1t Point Id z Ant Height Z000 mM SD0 uality A A M CUP TIT When a Real Time Rover Configuration Set is chosen the Receiver will automatically start the initialization process as On the Fly as soon as the conditions are right INIT F6 can be used to select the initialization method and also to force a new initialization Ensure that the correct Antenna height has been entered before starting the initialization Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en SURVEY Initialistation 1 Static x Known Point On The F1ly CONT a a Static Initializes using Static The Antenna should be mounted either on the pole with a quickstand or on a tripod This method may be used if for some reason it is proving difficult to initialize on the fly and no known point is available Known Point Initializes on a known point If you have a point the coordinates of which are already accurately known in position and hei
125. ONFIGURE Interfaces 1 Feal Time 1 HMEAR OULPUt ASCII Input Hidden Point abel Line ir ONT JEDIT CTRL UM Highlight the device to switch chan nels and press CTRL F5 COMFIGURE Radio Channel Radio Type Sabelline SASxXE Channel ME CONT LL Appendix H For the radio modems Satelline 3AS Pacific Crest RFM96W and Pacific Crest PDL the channel to which the radio is set is checked and displayed For other radios than those a similar check is technically impossible Therefore the channel displayed does not necessarily coincide with the actual radio channel Enter a Channel number and confirm with CONT F1 Additionally if you are using the device for a Real Time Rover sensor you may set the following parameter Accept Ref Defines which reference station to accept real time data from Choose from the following Any Received means that the sensor will accept data from any reference station from which it receives data 1st Received means that data will be received and used from the first reference station that is recognised by the rover If you wish to force the system to try to establish a new connection with a different reference station press 1st F6 User defined enables you to define which reference station data will be received from according to its Ref Stn Id This is necessary when several reference stations send RTK messages delayed on the same frequency Time Slicing
126. ONT a Enter the Name and if required a Description and Creator Press the ENTER key after each entry Press CONT F1 when you are finished If you create a new Configuration Set a copy of the highlighted Configuration Set will be created 5 Configuring the Receiver 5 1 Configuring the Receiver for Static and Rapid Static Operations This section covers configuration of the receiver for post processed Static Rapid Static or Kinematic Reference operations Highlight the Configuration Set you wish to edit and press EDIT F3 Note that you cannot edit default Configuration Sets You have to create a new Set and then edit it 5 Configuring the Receiver Operation Mode Select the Operation Mode that you require The Operation Mode defines which Configuration screens will be available to you You may choose between Standard and Advanced Standard is recommended for most users Advanced enables definition of parameters required for specialized applications Operation Hode CONT TET When you have made your selection press CONT F1 to go through the fixed order of parameter panels Or press LIST F6 to get a listing of the available parameter panels which can then be accessed individually with CONT F1 Changes are automatically stored at the end of the list Changes in individual parameter panels can be stored with STORE F3 without the need to go to the end of the list The Standard Operation M
127. P This helps filter out effects of slight move ment E g trembling hands Instantaneous means that a time tag will be recorded when the OCUPY key is pressed A coordinate will be interpolated between the positions at the neighbouring two epochs More details about Normal and Instantaneous occupy modes are given in section 5 2 Auto Store Allows you to automati cally store a point after the STOP key has been pressed Further options are available on this screen in Advanced mode See section 5 4 1 for details 5 Configuring the Receiver Id Templates An Id template is used to pre define a Point Id This feature is mainly used in post processed kinematic and real time kinematic operations where many points are collected quickly When set up correctly it will save you having to type in the point Id at each point HHHHHH HHHHHHY 0 Fit Auto Pos OCCUPY PLS Auto Log Poses E ee ee OCUPY Pts Displays the Id tem plate selected for use with manually recorded points Auto Log Pos Displays the Id template selected for use with auto matically recorded points Select the template that you wish to use 5 Configuring the Receiver Press ENTER to reveal the list of available templates el ee ee ce Point Template IIne Crer Ho Temelate Uze Time and Date Poirit HEHEHE 1 1 ir CONT HEW EDIT DEL Inc stands for Increment and denotes the amount by which any sp
128. Point 1 Point Code 161 Code Hame n Control Ant Height GOOF z B 6 Ls a The fields Point Code and Code Name will be displayed as above Highlight the Point Code and either 1 Use the left or right cursor keys to cycle through the code list or 2 Press ENTER and select the code from the list or 3 Type in the first few characters of the code until the desired code is displayed 8 Coding The Code Name will be displayed for the Point Code that you have cho sen Enter any attributes for the code using the ATRIB F4 key The code is stored along with the Point Id information When the Point Code list box is open there are several other operations that you may carry out SURWEY Def sult Candar cr Crossing dt Dwarf town ds Dwarf YWillage ir OMT HEM LAST JATRIE IMFO ott CONT F1 selects the code and returns to the survey screen NEW F2 lets you define a new code LAST F3 jumps to the code log and displays the codes that were last assigned in order ATRIB F4 lets you define attributes for the selected code and add attribute values to the choicelist of an attribute MAWAGE Attributes Point Id n 1 Point Code Farm Code Name Farm Barn EEE CONT LAET I HEH ADEFLTCLEAF To add an attribute value to a choicelist highlight the line of the according attribute and press ENTER HAHAGE Attributes Point Id erikiWis r Point Cod
129. Programs Appendix G Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Interfaces An interface should be considered as a function of the sensor For example Real Time is one function that can be activated on the sensor Hidden Point is another function and so on System 500 supports the following interfaces Real Time Input Output NMEA Output ASCII Input Hidden Point Input Meteo Tilt GSI User Out Remote Control PPS Output Event Input Each interface may be controlled by one or more Devices For further details on the interfaces wa Tilt and Meteo see App J Devices A device should be considered as both the hardware which is used in connection with an interface and the parameters that allow the hardware to communicate with the sensor The devices that are supported by the sensor can be divided into the follow ing groups RS232 Radio modem devices GSM Modem devices RTB Module CSI RTS Module Racal SAPOS Hidden Point devices Appendix H External Devices Certain devices may be used with one or more interfaces For example a radio modem can be used to receive Real Time Reference data but a second radio modem could also be used to simultaneously output NMEA messages Note The PPS Output and the Event Input are optional interfaces that require special hardware ports and devices which are not described here Please refer to the respective chapters in section 9 of this manual Tec
130. Remain Running Field Proc Within the Survey panel the first point will automatically show the Point Id Bolt 001 upon pressing STORE the next Point Id will automatically show Bolt 002 5 Configuring the Receiver CONFIGURE OCCUPY PLe Id Type n Remain RUA Td Bolt FEE Hum Sharh Hum Eng Auto ING Hum ING n Cursor Pos 1Y CONT SURVEY Def sult o1nh Id z Bolt Be Ant Height Positions GUaliby i a a Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Working Example 1 cont Field Proc You now wish to survey points with the Id SURVEY Det Sault cont Road starting with Id Road0723 Enter this point Id into Survey panel The next point Id will Ant Height automatically be Road0724 Positions GUS lib A T T You now wish to survey one individual point and give HHE OENM it the point ID BM98 In the Survey panel press SHIFT and then INDIV F5 and enter this point Id Ant Height Indiv P IJ Survey this point and upon pressing STORE the Qualita next point Id will revert back to Road0724 OCU a A Note Should you wish to store any new point Id as a template into the library then access the CONFIGURE ID Templates panel CONFIG 1 Survey 5 Point Id Templates and then press CONT F1 The point Id currently in use is now stored as a template Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 5 Configuring the Receiver Working Example 2 Requirement
131. S50 389 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en System 500 is used to receive signals from GPS satellites which are then processed to obtain a position on the earth s surface It can be used in many applications the main ones being Land Survey Stakeout and Hydrographic Survey The main components of System 500 are the GPS Antenna and GPS Receiver Ancilliary components are the Terminal Batteries PC Cards and cables SKI Pro a PC based software is also used in conjunction with the hardware listed above for post processing GPS data and for downloading coordinates recorded in the field Instructions for using SKI Pro can be found in the accompanying printed guides and on line help Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en System 500 main hardware components 1 1 The GPS Antenna There are several System 500 GPS Antennas available These are e AT501 Single Frequency Antenna e AT502 Dual Frequency Antenna e AT503 Dual Frequency Choke Ring Antenna e AT504 JPL Design Dual Fre quency Choke Ring Antenna e Single Frequency Choke Ring Antenna The GPS Antenna is selected for use based upon the application The vast majority of applications will require the AT501 or AT502 Antenna The AT501 is a L1 single frequency antenna Use it with the SR510 Receiver The AT502 is a dual fre quency antenna Use it with the SR520 or SR530 Receiver 1 Introduction The Choke Ring Antennas are de
132. SE F2 to either select or deselect measurements from the averaged coordinate Press DEL F4 to delete single measurements When you have finished editing the coordinates press STORE F1 to store the point and return to the list of points of the current job 11 Applications When a Configuration Set is being used where Advanced mode is set the averaging functionality in Threshold Settings is set to Abs and the point contains more than one measurement then the ABS F6 key is available ir CONT USE DIFF DEL IMFO Press USE F2 to include or exclude a measurement from calculating the absolute coordinate difference An absolute coordinate difference can only be calculated between two measurements Press DIFF F3 after having set the use flag for two measurements to display the absolute coordinate differences 11 Applications MANAGE Abs Diffs 1006 Fasting 4 881 M Hor third 5 AFAR fM Height g 1 999 me Cartesian x 1 334 m Cartesian Y A225 mt Cartesian Z 1 472 Mm CONT The absolute differences for Easting Northing and Height can only be displayed if the survey is carried out in a local coordinate system An asterisk identifies those which exceed the threshold settings CONT F1 returns you to the previ ous screen Press DEL F4 to delete single measurements CONT F1 to return to Edit Point screen CONT F1 returns to the listing of points of the current job
133. T F1 to proceed with the Coordinate System Determination Trans Tupe Frojection Geoid Models CONT Coord Sys The name of the Coordinate System is displayed Transform Define the name of the Transformation By default the same name as the Coordinate System will be suggested Type in a new one if required Trans Type Select the type of transformation to be determined Classical is the 3D Helmert type transformation One Step is a transformation type where no information about local ellipsoid or map projection is required 11 Applications 2 Step is a transformation type where information about the local ellipsoid map projection and a pre trans formation is required Pre Transf Available only if a 2 Step transformation type is selected It is a preliminary 3D transformation which is used together with the selected projection to obtain preliminary grid coordinates to be used for a final 2D transformation Select a pre trans formation from the list or open the list and enter a new transformation by pressing NEW F2 Ellipsoid Available if a classical or a 2 Step transformation and a standard projection type is defined Select the ellipsoid on which your local coordi nates are based Open the list and press DEFLT F5 to reveal all of the available ellipsoids If your ellipsoid is not listed you may add it to the list by pressing NEW F2 and entering the parameters 11 Applications Pre
134. TOP DP This key can be used to add Meteo rological Data Press ADD F5 followed by CONT F1 Meteorological data may be required when very precise work is being carried out and or when very different weather conditions exist between the Rover and Reference This should only be used when recording data for post processing This data will not be used by SKI Pro but may be exported in RINEX format from SKI Pro and 7 Measuring with System 500 used in a scientific processing software that accepts meteorological data for tropospheric modelling Select Meteorological Data from the list and press CONT F1 Teme Dry z A Ae oT Teme bet J 7A Ae oc Atmos Pres 14135 68 mbar Rel Humid 144 Ae a STORE e Enter the data and press STORE F1 The data will be stored with a time tag During long observation periods you may need to store several sets of meteorological data as the weather changes Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 4 Real Time Rover Surveying New Points Set up the equipment as described in Chapter 2 Attach the Terminal Switch on The Main Menu will be displayed The system will automati cally start searching for satellites Select Survey and press CONT F1 Config Zet Tob Default Coord Sus UTM 32 Antenna ATSa2 Poler EE Config Set Defines the Configura tion Set to be used The last Configu ration Set used or created will be taken by default although any ot
135. Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en COMFIGURE Antenna Ant Hame n A Werk OF FSete A SEDA M Deflt Hat AAAA mM Heas Tupe Uert icalt CONT ee ee Press the right or left cursor key to cycle through the choices or press ENTER to make the drop down box appear AT Ses Tr ipod ATSa3 Tripod ir OMT HEM JEDIT DEFLT xhi A search field will appear at the top of the list box with a blinking cursor If you know the name of the item you are search for you may type in the first few letters The item s that match what you type will be automati cally highlighted This is case sensi tive Alternatively you can move down the list item by item using the cursor keys Pressing SHIFT will reveal HOME F2 END F3 PG UP F4 Page Up and PG DN F5 Page Down keys You may also use these keys to scroll up and down the list 4 TR500 Terminal Overview The receiver has numerous parameters and functions which can be configured by the user Different Configuration Sets are used for different measuring techniques Several default Configuration Sets are programmed into the receiver before delivery These default files should cover the majority of applications However you also have the opportunity to define your own Configuration Sets You may define several Configuration Sets to cover every type of operation that you are likely to carry out This can be done using the TR500 Terminal There are two m
136. Using the standard default for external PCMCIA Flash memory Firmware Rawdata and Configuration information can easily be transferred to and from the GIS DataPRO software Using Windows Explorer to transfer data To transfer data from the PCMCIA card to your PC for use by the GIS DataPRO software you must first understand the directory storing structure of the GS50 GS50 sensor Code If the PCMCIA card has been format LS Convert ted on the sensor Please refer to the EFL Data H W user manual then the following ELI Gps directory structure should appear on i a BB o be __ Ringbut the card o m 0 Geodb Real Time Beacon Stations EHC Gps It is possible to select a beacon ser AC vice from a list that can be placed on ob poly Prog the PCMCIA card The file must be T Tan i bf Gai called beacon txt saved in the GPS ee directory and finally be transferred to hC Log the sensor 228 0 Daiohzaki The frequency of the beacon service 292 0 Cape Mendocino should be placed on the left with the description on the right seperated by a space as shown right 313 0 Helgoland Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Operation and Configuration The GS50 GS50 Receiver The GS50 and GS50 receivers are specifically designed for GIS data collection It uses a different ap proach measure coordinates in a topological format relating attribute information to geographic location Like all GIS systems the GS50
137. Vertical To select an antenna setup highlight Ant Name and press ENTER to open the drop down box All of the existing antenna configurations are listed CLOMFIGURE Antenna ATAI Tripod ATSeS Tripod ATHOS Tripod ir COMT HEM EDIT DEFT cH You may select from this list or enter your own antenna configuration by pressing the New F2 key and entering the required information Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Most Post Processed Kinematic Surveys are carried out using the System 500 pole When a factory default pole setup is selected AT501 Pole AT502 Pole the Vertical Offset is set automatically at zero and the Defit Hgt at 2 00m Note that the settings from the currently highlighted antenna setup are taken over as suggested default values Advice on calculating Antenna Heights and offsets for Leica and non Leica Antennas is given in Chapter 2 15 Use the Edit F3 key to edit the highlighted Antenna configuration Use the DEL F4 key to delete an Antenna configuration Use the DEFLT F5 key to reveal default antenna configurations with current System 500 GPS antennas This will then change to ALL Use ALL F5 to reveal System 300 antenna configurations also You can pick out the antenna configurations that you will use the most and delete the rest All possible antenna configurations may still be accessed in the future by using the DEFLT and ALL keys Technical Reference Manual 4 0
138. a select the Antenna used at the reference station All Antennas in the current antenna list are available If you do not know which Antenna is being used at the reference or an Antenna is being used which is not in the list select Unknown If the reference data is corrected by absolute antenna cali bration values and you want to use Leica standard antenna models on the rover side select ADVNULLANTENNA Use Phase Set to NO if only a code solution is required 5 Configuring the Receiver Radio Down Raw observations can be logged for post processing in case of radio link interuption To define the Data Format received highlight the Data Format field and press ENTER i Leica is the proprietary Leica real time GPS data format This is the best format to use when working exclusively with Leica System 500 Rover units CMR and CMR are compacted formats used for receiving data from third party receivers RTCM is used for receiving data from a non System 500 Reference Station RTCM Message 3 will always be received by default RTCM 18 19 Uncorrected Carrier phase and pseudorange Use for RTK operations where the ambiguities will be resolved at the Rover RTK An accuracy of around 1 5cm rms can be expected after a successful ambiguity resolution 5 Configuring the Receiver RTCM 20 21 RTK Carrier phase corrections and high accuracy pseudorange corrections Use for RTK operations There is little or no
139. a Real Time Reference Station if you intend to use a known local grid coordinate at the Reference Point The Receiver must be able to calculate an equiva lent coordinate in the WGS84 coordi nate system for transmission to the Rover s Highlight Coord Sys and press ENTER to reveal the list of coordinate systems currently available Position Geodetic ir CONT HEM JEDIT DEL TMF O jotted Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Select the coordinate system that you wish to use Use NEW F2 to define a new coordinate system Use EDIT F3 to edit a coordinate system Use DEL F4 to delete the selected coordinate system and INFO F5 to reveal the type of transformation used When NEW F2 is pressed the following screen appears CONFIGURE New Coord System Coord 235 P Transform Swiss 1 Projection Swiss Geoid Models Test CONT a Coord Sys Defines the name of the new coordinate system Further advice on Coordinate Sys tems is given in Section 11 When you have set the parameters press CONT F1 to return to the CONFIGURE Position screen When using EDIT F3 the same descriptions apply Press CONT F1 to return to the CONFIGURE Position screen 5 Configuring the Receiver Formats Format Grid n Format Geode Lat Lon Hatt Duality Ture DOP Defined by PosStHoattyT ime OCCUPY Counter ObSer uat ions Y Ce ee You can configure the way in which info
140. activate Prediction on the rover CONF IGURE Prediction Prediction OMT a a If an SR530 is being used as the RTK reference station then the Leica data format should always be used In this case Prediction should always be set to YES If however the reference is transmitting a 3rd party data format such as RTCM CMR or CRM then prediction on the rover may be turned on or off Prediction is only of use in RTK cm accuracy surveys The default setting is that prediction will be activated There are two advantages in using prediction 1 Update rate Prediction allows RT positions to be computed on the rover at a rate greater than the transmission rate of the data from the reference station This means RT positions can be computed on the rover at a rate up to 10Hz regardless of the rate at which data is transmitted from the reference station 2 Reduced latency Positions computed with prediction will have a latency of around 30 to 40ms However should the RTK messages transmitted from the reference station be effected by latency then the accuracy of the positions computed using prediction may be reduced In these circumstances it may be necessary to deactivate positions computed by prediction In this case Prediction should be set to NO 5 Configuring the Receiver However deactivating prediction would mean 1 Update rate Positions can only be computed at the rate at which data is transmitt
141. ailed information on Geoid Models please refer to the SKI Pro Online Help Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en CSCS Model If a CSCS Model is to be applied press ENTER and select it from this list COORDS Y Tue CECE Models Zysten PC Card if OMT PCARRD DEL UTM O ahh CSCS Model Field Files can be exported from SKI Pro onto the PC card or internal memory in the Data GPS CSCS sub directory They can either be transfered to the System RAM or be read directly from the PC card Use PCARD F2 to update the list with CSCS Model Field Files existing on the PC card Use INFO F5 to see where the CSCS model is stored and the date and time of creation Use SHIFT PARAM F5 to view the parameters defining the CSCS Model Field File Press CONT F1 to return to COORDSYS Type Selection For detailed information on CSCS Models please refer to the SKI Pro Online Help Press CONT F1 to proceed 11 Applications Defining a map projection Most map projections conform to a standard type and will need to be defined before being used for the first time From the COORDSYS Type Selection screen open the Projection list ir CONT HEM EDIT DEFT Hur Press DEFLT F5 to reveal all of the available default projections and US State Plane Zones Select NEW F2 to enter a new projection set 11 Applications COMFIGURE Hew Projection Hame n TY Trans Mercator
142. ailure After a power failure the ring buffer configuration will be restored A ring buffer which was running at the time of the power failure will be restarted automatically without user or remote control interaction Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Introduction This appendix describes the operation and data collection techniques specific to the GS50 GS50 and GIS data collection methods This Appendix should be read in parallel with the main body of this Technical Reference Manual to which the chapters described below refer The Leica GIS DataPRO system is composed of both hardware and software components The hardware consists of the GS50 GS50 sensor TR500 terminal and antenna This is used in the field to collect and record spatial position and non spatial attributes Hardware GS50 GS50 TR500 Antenna Leica GIS DataPRO Software GIS DataPRO Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Appendix K GS50 GS50 and GIS Data After the data is collected in the field the GIS DataPRO office software allows you to import edit and export the data to your GIS The software can also be used to design codelists which allow you to customize the field data collection process to suit your needs To learn more about the GIS DataPRO office software please consult the Getting Started with the GIS DataPRO Office Software User Manual GIS DataPRO Post processing software GIS DataPRO is use
143. al 4 0 0en 2 Set up and Connection How to set up the equipment Follow steps 1 6 described in section 2 5 7 Clip the Antenna Arm to the GPS Antenna Screw the Radio Antenna onto the Arm 8 Attach the Radio Modem in its housing to the GPS Receiver 9 Connect the Radio Antenna to the Radio Modem using a 1 2m Antenna Cable 10 Switch the System ON using the ON OFF key on the Terminal 2 Set up and Connection The Next Steps If the Receiver has been pre pro grammed and the TR500 is being used further guidance is available in Chapter 7 If the Receiver requires programming with the TR500 further guidance is available in Chapter 5 When using the upper pole halves with stub ensure that the Antenna and GAD31 screw stub adapter slide down the full length of the stub before tightening the locking ring An incorrectly mounted Antenna will have a direct effect on your results The Radio Antenna may also be connected directly to the Radio Housing Note however that range and quality of signal received may be affected Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 11 Equipment Setup Real Time Rover All on Pole TR500 and Sensor separated Use The TR500 is fixed to the pole grip with a holder With another metallic holder and a holder piece the receiver is fixed to the pole The Radio Modem plus radio antenna attaches to the Receiver One connection is ma
144. al Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 5 8 Picking up a new point This function is available in Advanced mode If you are staking out and need to measure new points you may do so by pressing the PCKUP F5 key This brings you into survey mode STAKE OUT Occupy Point Point Id J Ant Height 7 888 Mm SD GQUality 8 81 m OCU FL THIT Measure the points and or hidden points as described in sections 7 4 6 and 7 4 9 Press SHIFT and then STAKE F2 to return to Stake Out Returning to Stake Out is possible before a point occupation or after storing the point 7 5 9 Using the INIT key The INIT F6 key is available in Advanced mode and is used to select and force a new initialization In Stake Out the initialization will always be on the fly More details about using the INIT key and initialization on the fly can be found in section 7 4 8 7 Measuring with System 500 7 5 10 Using the NEAR key The nearest point to the current sensor position for staking out can be found by pressing SHIFT and then NEAR F2 The current sensor position is the position at the time when the NEAR key is pressed HEAR TAKE OLT OF ient Hor heer FOIMT 1 If A Ae ri aasia B cr Riaht AAA m Fill J Ad M a0 lty AAS mM t HELP NEAR GRAPH AUXPTIGJIT It may also help when using this key to set the stake out filter to Points to Stake See chapter 11 3 for more information about the filter Stop the searc
145. al cameras pipe detectors Geiger counters etc The ASCII strings are stored as point annotations together with the next point measured Point annotations for auto logged points are only stored when Store Pt DB and Use Annot in panel CONFIGURE Position Logging are set to YES For detailed information see section 5 4 The port 1 2 or 3 and the device are displayed Set the focus on ASCII Input and press EDIT F3 to modify the ASCII Input device A CII Input Use Device POF t End of MSY Annotk 1 Annot ye Annotk 3 Annot 4 CONT JANNOT DENCE 9 The CONFIG Key YEZ 1 REZSZY CR LFF Depth Sounder If you want to use an external device for ASCII input set Use Device to YES Select the Port to which the device is connected Use the DEVCE F5 key to configure the device itself End of Msg Select the delimiter to be used to identify the end of the incoming ASCII string This may be either CR LF or CR LF Press the ANNOT F3 key to define which of the incoming ASCII strings should be stored as a point annotation and how You may identify up to four different message types Annotation 1 to 4 CONFIGURE ASCII Input Annotation H1 User defined MEE Description Depth Sounder Message Ig n Data Prefix U lt Description iT Reply x GGAF 9 The CONFIG Key Set User defined to YES Enter a description to identify the annotation e g depth sounder Message Id This can b
146. ame When transfering into an existing TPS job all fixpoints in that job are deleted during transfer If data is being transferred to a Geodimeter total station then the total station must be in a mode ready to receive data SOKKIA devices can only handle 4 digit numeric point IDs If Renumber is set to YES all points are transfered but renumbered starting from 1 If NO is selected only points with numeric point IDs are transfered and point IDs are shortened to 4 digits truncating from the right CONFIGURE Gil User Out Wee Derice YEZ Por t 3 50KKIA 2DRSSF Renu mer OMT TE E The SDR33 must be ready to receive data before starting the transfer on System500 Jobs are transfered with the same name as on System500 It is necessary to use the correct format file when transferring data to a total station Press FILT F6 if you wish to transfer a selection of points only For more information about the filter settings please refer to 11 3 Point Management Press CONT F1 to transfer the file The number of exported points will then be displayed 13 Transfer 13 8 Geoid Field File Enables you to transfer Geoid Field Files between Sensors and PC Cards Geoid Field File To n Sensor GEoid File T CONT ee Select From where you wish to transfer the Geoid Field File The device To which the Geoid Field File will be transferred will be automatically selected If you transf
147. ame will be displayed for the Point Code that you have cho sen Enter any attributes for the code using the ATRIB F4 key a The code is stored along with the Point Id information 7 Measuring with System 500 Free Coding Point Id Last Code Last Code Ant Height Z000 m GOOF z dad ir CUP COE The Last Code and second last code 2Last Code that were used are shown The CODE F4 key will be available Press this key to access the codelist ee es a Free Coding Free Code n Description Info 1 168 Fence Line STORE LAST NEH I DEFLT CLEAR To select the code 1 Use the left or right cursor keys to cycle through the code list or 2 Press ENTER and select the code from the list or 3 Type in the first few characters of the code until the desired code is displayed ee es he a Free Coding Free Code gt 148 Fence Line ae zA Fence Post Shorim Drain Road Gully ir CONT NEH LAST C IHF louie An asterisk next to a code indicates that it has attributes Press CONT F1 to select the code Further information about Coding Systems is available in Section 8 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 1 5 Adding a Starting Time It will be possible to add a starting time for a point occupation if auto occupy has been set to Timed in the Occupation Settings of the Configuration Set es ee Default Point 1 Point Id Ant Height MEE EEE r
148. and Specifications The following pages contain different possible combinations for connecting the GS50 GS50 sensor with various accessories Centimeter level accuracy can be obtained by using two GS50 receivers one as reference and one as rover For real time applications a radio modem is needed to transfer the correction signal from the reference to the rover The following solutions will allow the user to obtain sub meter positional accuracy using the Leica GS50 With post processing it is typical to obtain positional accuracies of 30cm 378 using 2 GS50s one as a reference and the other as a rover No additional options are necessary for a post processing arrangement One Unit Operation It is possible to use only one GS50 as a rover by downloading and post processing RINEX data from the Internet or Public FTP server The quality obtained cannot generally be estimated because it depends on the quality of public data and the baseline length In theory it should be possible to obtain 30cm accuracy with reasonable baseline length and quality reference data Along with the GIS DataPRO software the equipment shown in the chapter Equipment Setup Real Time Rover GIS Rover is sufficient for this type of application The same equipment would also be sufficient for simple navigation yielding accuracies of 2 3 meters Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en DGPS For real time DGPS positioning the
149. anual 4 0 0en 2 Set up and Connection 2 7 Equipment Setup Real Time Reference single tripod Use Real Time Reference Station May also collect raw obser vation data for post processing The Receiver and TR500 if used can be assembled to make one unit This clips to the tripod leg Connections are made to the GPS and Radio Antenna Note that the Receiver can be programmed with the TR500 prior to use which can then be omitted from the set up The Radio Antenna is mounted on the Antenna Arm which clips to the GPS Antenna The SR510 and SR520 can only be used as a DGPS reference station if they are fitted with the DGPS option They cannot be used as a Real Time Reference station The SR530 can be used as either a DGPS or Real Time reference station Real Time and DGPS are fitted as standard on the SR530 Assumptions 1 GPS Antenna is mounted directly using screw fitting If using stub and GAD 31 adapter procedures may vary slightly 2 Standard Radio modem is used Mounted in Radio Housing 2 Set up and Connection 3 ee Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Equipment Checklist GPS Antenna AT501 502 GRT146 Carrier GDF122 or GDF 112 Tribrach SR510 520 530 GPS Receiver TR500 Terminal if required GEV141 1 2m Antenna Cable GST20 GST05 05L Tripod GAT1 GAT2 Radio Antenna GAD33 Radio Antenna Arm GEV141 1 2m Antenna Cable GZS4 Height Hook Radio Modem in GFU 5 6 Housing M
150. are using a third party modem make sure it sup ports AT command lan guage Appendix H Configuring the Modem CONF IGURE Inter f aces lt lt Port Denice HHEA Output ASCII Input Hidden Point ir ONT JEDIT S TL From CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight the interface e g Prim Remote you want to use with a modem and press EDIT F3 Press DEVCE F5 to access the device list Highlight Modem from the list and press NEW F2 Enter a name E g ModemXY and enter the applicable device parameters COMFIGURE Hew Port Settings Hame J Modem Baud Rate 13200 Pari tu z Hornet Data Bits 5 oF Stop Bits iF Flow Contrl RTS CTiF a a The port settings are the parameters used for the communication between the Sensor and the modem If re quired edit them to suit the modem Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Press the OPT F4 key to access the modem options The modem options enable you to define the AT com mands used for communiction between the sensor and the modem CONFIGURE Modem Options THe n JEF Init 1 ATF 1E0QAN 1I AM n ATHOZA 1 12225x4q4 M z ATHAM Init z Dial ATI SHM OMT ELT Under Type select User and modify the remaining parameters Alterna tively select a standard modem type from the list and press SET U F5 to turn this parameters into user param eters and then modify them Init 1 and Init 2 This is the initialisa tion sequenze to initialise t
151. at you wish to use Format Files need to be stored in the System RAM of the sensor Press FORMT F3 to transfer them from the directory CONVERT of the PC Card or internal memory to the System RAM or vice versa lf PC card or Internal has been selected as the desired device you have to specify the Destination and the File name Destinatn Select the type of file that will be written This specifies where the file will be written File Specify the file name and extension If To Instrument has been chosen you have to specify the Port and the Device Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Pil C ard To n Instrument Job n Determinat iont For mat n Exanrle fre Por t Z L61ca TRSsbe8 7 OMT FORM OO E ACEF ILT Press IFACE F5 and set Use Device to YES COMFIGURE GSI User Out Use Device MEE Port z Leica TP SOOY Job Number i i Job Hame Tr ansf er OMT PO IEC E Select the port to which the device is connected Use the DEVCE F5 key in the CONFIGURE GSI User Out panel to configure the device itself Leica TPS300 700 Geodimeter and Zeiss REC500 total stations as well as the SOKKIA SDR33 datalogger are currently supported Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en When Leica TPS300 700 is selected and connected to the GPS receiver select the Job Number to which job the data should be sent The Job Name of existing jobs in the TPS instrument is displayed For a new job type in a n
152. ate i to operate in the Remain Running mode Ant Height Enter the point Id 001Fence and then press SHIFT Quality RUN F5 Occupy and store this point The next HELP GRAPH FOH QUIT point Id will be 002Fence Note Numerical characters in front of any text will also increment This allows any type of incrementing point Ids to be created Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 5 Configuring the Receiver 5 2 1 Advanced Operation Mode for Post Processed Kinematic The Advanced Mode contains certain extra configurable options that may be required for specialized applications Select Advanced in CONFIGURE Operation Mode GURE OFPerPathion Pode AdVanced OMT PT Only the screens that differ from those seen in Standard Mode are described here 5 Configuring the Receiver Position In addition to the functionality given in Standard mode details about the chosen coordinate system are given COMFIGURE Possit ign Update Rate 1 BFS Coord Sys WIT M38 Residuals Ho distribution Transf orm n Test Ellipsoid MGS 1964 Projection UTM se Geoid Model CONT Residuals The method by which residuals will be distributed throughout the transformation area is displayed Transform The name of the transformation set used is displayed Ellipsoid The name of the local ellipsoid is displayed Projection The name of the projection used is displayed Geoid Model The name of t
153. ate system and INFO F5 to reveal the type of transformation used When NEW F2 is pressed the following screen appears CONFIGURE Mew Coord System Coord Sys Transf orm SWists 1 Frojection SWiss Ge0id Models Test CONT a Coord Sys Defines the name of the new coordinate system Further advice on Coordinate Sys tems is given in Section 11 When you have set the parameters press CONT F1 to return to the CONFIGURE Position screen When using EDIT F3 the same descriptions apply Press CONT F1 to return to the CONFIGURE Position screen 5 Configuring the Receiver Formats Format Grid n Format Geode Lat Lon Hyatt GUSLlity Tue DOP Defined by PosStHattyT ime OCCUPY Counter ObSer uat ions Y CONT a ee You can configure the way in which information is presented when surveying Format Grid The format of grid coordinates if they are being used Format Geodetic The format of geodetic coordinates if they are being used Quality Type The way in which the quality of a position is displayed in the Main Survey screen This is Hard wired to DOP for Static Rapid Static Configurations It will display a Dilution of Precision according to the components defined 5 Configuring the Receiver Defined by Defines the components used to calculate the DOP The definitions of the DOP are as follows Height VDOP Pos HDOP Pos Hgt PDOP Pos Hgt Time GDOP
154. ating Principles There are several conventions used in the user interface of System 500 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 1 Function Keys F1 F6 function keys appear below six bars on the screen These bars will appear with commands in them on each screen To execute the com mand press the corresponding function key 2 Entering Data At times you will have to enter Point lds Names etc Enter the data using the keyboard and press the Enter key Special characters such as a a etc can be entered using the alphanumeric input When the character you wish to input is not on the keyboard press the Enter key The F1 F6 keys will then contain 5 characters on each Press the key that contains the character you require The F1 F6 keys will then contain one of each of the five that you selected Use the up and down cursor keys to scroll through all the possible characters Press the key that corresponds to the character you require This will then be entered The extra characters that are available for use can be configured in the Configure menu 4 TR500 Terminal Overview Working Example Application Entering a special character Technique N A Requirement You need to enter the Job name Cezanne All the charac ters are contained on the keyboard except JIES AEN TOD e Hame J C Description Crestor Dewi ce n PC Card Cie S3 daGGe 21 1 ABE ES SouuuOUibe Field Procedure The C
155. available in Chapter 5 When Using the GAD31 adapter and GRT 144 carrier ensure that the Antenna and GAD31 assembly slide down the full length of the GRT144 stub An incorrectly mounted Antenna will have a direct effect on your results In wet conditions the Re ceiver can be placed in the transport case during use for extra protection Try to shut the case as completely as possible If the Receiver is left in the case during use in tempera tures exceeding 25 C the lid should be left open Refer to Appendix A for operating and storage 2 Set up and Connection 2 9 Equipment Setup Real Time Rover Pole and Minipack Use a The Radio Modem attaches to the Receiver and is placed in the Minipack Connections are made to the GPS Antenna Radio Antenna and TR500 Recommended for extended periods of use in the field The cables coming from the Minipack can be discon nected in the event that an obstacle E g a fence has to be crossed Assumptions 1 GPS Antenna is mounted directly using screw fitting If using stub and GAD 31 adapter procedures may vary slightly 2 Aluminium poles are used You may replace them with their Carbon Fiber equivalents without any change to these instructions 2 Set up and Connection Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Equipment Checklist 1 2 GPS Antenna AT501 or 502 GLS21 Upper half aluminium pole with screw or stub GHT25 Grip for pole GHT27 Holder for
156. aw data logging is active Data will also be logged to ring buffer raw data files if ring buffer logging Is active Notify Msg Select BINARY to directly output the Meteo data to external application software viaa selected communication port Press NPORT F4 to select the remote port and configure the device through which the message shall be transmit ted 375 The output message format is Leica Binary V2 LB2 message type Meteorological and Inclination Data ID 10 Documentation for the LB2 Interface Control is available on request from your Leica Geosystems representative Press DEVCE F5 to access the device list Select a Meteo device from the list and press CONT F1 to confirm To interface to the Vaisala PTU200GP S choose the MET3 interface but make sure the Vaisala system has been programmed to mimic the MET3 data string details will be supplied with Vaisala PTU200GPS when purchased via Leica Geosystems Appendix J Configuring Tilt Devices Press the CONFIG button and then choose 4 Interfaces and then 7 Tilt Wee Device TEZY POF t 1 RieaeF Data Rate hy Loy to Files Hor Hokifu Moa Hone OMT PEC E Use Device Set to YES to activate using a Tilt device and access the configuration options Port defines the port to where the Tilt device will be connected Data Rate Defines the rate at which data will be requested from the Tilt device Select between 0 1 to
157. bed in Chapter 2 Attach the Terminal Switch on The Main Menu will be displayed The system will automatically start searching for satellites Select Survey and press CONT F1 PP_ TAT Contig Set fault Job z De Coord Sys HGS64 Geodetic Antenna ATSaS Tripod EE Config Set Defines the Configuration Set to be used The last Configuration Set used or created will be taken by default although any other Configuration Set may be selected Job Defines the Job to be used This is the Job where any point and observation data will be stored Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Coord Sys Displays the coordinate system that will be used for the display of coordinates For post processed work this will normally be WGS84 Antenna Defines the Antenna setup to be used The Setup defined in the Configuration Set will be taken by default although any other setup may be selected For post processed Static Rapid Static or Kinematic Reference work this will normally be AT501 502 Tripod Press CONT F1 when you have made your selection 7 Measuring with System 500 7 1 1 Overview of Procedure The Main Survey Panel appears SWURWEY Def sult Point Id n Ant Height GOOF z Ba From here you can add Point Id and Antenna Height and observe the WW vor If configured you will also be able to add a Code If configured you will also be able to enter a start time for the poi
158. between epochs seconds Range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15 30 60 Default if not available O REC Receiver type Range SR299 SR399 SR299E SR399E SR9400 SR9500 SR510 SR520 SR530 GS50 RSN Receiver serial number Range 0 999999 Value if unavailable 0 Appendix C Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Appendix D Defined Line File Format Lines that have been defined in Stakeout are stored inthe Record Format Description file STK_Line txt in the data directory of the memory lt Start of first line of record device Up to 100 lines may be stored in this file ID Line ID 16 characters l Start Point Eastin Line records take the following format separator is a u 19 space but no space after lt and gt The linear unit is Yyy yvevyy VA Point Northing Meter and the angular unit is Gon Hra nh Start Point Orthometric Height gt Start of second line of record lt ID XXXXX XXX yyyyy yyy hhh hhh LD Line definition type gt LD LDD 1 Endpoint Easting Northing Height 2 Distance Bearing V 3 Distance Bearing H V 4 Distance Bearing V H 5 Distance Bearing Hgt Diff LDD Line definition values Depend on LD as shown above 1 2 3 4 5 iin a A a MMN lt ID XXXXX XXX yyyyy yyy hhh hhh gt LD LDD a 6 7 8 Appendix D Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The Receiver can output a variety of NUEA messages These can be set using the CONFIG key or may be steered from a
159. ble During GIS point data collection Shift ENUM F5 leads to the following panel ATTRIBUTION Pek Co Enumeration PLIGQ Mage Ernumer ati o0rs Changs to Triditt ali Ma a a a Entering a different enumeration and F CONT F1 changes the Id enumera tion immediately Appendix K Configuration Occupation settings The configuration option Auto STORE is not available for GIS Data collection This is because the GS50 GS50 always stores automatically This change applies to chapters 5 1 5 2 and 5 4 In Advanced mode the End Survey option is also not available This is because the GIS Data Collection can only be exited manually Additionally the Auto OCUPY option is not available because occupation always starts manually To configure the number of averaged positions for nodes press NODES F4 in the Configure Occupation Settings panel This change applies to chapters 5 1 1 5 2 1 and 5 4 1 Configuration Logging The configuration of logging for auto logged positions is not available for GIS Data Collection This is because the autologged positions are not connected to any topology The GIS Data Collection program employs a different method to collect points automatically which is more suited to GIS data collection For post processing of lines and areas measured in stream mode START STOP it is mandatory to set Log Static and Log Moving to YES This change applies to
160. blocks defined Press C Hidth A SAN INF F4 to view and if required add ee 4 58m information blocks gt M Press CONT F1 to continue CONT NEM J J C INE ch Enter a meaningful name for the info Press NEW F2 block Then move to the adjacent field to enter a default value 8 Coding 938 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 8 2 3 Adding a Free Code When a Free Codelist has been selected for use within a Configuration Set it will be possible to record a Free Code when measuring Point Id Last Code 2Last Code Ant Height ABE m GOOF z dad ocup CODE The Last Code and second last code 2Last Code that were used are shown The CODE F4 key will be available Press this key to access the codelist Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en SURVEYS Free Codi Free Code Description Info 1 STORE LAET HEH I DEFLTICLEAR To select the code 1 Use the left or right cursor keys to cycle through the code list or 2 Press ENTER and select the code from the list or 3 Type in the first few characters of the code until the desired code is displayed SURWEY Fres Coding Fence Line ok Fence Post Shor Drain Road Gull ir CONT MEW LAST C INF late An asterisk next to a code indicates that it has attributes NEW F2 lets you add a new code LAST F3 jumps to the code log and displays the codes that were last assigned in ord
161. c initialization will begin The Receiver needs to be kept perfectly steady during this time For this reason it is advised to use a quickstand or to mount the sensor on a tripod for the initialization period The initialization may be thought of as a Rapid Static point You will need to measure for several minutes the exact time being determined by the baseline length distance between rover and reference The exact time required may be shown using the Stop and Go Indicator You may configure this to be shown in the Main Survey panel and may also access it through the STATUS key The moving part of the chain will not begin until you have completed the initialization and pressed STOP F1 As soon as this key is pressed the moving part of the chain will begin and observations recorded at the predefined rate You may move along the course you wish to record When carrying out a post processed kinematic survey where a static initialization has been performed the Receiver will automatically monitor the number of satellites tracked If at any time this number falls below 4 observation recording will stop and a message will show on the screen informing you that the satellite count has fallen below 4 and you must reinitialize You must then perform the static initialization again Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Initialization on the Fly without starting time This is the method that will be preferred by SR520 and SR5
162. cally define your Point Id s Further information about Point Id Templates and two working examples are given in Chapter 5 2 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 2 3 Adding the Antenna Height Def sult Point 1 SURWEY Point Id Ant Height GDOF 6 6 CLs a ee Usually in post processed kinematic surveys the Antenna will be mounted on a pole and therefore the height will remain constant When an AT501 502 Antenna is used together with a System 500 pole the Antenna Height is 2 00m This may have been specified as the default height in the Configuration Set Otherwise measure the Antenna height and enter it The only time when the Antenna height will not remain constant is when a Static Initialization is carried out on a Tripod and the Antenna is then transferred onto a pole In this case measure the Antenna height on the Tripod add the offset with a height hook this is 0 36m and enter it Then after pressing STOP F1 to finish the initialization the Moving Antenna height specified in the Configuration Set will be used for the moving part of the Kinematic chain 7 Measuring with System 500 7 2 4 Adding a Code It will be possible to add a code toa point if a coding system has been defined for use in the Configuration Set System 500 supports two coding methods Thematical Coding and Free Coding The principles of both methods of coding are explained in Chapter 8 Thematical
163. ccccecsecceeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 333 Appendix F Pin Assignments and SOCKS prre i 334 Appendix G Data Device Directory OE GUUS ats cacsscwasateesteeveneuuestecsvusuipeereeabeeaten 336 Appendix H External Devices 338 Fein thea E coa nae ee aseaant E E E 339 Radio and Repeaters cccssccsseceeeeneeceeeceeeeeeeaees 340 IM coccinea aces E A A AEN 344 MOGET preeriaa N 350 RTB Module CSI ccccceseececeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 352 RTS Module Racal cccccccsececeseceeeeseeeeseeeaees 354 SA OS sa rcideccceatenncaeeseaacessastanderteesentecaneasanereoentraeasche 356 Using a SAPOS decoder DOX cceseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 356 Using a SMART gate DOX ccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeens 357 Using the Telemax Service ccccccseeeeeseseeeeeeneeeeeens 359 Hidden FP ONE sisser N 361 Appendix I MC500 cccccsseeceeseeeeseeees 364 Appendix J RS500 ssnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 369 Appendix K GS50 GS50 and GIS Data Collection ssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 377 Hardware and Accessories cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 378 Compact Flash and Sensor Transfer 0 c 0000 382 Operation and Configuration cccccesceeseeeeeseeeees 383 The CONFIG Key 0cccccssececeeeseeecenseesseeeeeeseaeees 384 The STATUS Key siininvasiivcsionannteeecsdoarintielustoneseseaicnenes 388 Data Collection with the GS50 and G
164. chapters 5 1 5 2 and 5 4 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Configuration Formats The line for configuration of OCUPY counter used in the SR510 20 30 survey program is removed This is because there is no such counter in the GIS Data Collection Program This change applies from chapter 5 1 to 5 4 atti Ort Fis At Lat Lon Hatt Format Grid Format Geodet walit Tupe Dor Dert ined b a FPos tHat T imet OHT Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Configuration Start up The Start up Configuration allows configuration of the sensor to either create a daily job or to create a job manually Enter the configuration Start Up with the CONFIG key Hew Job per gasy AULOOr Hew Job AECIEFGHIJ KOMHOPHAE Configuration Real Time The GS50 is a L1 code only DGPS receiver It uses RTCM data messages 1 2 or 9 2 only for data exchange The GS50 uses all RTCM formats as the SR530 The standard settings allow communication with public DGPS sources For example coast guard world wide differential signals use the RTCM 9 2 messages whereas the satellite differential service RACAL Landstar uses the RTCM 1 2 message If a pair of GS50 GS50 receivers are communicating with each other then any of the realtime formats can be used on both receivers as long as those recievers are using matching formats This applies to chapters 5 3 and 5 4 Appendix K Configuration Hidden Poi
165. chnical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Backward Bearing amp Distance height included If the height computation for a hidden point has been enabled within the configuration the following options apply in addition to those on the previous page SURVEY Point A Bear ifid Distance Delta H tt Hidden Pt a T LE A AAR g i ABORT eT SLOPE Delta Hgt Height difference between the center of the external device and the aimed point Devices with inclinometer like the Laser Locator will transfer the measured height difference automatically into this field as long as Include Hot in the panel CONFIGURE Hidden Point is set to YES When working with devices without inclinometer the height difference can be estimated and typed in manuallly Use the I T H F4 key to check or enter the instrument height at the standpoint and target act oe MEST M Trist Ht at Point a Trat Height CONT EFL The default values as defined in the configuration are displayed but can be edited Use the DEFLT F5 key to reveal the default values again Trgt Height will only be available if the settings have been done accordingly in the configuration Otherwise only the instrument height will be taken into account CONT F1 to return to the previous panel When Distance is highlighted use SLOPE F5 to enter a slope distance and either an elevation angle or a grade in External devices work here as well Slope Dist E
166. confirm CONFIGURE F RA Time Data Data Format Poor t 1 ATS Module lt F 231 Time Radio Down Don t Loa Obs OMT EMCE RTE Ensure that the Data Format is set to RTCM 1 2 Press RTCM F6 to set the RTCM version and the number of bits byte Press CONT F1 to continue In CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight Real Time and press CTRL F5 Ref ttn Ig Automat i Channel Automat ict CONT DGPS corrections can be received from different RACAL ground stations via different satellites Each satellite sends this corrections by different beams Channels Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en If Ref Stn ID is set to Automatic it will search the closest ground station according to your current position If it is set to User defined you may enter an Id manually or press RSTN F4 to request a list of all ground stations available lf Channel is set to Auto it will select an appropriate spot beam from the nearest satellite If it is set to User defined you may enter a Channel number manually Press CONT F1 to close the control panel Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Status of the RTS Module Racal To access the RTS Module status press STATUS Interfaces highlight the RTB device and press VIEW F3 channel z 1 S19rna1 Za A L AGC Freq Of f Set dE HARE EHZ Bit Error Rates 1 OMT a E Information about the connected Racal module is displayed Ref Stn ID
167. connected device using a query message Note that a Talker ID appears at the beginning of the header This is normally GP for GPS but may be set by the user in CONFIG NMEA The query message format is the same for every NMEA message apart from the message identifier Format Content SPLEIQ Header message sent from Outside World XXX Message Identifier a Port x Output Rate hh Checksum lt CR gt Carriage Return lt LF gt Line Feed 1 Message Identifiers are GGA Global Positioning System Fix Data GGK Real Time Position with DOP GGK PT Real Time Position with DOP GGQ Real Time Position with CQ Appendix E NMEA Message Formats GLL Geodetic Position Latitude Longitude GNS GNSS Fix Data GSA GPS DOP and Active Satellites GSV GPS Satellites in View LLK Leica Local Position and GDOP LLQ Leica Local Position and Quality VTG Course Over Ground and Ground Speed ZDA Time and Date 2 Port from which NMEA message is requested 1 Port 1 2 Port 2 3 Port 3 3 Output rate of NMEA Message 0 Output off 1 0 1 s 10Hz 2 0 2 s 5HZz 3 0 5 s 2HzZ 4 15 5 2S 6 3S 7 45 8 5S 9 6S 10 10s Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 3235 11 12s 12 15s 13 20s 14 30s 15 1 min 16 2 min 17 3 min 18 4 min 19 5 min 20 6 min 21 10 min 22 12 min 23 15 min 24 20 min 25 30 min 26 1h 200 Output immediately Appendix E In the listing o
168. d GEV141 1 2m Antenna Cable GST20 GSTO5 05L Tripod GZS4 Height Hook Radio Modem in GFU5 6 Housing MCF XMB 3 PC Card GEB121 Batteries GST20 GST05 05L Tripod GHT36 Base for Telescopic Rod GEV120 2 8m Antenna Cable GAT1 GAT2 Radio Antenna GAD34 Short Antenna Arm GAD32 Telescopic Rod GVP602 Transport Case 2 Set up and Connection Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en How to set up the equipment Follow steps 1 10 as described in section 2 3 11 Attach the Radio Modem in its housing to the GPS Receiver Set up the second Tripod nearby Screw the Base onto the Tripod Push the Telescopic Rod into the Base Screw the Short Antenna Arm onto the telescopic Rod Screw the Radio Antenna onto the Arm Connect the Radio modem to the Radio Antenna using the 2 8m Antenna cable Switch the System On using the On Off button on the Receiver or Terminal 12 13 14 15 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The Next Steps If the Receiver has been pre pro grammed and the TR500 is not being used further guidance is available in Chapter 3 If the Receiver has been pre pro grammed and the TR500 is being used further guidance is available in Chapter 7 If the Receiver requires programming with the TR500 further guidance is
169. d not allow the computation of grid coordinates 11 Applications APPLICATION Menu Al Determine Coord System Point Management Calculator Wake up Sessions Fo CaL Area ar Line Division CONT LC Select COGO from the APPLICA TION menu Log File TEZY File Name COGOL LOG Uze OF FSet TEZY Use Era n Hor OMT OT Job Change the current Job if necessary Change Log File to YES and enter a File Name if you want to generate a log file of all the calculations The file will be written in the LOG subdirectory of the PC card or internal memory Use Offset Enables you to activate an additional entry field for a parallel offset whenever a line is to be de fined Use Brg Enables you to enter and display bearings in the four quadrants NorthEast SouthEast SouthWest and NorthWest If this option is set to YES and a bearing needs to be entered the function key QUAD F6 enables you to switch between the quadrants Press CONT F1 will bring you to the COGO menu COoOGO Menu Inver se Tr aver Fe INterseckhiohisaas Of Ei Arce a u ON FO Pe ee ee Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Inverse This function enables you to calculate the inverse between two grid or two geodetic points All coordinates used in the program can be entered manually selected from the database or measured Line Ft i Line Pt 3 Br Enter the start point and the end point of the line or pres
170. d only points with numeric point IDs are transfered and point IDs are shortened to 4 digits truncating from the right 9 The CONFIG Key CONFIGURE Gil User Out Wee Device YEZ Por t 3 50KKIA 2DRSSF Renu mer OMT PEC For more information on exporting ASCII files using a Format file template refer to chapter 13 7 Transfer GSI User 9 The CONFIG Key 9 15 Interfaces Remote The Remote interface enables you to configure the Remote control mode and the device connected to the sensor In most of the cases the sensor will be controlled via the TR500 connected to the Terminal port Alternatively a remote computer can be used to steer the sensor If the Remote mode is set to Terminal and a command is sent to the sensor via any serial port the sensor auto matically turns on and switches to remote mode If the sensor is to be remotely con trolled highlight the Remote interface and select the Port Press DEVCE F5 to select the appropraite device from the list Normally this will be RS232 For more information about devices refer to Appendix H Sensor Transfer with SKI Pro Using the Remote interface it is possible to download data directly from the memory device of the sensor into SKI Pro through the serial port of the PC without having to remove the TR500 from the Terminal port Configure the Remote interface to the appropriate port and device as described above This would nor mally be Por
171. d the individual point coordinates 7 Measuring with System 500 188 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The intervals are displayed with time when they were recorded and the differences in position and height MANAGE Aver age 1B88 Ar a oe ir az 2 0q a BAB a 308 T Point out of ee limit i CONT USE Should a point fall outside of these threshold settings this panel will be accessed automatically The asterisk marks the measurement exceeding the threshold settings Common reasons for this happening are an incorrect antenna height or a wrong point Id You may either Press ESC to return to the survey screen check and correct the antenna height or point Id then rerecord the interval Your previous incorrect interval will be deleted or Highlight the interval that is incorrect and press USE F2 to deselect the interval Then press CONT F1 to return to the survey screen or Highlight the interval that is incorrect and press DEL F4 to delete the interval Then press CONT F1 to return to the survey screen or With INFO F5 toggle between different information for each interval Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Should a point fall within the threshold settings and the system is set to absolute coordinate differences you may press ABS F2 Point m Solute Out of absol limit i CONT USE DIFF DEL IHFO The intervals are displayed with time when th
172. d for data collection preparation and data post processing Please refer to the Getting Started with the GIS DataPRO Office Software User Manual for more details To install the GIS DataPRO software 1 Insert the CD ROM into the CD drive of your PC 2 Execute the Setup command 3 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen Both a hardware and software user manual can be found on the CD in PDF format The software itself contains a comprehensive online Help System Appendix K Hardware and Accessories The GS50 Receiver The GS50 tracks the L1 C A code and uses it to reconstruct the carrier phase Data can be stored for post processing in SKI PRO or GIS DataPRO Baselines can be calculated up to a precision of 10 20mm 2ppm With a radio modem or other DGPS source the receiver can be used for real time measurements accepting RTCM code corrections Coordinates can be calculated with a precision of up to about 0 4 meters The GS50 Receiver The GS50 is a 12 channel L1 12 channel L2 code and phase GPS receiver The standard GS50 records phase measurements for post processing and RTK purposes Data can be stored for post process ing in SKI Pro or GIS DataPro Baselines can be calculated to a precision of 5 10 mm 1 ppm Appendix K With a radio modem the receiver can be used for RTK measurements Coordinates can be calculated with a precision of up to about 1 m Hardware Configurations
173. d in Start Endpoint Enter the horizontal Distance to the end point This end point will be an artificial point If no value other than zero is given a default of 100m will be taken Enter the horizontal Bearing to the end point through which the line passes Enter the Slope H V values These are defined as described in the diagram 7 Measuring with System 500 Start Dst Bg V H The line is defined by a start point a horizontal distance and bearing from the start point and the ratio of vertical increment over horizontal increment Enter Select LocalE Local N and Ortho H gt for the start point as described in Start Endpoint Enter the horizontal Distance to the end point This end point will be an artificial point If no value other than zero is given a default of 100m will be taken Enter the horizontal Bearing to the end point through which the line passes Enter the Slope V H values These are defined as described in the diagram 7 Measuring with System 500 Start Dist Bg Hgt The line is defined by a start point a horizontal distance and bearing from the start point and the height difference between the start point and artificial end point Enter Select LocalE Local N and Ortho Hgt for the start point as described in Start Endpoint Enter the horizontal Distance to the end point This end point will be an artificial point If no value other than zero is given a default of 100m will b
174. d of distribution is stored with the new coordinate system Match Pts The number of matched points used in the transformation calculation Max Res E N H The largest residual in East North and Height Press CONT F1 to save the Coordinate System and return to the Application menu Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 11 2 Adding Points to Existing Coordinate Systems Points may be added to existing Coordinate Systems This is useful if you have to measure outside of an existing transformation area and therefore need to extend the area by measuring the WGS84 coordinates of a point known in the local system that lies outside of the existing transformation area Measure the new point s in the same job as the other existing points used to determine the Coordinate System From Applications select Determine Coordinate System Determination Beair COORDS Ym Coord Sys i WGSh4d Pts Determination Local Pts Crd or id tat CONT LOCAL csv Press CSYS F6 to list the Coordinate Systems available Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en COORDS Ym Mami Coord Sus i a ae LE Classic Classic 1 2Lep Classic Wiss 1 Swiss Z MGS64 Geodetic ir OMT HEM JEDIT DEL IMFO oH Select the Coordinate System that you wish to include new points in Press CONT F1 COORDSYS Determination Bevin Coord Sys MHGSad PLS Determinat iont Local PLS Crd grid txt CONT O O LOCALIAUTO
175. de from the Receiver to the Antenna Another connection is made from the Receiver to the TR500 Recommended for short periods of use especially where there are many obstacles fences etc Assumptions 1 GPS Antenna is mounted directly using screw fitting If using stub and GAD 31 adapter procedures may vary slightly 2 Aluminium poles are used You may replace them with their Carbon Fiber equivalents without any change to these instructions Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 Set up and Connection Equipment Checklist O O 0 N 12 13 GPS Antenna AT501 or 502 GLS18 Upper half aluminium pole with screw GHT25 Grip for pole GHT27 Holder for TR500 GLS17 Lower half aluminium pole GHT37 Holder piece for GPS Receiver with antenna cable and 5pin Lemo cable GHT26 Holder for GPS Receiver TR500 Terminal 2 GEB121 Batteries SR510 520 or 530 GPS Re ceiver GAT1 GAT2 Radio Antenna Radio Modem in GFU5 6 Hous ing MCF XMB 3 PCMCIA flash card 2 Set up and Connection Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en How to set up the equipment Follow steps 1 9 described in section 2 6 10 Attach the Radio Modem in its housing to the GPS Receiver 11 Screw the Radio Antenna onto the housing 12 Switch on the system using the ON OFF button on the TR500 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The Next Steps If the R
176. down Once the entered start time is reached the measurement beginns The icon changes to a tripod indicating that the Receiver should remain stationary SURVEY Default Point Id z Ant Height 2 888 mM Fo itions T oD Quality 8 81 M if a ee A T T 7 Measuring with System 500 The line Time to go changes to depending to the OCCUPY counter set Positions Time at point Then according to what has been set in Occupation Settings press STOP F1 and STORE F1 Once the point is stored again the OCUPY F1 key becomes available and the start time line is shown with the current time and the seconds rounded to zero To start a new occupation enter the next start time Then press OCUPY F1 Averaging Procedure Whenever more than one coordinate for the same point is recorded the system does the following In any case it carries out an averaging procedure Depending on the Threshhold Settings either the difference between the average and the individual point coordinates or the absolute coordinate differences between two points in X Y Z and E N H with local coordinate system can be displayed Limits for the averaging procedure as well as for the absolute coordinate differences are also set in Threshold Settings Should a point fall within these threshold settings and the system is set to the averaging functionality you may press AVRG F2 to display the differences between the average an
177. download times A PC Card download using a PC Card Reader or PCMCIA port is virtually instantaneous Internal memory has to download through a serial connection and can take time e Flexibility no downtime of GPS Receiver A PC Card can be removed from a receiver when it is full and replaced with a spare The Receiver does not have to be taken back to the office for downloading Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Using an Internal Memory means however that the data has less chance of being misplaced or lost This can happen when multiple PC Cards are used for the same project If you are not sure about which type of memory to use try using a PC card but don t remove it from the Receiver You can still download as if it were Internal Memory through any port 1 Introduction 1 5 Batteries Power Supply System 500 will normally be powered by two GEB121 camcorder type batteries which plug into the under side of the GPS receiver Two batteries fully charged will power the SR510 and TR500 for about 7 5 hours continuously and the SR520 530 for about 6 hours continu ously Operating times will be shorter when working in cold weather and when a radio modem is connected Plug in and remove the GEB121 batteries as shown opposite System 500 can also be powered by the GEB71 7Ah battery or any 12V DC power supply via either power port on the front face of the receiver using an appropriate cable 1 Introduc
178. dvanced Mode contains extra configurable parameters that may be required for certain specialized applications Select Advanced in CONFIGURE Operation Mode GURE OFPerPathion Pode AdVanced OMT PT Only the screens that differ from those seen in Standard Mode are described here 5 Configuring the Receiver Position In addition to the functionality given in Standard mode details about the chosen coordinate system are given CONFIGURE Position Update Rates 1 BFS Coord Sy UIT HMSe Residuals Ho distribution Transf orm n Test Ellipsoid MGS 1964 Projection UTM se Geoid Model CONT a Residuals The method by which residuals will be distributed through out the transformation area is dis played Transform The name of the trans formation set used is displayed Ellipsoid The name of the local ellipsoid is displayed Projection The name of the projec tion used is displayed Geoid Model The name of the geoid model used is displayed CSCS Model The name of the CSCS model used is displayed 124 Note that the details that are dis played depend upon the type of transformation used Certain types of transformation do not use all of the described parameters to calculate local coordinates Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Real Time 1 2 Configures parameters used for Real Time operations a1l Time i Ref erence RA Time TEDEH Data For mat Leica Por t 1
179. e local ell height will be exported If the local ell height is not available either the WGS84 ell height will be exported Units of altitude meters fixed text M Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed GGK PT Real Time Position with DOP This message type is Trimble proprietary Format SPTNL GGK hhmmss ss mmddyy 1111 11 a YYYYY YY a X XX XX EHT X X xhh lt CR gt lt LF gt Content Start of sentence delimiter TALKER ID fixed with PTNL GGK Sentence Formatter UTC of Position Fix UTC date Latitude Hemisphere N S Longitude E W GPS Quality Indicator 0 fix not available or invalid 1 No Realtime position navigation fix 2 Realtime position ambiguities not fixed 3 Realtime position ambiguities fixed Number of Satellites in Use Common satellites between ref and rover Values between 00 to 12 may be different from the number in view PDOP Ellipsoidal height Altitude above below mean sea level for position of marker Note if no orthometric height is available the local ell height will be exported Units of altitude meters fixed text M Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en GGO Real Time Position with CQ GLL Geodetic Position Latitude Longitude Format Content Format Content SGPGGO Header incl Talker ID message sent from SGPGLL Header incl Talker ID message
180. e ne Code Hame n All Earn n fi a ee ee ee Type in the new attribute value then press ADD F2 STORE F1 records the code and returns to the Main Survey panel Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 8 2 Free Coding 8 2 1 Importing Selecting and Defining a Free Codelist Free Coding is time based information Although it is possible to create a Coding Type Choose Free Coding independent of any recorded points new empty Codelist on the Receiver and then create new Layers Codes a the list or to define a new codelist Free Coding can be used to generate and Attributes it is far more practical ea press ENTER virtually any type of code Exporting of to create the complete Codelist in the codes through an Output Mask SKI Pro Codelist Manager and upload REISER converts them for use in any type of it to the Receiver BE SPEELS third party surveying software Free Codelist Codelists can be transferred to the Output Masks are defined in SKI Pro PC Card or Internal Memory using the using Format Manager Some standard Transfer function in SKI Pro Eee Output masks exist E g for exporting Codelists on the PC Card or Internal to GSI format but you are also free to Memory must then be transferred to Codelist Select the codelist from The Codelists on the Receiver are define whichever output mask best the Receiver using the Transfer displayed To create a new empty La suits the format that you usually work function
181. e ASCII file may be uploaded to the Receiver using SKI Pro or by copying the ASCII file onto a PC Card and using the Transfer function Alternatively use the ASCII GSI to Job converter and use Stake from Job See section 13 6 for more information Store Job Appears when ASCII File is selected in Stake from This parameter takes the original ASCII coordinate and stores it in the Job together with the staked point This is useful when comparing design points to actually staked points Show Path Will display a track on a the graphics screen of your previous positions when set to Yes Def Orient Defines the default orientation direction for stake out This is the direction from which bearings or offsets will be taken Note that this is the default orientation A different orientation may always be defined when running Stakeout The options are North orient towards north Sun the sun is used as the orienta tion direction System 500 can calcu late the position of the sun for any time and location on the earth s surface 5 Configuring the Receiver Last Point Use the last recorded point Known Point Use any point in the job The point can be defined when running Stakeout Line Orient parallel to any line defined in the current job The line can be defined when running Stake out Arrow Shows an arrow on the graphical side of the stake out panel Simply walk in the direction of t
182. e amount of data recorded with 100 being the amount required If Auto Stop was selected the recording of observations will automatically stop when 100 is reached Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The ADD F5 key is available Further information is available in the next section Further information about the Stop and Go indicator satellites tracked data logged etc can be accessed through the STATUS key More information about this key is given in Chapter 10 When the required length of time has passed press the STOP F1 key to stop raw observation recording If Auto Stop has been set in the Configuration this will happen automatically Press STORE F1 to store the Point ld and any Thematical Code that you may have assigned If Auto Store has been set in the Configuration this will happen automatically Once the point is stored again the OCUPY F1 key becomes available and the start time line is shown with the current time and the seconds rounded to zero To start a new occupation enter the next start time Then press OCUPY F1 Leave the survey by pressing SHIFT followed by QUIT F6 To switch off press the ON OFF key on the terminal 7 Measuring with System 500 7 1 7 Using the ADD key When the Advanced Mode is selected the ADD F5 key is available This key can be used to add Point Annotations and Meteorological Data SURWEY Def sult Point Id n Ant Height G
183. e cursor will start at incrementing numbers Se Ee EE Note that leading spaces cannot be Press CONT F1 until you return to a accepted the CONFIGURE Id Templates Pt Id Mode Is the Mode how the Pt screen Template will be used If you select Num Start Defines the start position Remain Running and you enter a of any automatically incrementing To edit an existing Id Template press different Point Id manually in the number EDIT F3 Survey panel the new Point Id will be used as the new Id Template The Num End Defines the end position To delete an existing Id Template following Point Id s will then be based of any automatically incrementing press DEL F4 on this new Template If you select number Change to Indiv and then enter a Further options are available on this Point Id manually in the Survey panel Auto Inc Defines whether the screen in Advanced mode See the Point Id will return to the Id number will increment automatically section 5 2 1 for details Template as it is defined at subsequent points Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 5 Configuring the Receiver Working Example 1 Requirement You are completing a survey where you will require many different point IDs Most point IDs will need an incrementing number behind the text The first points you measure will need the point ID Bolt wa Settings In CONFIG OCUPY Pts set up a point ID template as shown here Note that the Id type is set to
184. e found in the MC500 User Manual The receiver and measurement performance of the MC500 are the same as the SR530 The MC500 tracks the L1 C A code and L2 P code to reconstruct the carrier phase When Anti Spoofing A S is acti vated the receiver switches to a patented P code aided tracking technique that provides full L2 carrier measurements and L2 pseudoranges Appendix Appendix I MC500 MC500 GPS receiver The MC500 also includes the data logging features of the RS500 see Appendix J and is suitable for refer ence station applications in severe environments With a radio modem attached the receiver can be used for RTK opera tions Coordinates can be calculated with a precision of up to about 1cm Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Standard Features The MC500 includes as standard the following features PPS Output functionality installed Event Input functionality installed Met Tilt Interface Ring Buffer Functionality Ground Stud Environmental shock absorbers Dust caps for external ports Data Storage The MC500 also comes as standard with a PCMCIA card This card enables data to be stored for post processing This card is installed behind the protective cover This cover should only be removed by an approved Leica technician Outside World Interface OWI External control of the MC500 is achieved through use of the Outside World Interface OWI message format from Leica Tec
185. e in the Job In this way you have the Target points and the as staked points in one Job To stake out a point select it from the Target Point List Press Enter to expose a list of all points in the Job See section 11 3 for a description of the useful filters and sorting methods which may be helpful when staking a lot of points A particularly useful filter maybe to filter by Points to Stake 7 Measuring with System 500 TARE OUT Defan lt Orient Aor ther Dist f 38 69 m Direct Z6l Z1i 9 Cut A A m Gualitwys A A m Bb ir OCUPY ORTHO REWA S REDRAW PCKUPLIMIT The measurement to the point will be displayed as Orthogonal or Polar Use the F2 key to switch between the methods If you are a 500 meter or feet away from the target point the graphical display will look as follows TARE OUT Defan lt Orient HOr ther Dist SZ 44 M Direct 1AA d g Cut 14 957 M Duality A A m BB ir OCUP ORTHO REDRAW PCKUP INIT The cross and arrow indicate your current position and direction of moving The rectangle points to the target point and the triangle to the orientation point The display is only updated if you are moving faster than 50cm sec If the rectangle is in one line with the arrow you are heading towards the target point If you are closer than 500 m to the target point your position with respect to the Target point is shown in an other graphical display The scale show
186. e taken Enter the horizontal Bearing to the end point through which the line passes Enter the Height Difference Hgt Diff between the start point and the artificial end point When you have entered the method by which you wish to define the line and the necessary parameters press CONT F1 to continue TAKE OUT Def 31 t Line STE LinS TAT Line 1 ir CONT MEW JEDIT DEL A aH The new line is displayed Press CONT F1 to select the line for orientation Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 5 5 Polar and Orthogonal There are two methods which you Orthogonal can use to find your way to a point The Orthogonal method gives you a distance In Out to the point a distance These are Polar and Orthogonal Use left right to the point and a cut fill the F2 key to switch between the two methods STAKE OUT Default Oriert 3 Mor thr g O LI C F mi i i y GuUality A es m Be p lOCUP POLAR REVAS REDRAW PCKUP INIT P O Orientation direction Orient P Current Position I O Horizontal Distance In Out L R Horizontal Distance Left Right C F Vertical Distance Cut Fill T Target Point Note In from current position to target along the orientation direction Out from current position to target 180 from orientation direction Left right looking along orientation direction distance left right to target point Technical Refer
187. e the event takes place To enable messages change Notify Msg to ASCII OWI or Binary LB2 and press NPORT F5 to select the port and device through which the message shall be transmitted Scroll down and enter a Description This description will be recorded with the event record This is particularly useful if two event input ports are used at the same time in order to differentiate between the two event records The technical specification for the Event Input port are as follows Pulse type TTL positive or negative going pulse Pulse Length Minimum 125 nsecs Voltage TTL level 5V min 3 3V Pin definition Center signal case ground SR530 Connector type Huber amp Suhner Lemo Typ Il FFA 00 250 CTAC327 9 The CONFIG Key The ASCII message takes the following format PLEIR EIX ssssssss tttttttt nnnn cccc dddd hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Format Content PLEIR Header EIX Message identifier event input 1 or 2 sssssssss GPS time of week of event in msec tttttttt GPS time of week of event Sub msec in nsec nnnn GPS week number Cccc Event count dddd Event pulse count hh Check sum lt CR gt Carriage return lt LF gt Line feed This is the count of all pulses including those violating the specified time guard boundary conditions This allows determination of missed events 9 The CONFIG Key Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The Status of all Receiver functi
188. e used to identify particular data within the incoming ASCII string See Working Example 2 for an example Data prefix To more easily identify the annotations registered with a point it is possible to couple them with the above given description The description will then be stored together with the ASCII string Reply As a reaction of the sensor to an incoming ASCII string an NMEA message may be sent back to the external device In case of a camera for example this may allow you to have the position being integrated into the photograph afterwards Press CONT F1 to return to the CONFIGURE ASCII Input panel Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Working Example 1 You need to complete a survey ona small lake and wish to record the depth of the lake that is measured by a 3 party depth sounder at certain locations This depth sounder constantly streams data ata rate of 1Hz and sends the depth it has measured in the following format 27 234 lt CR gt 27 345 lt CR gt 27 232 lt CR gt The ASCII Input interface needs to be configured such that when a position is measured the depth measurement will be stored as annotation 1 with that point To do this in the CONFIGURE ASCII Input panel press ANNOT F3 and configure Annotation 1 to accept the incoming ASCII data as shown below Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en COMFIGURE ASCII Input ANMOLatLior Uzer defined Description Message Id n Data pref
189. ealtime position ambiguities not fixed 3 not existing 4 Realtime position ambiguities fixed Number of satellites in use 00 12 HDOP Antenna altitude above below mean sea level Note if no orthometric height is available the local ell height will be exported If the local ell height is not available either the WGS84 ell height will be exported Units of altitude meters fixed text M Geoidal separation Units of geoidal separation meters fixed text M Age of differential GPS data null when DGPS not used Differential Reference Station ID 0000 1023 Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Appendix E GGK Real Time Position with DOP Format SGPGGK hhmmss ss mmddyy 1111 11 a YYYYY YY a X XX X X EHT X X xhh lt CR gt lt LF gt Appendix E Content Header incl Talker ID message sent from Receiver GGK Sentence Formatter UTC of Position Fix UTC date Latitude Hemisphere N S Longitude B W GPS Quality Indicator 0 fix not available or invalid 1 No Realtime position navigation fix 2 Realtime position ambiguities not fixed 3 Realtime position ambiguities fixed Number of Satellites in Use Common satellites between ref and rover Values between 00 to 12 may be different from the number in view GDOP Ellipsoidal height Antenna altitude above below mean sea level Note if no orthometric height is available th
190. eceiver has been pre pro grammed and the TR500 is being used further guidance is available in Chapter 7 If the Receiver requires programming with the TR500 further guidance is available in Chapter 5 Zs When using the upper pole halves with stub ensure that the Antenna and GAD31 screw stub adapter slide down the full length of the stub before tightening the locking ring An incorrectly mounted Antenna will have a direct effect on your results 2 Set up and Connection 2 12 Equipment Setup Real Time Rover GIS Rover Use The TR500 is held in the hand with the hand pouch Connections are made from the Receiver to the GPS or if being used the combined GPS DGPS antenna Recom mended for long periods of use for mainly GIS type data collection surveys The setup described in the following pages assumes an RTB or RTS module is being used see also Appendix K for further information on GIS applications You may also use the Real Time GIS Rover setup with a standard radio device but note the following differences 1 With a standard radio device being used you will need a separate radio antenna attach the GAT1 GAT2 Radio Antenna to the pole using the GAD33 Antenna Arm see the RT Rover All on Pole chapter for further illustration 2 The RTB RTS module cable will not be needed then Connect the Radio antenna to the Radio modem housing using the GEV141 1 2m Antenna Cable see the RT Rover Pole and Minipack chapte
191. ecified number will increment at each point Crsr stands for Cursor and denotes the character number at which the cursor will be automatically placed The arrow means that this tem plate is set to operate in the Remain Running mode No Template Used if this option is selected an automatically incremented Point Id of the last entered Point Id will be displayed in the Survey panel If you overtype this Point Id the auto increment will start from the new Point Id Time and Date will automatically use the current local time and date as the Point Id To define your own Id Template press NEW F2 COMFIGURE OCCUPY PLe PLId Mode Remain RUA Id n Hum Sharh 11 Hum Er n 16 Auto Tri n TEZY Hum ING n 1 Cursor Pos 16F CONT Pt Id Mode Is the Mode how the Pt Template will be used If you select Remain Running and you enter a Point Id manually in the Survey panel the new Point Id will be used as the new Id Template and the following Point Id s will be based on this new Template If you select Change to Indiv and then enter a Point Id manually in the Survey panel the Point Id will return to the Id Template as it is defined Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Id Displays the way in which the template is currently configured You may also enter any standard text here that you would like to see in the Id Template In this example the standard text is the word Point The symbols
192. ed from the reference station 2 Increased latency Computed positions would have an increased latency In all RTK surveys where the refer ence station is not an SR530 and the RTK message is not Leica format it is up to the user to decide if the performance of the rover is better with prediction activated or deacti vated Press CONT F1 to continue 5 Configuring the Receiver Logging If required you may log the raw observations This may be used if there are problems with the real time data reception at the Rover anda Real Time position could not be calculated or if you wish to be able to check your work back in the office Observations must be logged at the Reference also Another alternative for post process ing infill is to use the Radio Down option This is available in Advanced mode in CONFIGURE Real Time See section 5 4 1 Log Static Obs Obs Rate Log Hovinga Obs Static rit TEZY 20T Hor Loy Auto Positions Hovinga Art Height Hor Z000 M a a ee Log Static Obs Switches logging on or off when the Receiver is in Static mode The receiver has to be station ary This is used when occupying distinct points in a kinematic chain Obs Rate The rate at which obser vations will be logged when the receiver is stationary or when it is moving For Static intializations or occupying distinct points in a kine matic chain the rate should be set at between 0 1 2 seconds
193. ed position is normally used in preference to the Single Point Position SPP if there is no previ ously measured point available and the baseline between Reference and Rover is 5km or less In situations where the baseline is greater than 10km it is probably better to use SPP Using Single Point Position SPP A SPP is where the GPS code observations for a single point are collected over a period of time and refined into a position that is generally more accurate than a navigated position To activate the Single Point position ing press SPP F6 ee P P o ition SURWEY Point Id Time 122411251452350 EE i The suggested Point Id is automati cally created based on the Time and Date Point Id Template It may if required be overwritten The Time and Date Point Id Template follows the following format Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en RRRRMMDD_HHMMSSS Where RRRR last four numbers of Receiver serial number MM month DD Day HH Hour MM Minutes SSS seconds to 1 decimal place Input the length of time over which the single point should be processed The longer the time the more accurate the single point A good compromise is 20 minutes Press OCUPY F1 to begin the single point occupation Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en SURWEY Point Id Time at Pt Single Ph Position iFfFd1125_145 35 Fis Ad STOP PL The occupation will run for the len
194. ed to the battery it is ready to receive and broadcast data Start surveying or a staking out with the rover Further guidance is available in Chapter 7 4 and 7 5 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 14 Using the Minipack The Minipack has several features 1 Antenna Pole Strap 2 Hip Belt which may not be readily apparent at Ensures the Antenna Pole does not The Hip Belt transfers most of the first These features help to make sway around and remains as upright weight from the shoulders to the hips using System 500 more comfortable as possible when properly adjusted It also contains velcro attachments through which cables can be passed Pass the strap around the pole and fasten using the clip as shown in the photograph Use the attachments as shown in the photograph Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 Set up and Connection 3 Internal Net Pouch The Backpack has an internal net pouch designed for carrying an AT501 or AT502 Antenna when not in use It can also be used for storing coiled cables or carrying a nonstand ard radio modem 4 Using the Minipack in high temperatures In high temperatures it is desirable to increase air flow around the Receiver Therefore the backpack can be kept half or even fully open when in use Open the Minipack halfway Tuck the flap inside Secure it with the velcro pad Open the Minipack flap fully and fold the flap under the Receiver during use in extreme
195. edure Use NEWOC F5 to occupy the point you are currently at before the hidden point is measured A Point from which Distance A is measured B Point from which Distance B is measured C Distance A D Distance B AB Line AB L Left of Line AB R Right of Line AB Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Double Distance height included If the height computation for a hidden point has been enabled within the configuration the following options apply in addition to those on the previous page SURWEV Point A Distance A Delta Hat Point E z Distance E Delta Hat m Locat ion Right of Line AB ABORT CT HELPE Hidden PR Dist eDist Ai AE ii Delta H gt Height difference between the center of the external device and the aimed point Devices with inclinometer like the Laser Locator will transfer the measured height difference automatically into this field as long as Include Hot in the panel CONFIGURE Hidden Point is set to YES Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en When working with devices without inclinometer the height difference can be estimated and typed in manuallly Use the I T H F4 key to check or enter the instrument height at the standpoints A and B and target oe 25T m Trist Ht at Point a Trat Height Inst Ht at Point a 1 395 M Trat Height A ISr M ONT EFL The default values as defined in the configuration are displayed but can be edited Use the DEFLT F5 key to
196. eference Manual 4 0 0en TRANHSFER ASCII GSI o Job Type ASCII File From File Lokal txt Ta Job HiG2 Hat Tyre OrtAao Aah OMT ASC IT Select the file Type of the source file GSI File or ASCII File The file must be located in the GSI directory for GSI files and in the DATA directory for ASCII files Select the file From which you want to convert and the Job To which the points shall be added Hgt Type Visible in Advanced mode only Allows the point to be imported as either height type Ortho or Ellipsoidal Ortho is the default option If Ellipsoidal has been selected then this setting is remembered until the sensor is turned off Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en When ASCII File is selected the ASCII F4 key becomes available Use this to define the format of the ASCII file Height Pos A J Id E Hs Fiz a7 3 22 CONT I EE T Example Delimiter Sets the character used to separate the various point compo nents Choose from Comma Line Feed new line Semicolon and Space blank ID Pos Sets the position of the Point Id East Pos Sets the position of the easting North Pos Sets the position of the northing Height Pos Sets the position of the height Use the DEFLT F5 key to reset the format to its original values Define the delimiter used to separate the information for each point and then define the position of each component of each point An
197. eiver MCF XMB 3 PCMCIA flash card 2 Set up and Connection Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en How to set up the equipment 1 Screw the two halves of the pole 10 Switch on the system using the Zs When using the upper pole together ON OFF button on the TR500 halves with stub ensure that 2 Slide the grip onto the pole the Antenna and GAD31 screw stub Attach the TR500 holder to the The Next Steps adapter slide down the full length of grip and tighten the screw the stub before tightening the locking 3 Slide the holder piece for the If the Receiver has been pre pro ring An incorrectly mounted Antenna GPS Receiver onto the pole grammed and the TR500 is being will have a direct effect on your Attach the GPS Receiver holder Used further guidance is availablein results and tighten the screw Chapter 7 4 Screw the GPS Antenna onto If the Receiver requires programming the top of the pole with the TR500 further guidance is 5 Slide the TR500 into the holder available in Chapter 5 until it clicks into place 6 Screw the GPS Receiver to the GPS Receiver holder 7 Insert the PC Card into the Receiver and plug in the GEB121 batteries 8 Connect the GPS Antenna to the Receiver using the antenna cable supplied with the GPS receiver holder piece 9 Connect the TR500 to the port labelled Terminal on the Receiver using the 5 pin Lemo cable Technical Reference M
198. elists on the PC Card or Internal Memory must then be transferred to the Receiver using the Transfer function The Codelist is then selected for use in Configuration CLOMFIGURE Coding Coding Type Codelist n Codelist 1 OMT CODES A YEA Coding Type Choose Thematical Codelist Select the codelist from the list or to define a new codelist press ENTER Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en CONF TGORE ee ir OMT MEM DEL LA The Codelists on the Receiver are displayed To create a new empty Codelist press NEW F2 COHMFIGURE Codelist Hame Creator OMT J o Enter the Name of the new Codelist and if required the name of the Creator Press CONT F1 8 Coding 8 1 2 Defining New Codes and Attributes Layers Codes and Attributes can be added to a Codelist When a Thematical Codelist has been se lected the CODES F3 and LAYER F5 keys will be available CONF I GIRE Codina Coding Tupe Codelist Codelist 1 OMT CODES LAYER a To create new Codes and Attributes press CODES F3 ae Code Code Hame if OMT HEM UATRIB IMFO Lohi 8 Coding The list of existing codes is given Press NEW F2 to create a new code GURE Hew Abbr ibuite Def aut 141 Tree GURE Hew Code Code Hame CONT Select the Layer on which the code will exist To add a new Layer press ENTER and NEW F2 Refer to the
199. ement Procedure Measuring procedure without starting time Switch on the instrument Select Survey Select a Real Time Rover Configuration Set in which auto occupy has not been set to Timed in the Occupation Settings During this time the unit should acquire satellites and should pick up the signal from the Reference When enough of the same satellites are tracked simultaneously at the Rover and Reference and the signal from the Reference is received the Receiver will automatically start the ambiguity resolution process 7 Measuring with System 500 Note that if code only measurements are being used the ambiguity resolution process is not required and therefore will not start The ambiguity resolution process will run When the ambiguities are resolved the baseline from the Reference to the Rover is calculated to between 1 5cm The Accuracy Status Icon will be displayed as follows an Additionally the Coordinate Quality Should show between 0 01 and 0 05 SURWEY Point Id Def sult Ant Height Z000 m SD0 uality A Ad M OCURE ADD INIT To record a point place and level the pole Input information such as Point Id and Code if required If working in Advanced mode use the ADD F5 key to add point annotations Press the OCUPY F1 key Then according to what has been set in Occupation Settings press STOP F1 and STORE F1 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Measuri
200. enans 317 13 14 Almanac 00 ccc cccececeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeveneueeneenes 318 13 15 Account File 0 cece ccc eseseeeeseneeseveeeevanes 318 13 16 CFC Log Mask File cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 318 13 17 Beacon Station List an 319 13 18 Modem GSM Station List 00 0 eeeeeeees 319 13 19 OV SION eicemiascousenticedaanidade maaedegeetewente a 319 13 20 Any File Type tase sctarcccurceericsseseieanesvdosinaunaniaads 320 Appendix A Operating and Storage Temperatures ccsccesceesseesensesesenseeeseeeeeaes 321 Appendix B Observation Times 322 Appendix C Seismic Record Format 323 Appendix D Defined Line File Format 324 Contents Contents continued Appendix E NMEA Message Formats 325 GGA Global Positioning System Fix Data 327 GGK Real Time Position with DOP 006 328 GGK PT Real Time Position with DOP 328 GGQ Real Time Position with CQ n se 329 GLL Geodetic Position Latitude Longitude 329 GNS GNSS Fix Data ccecccecceceseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 330 GSA GPS DOP and Active Satellites 608 330 GSV GPS Satellites in View cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 331 LLK Leica Local Position and GDOP 331 LLQ Leica Local Position and Quality 00 332 VTG Course Over Ground and Ground Speed 332 ZDA Time and Date c
201. ence Manual 4 0 0en 215 7 Measuring with System 500 Polar The Polar Method gives you a Bearing from the orientation reference a horizontal distance and a cut fill to the point TAKE OLT Orierit Def sult Mor thr Dist 30 63 m Direct fh1i 7i 2 Cut A B m Duality A es m BB ir OCUPY ORTHO REWR ST REDRM PC KUP IMIT lt C F 9 O Orientation Direction Orient B Bearing Direct to Target P Current Position D Horizontal Distance Dist to Target T Target Point 7 Measuring with System 500 C F Vertical Distance Cut Fill 7 5 6 Using the Reverse function The reverse function is available in Advanced mode and switches the orientation by 180 It is used when the Target lies behind you and you would effectively have to walk backwards to reach it Press REVRS F3 The orientation is turned through 180 You can also now turn through 180 yourself so that you are facing the direction in which you need to walk Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 5 7 Using the Redraw function The redraw function is used when Show Path has been chosen in the configuration and the path that you have followed is shown on the graphi cal area of the display When moving around in the same area this graphical area may not refresh The path may build up obscuring the display Press REDRW F4 to refresh the display and erase the displayed path Technic
202. enerated If the time accuracy exceed this value no PPS output is generated Change Limit Error to YES and enter a value in nanoseconds The following technical details provide pulse characteristics and cable connectivity The time pulse has a 3 3V peak High on a 50 ohm resistance The pulse length is 25 usec with the leading edge coinciding with the beginning of each epoch The cable should be matched with an appropriate resistance of 50 ohm The connector Type is Huber amp Suhner FFA 0S CTAC32Z 9 The CONFIG Key 9 17 Interfaces Event Input The Event Input interface enables you to configure the Event Input ports and parameters This function is available only if the necessary hardware exists The Event Input port allows direct connection to an external device e g aerial camera When this device operates e g the shutter opens the time that the event occurred will be recorded in the GPS measurements These records can later be superimposed on the pro cessed kinematic data and the positions where the events took place can be interpolated in SKI Pro In adition to the time stamps the user can also log positions velocity and quality Events logged during real time operations can also be exported to an ASCIl file using an appropriate Format File and the Sensor Transfer functionality Refer to Chapter 13 for further details Select Event Input and press EDIT F3 CONFIGURE Event Input
203. ent You wish to view the Stop and Go Indicator on the Main Survey screen but do not want to automatically stop the survey However should you wish to use them you will find you may also configure Id Templates for Auxiliary Points in exactly the same way as for COMFIGURE OccupSstiok Settings normal points OCCURS Mode Hor mil es HOT Auto OCCUPY AukO Shop Hor STOP FP PRC STOP amp GOLTNdicator Y Hor AULLO Shores EMD Surweus MShua1 OMT PPP Settings Other Settings Use P PRC F5 to set the Baseline Length Field Procedure After pressing OCUPY the time or epoch counter will start The Stop and Go Indicator percentage value will be shown in brackets next to this It will run until STOP is pressed The observations will not stop being recorded at 100 automatically Further information regarding the STOP amp GO indicator is available in STATUS SURVEY STOP amp GO Indicator 5 Configuring the Receiver Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 5 2 Configuring the Receiver for Post Processed Kinematic Operations This section covers configuration of Operation Mode can then be accessed individually the receiver for Post Processed Select the Operation Mode that you with CONT F1 Changes are Kinematic operations require The Operation Mode defines automatically stored at the end of the which Configuration screens will be list Changes in individual parameter available to you panels can be stored with STORE
204. eoid Model The name of the geoid model used is displayed CSCS Model The name of the CSCS model used is displayed Note that the details that are displayed depend upon the type of transformation used Certain types of transformation do not use all of the described parameters to calculate local coordinates Pressing Shift followed by FILT F4 will access the panel CONFIGURE Filter Height Smoothing Enables you to activate or deactivate the height smoothing filter With YES smoothing is applied to all heights measured in the WGS8 4 or in a local coordinate system or output via NMEA The filter defaults are best suited for high dynamic variations in height up to 1 m s as carried out by graders Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Height Smoothing and Filter techniques with kinematic GPS Due to the nature of GPS the height is the weakest part in GPS measure ments Height information can only be received from satellites above the antenna Signals from the satellites of the other half of the orbits are blocked off by the earth Therefore the GPS heights are less stabilised than the positions where information all around the horizon is available Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en In kinematic surveys this fact results in height variations of a few centime ters as shown in the blue curve Some GPS monitoring applications however require a stabilised height By applying the filter the height variat
205. equired you may log the raw rate should be set the same as the Time 1 interface observations This may be used if Position Update Rate at the Rover there are problems with the data This will normally be between 0 1 2s Use SHIFT R T 1 F2 to accept the reception at the Rover and a Real configuration settings and return to Time position could not be calculated Press CONT F1 to continue to the Real Time 1 The observation data can be post next screen processed when back in the office to Use CONT F1 to return to the fill in any gaps in the Real Time Further options are available on this i CONFIGURE Interface panel positions Of course observations screen in Advanced mode See must be logged at the Rover also section 5 3 1 for details The Port Device configured for both real time interfaces is now visible Press CONT F1 to complete the Log Static Obs YESY configuration Obs Rate 1 8 COMFIGURE Loaairnd o Interit aces Fort Denice Real Time 1 1 tiatelline z Real Time z eE Ae a e f HHEA uteput 9 ASCII Input 2 Hidden Point a ee ee ir OMT EDIT CTRL LIM Log Static Obs Switches logging on or off when the Receiver is in Static mode Obs Rate The rate at which obser vations will be logged Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 123 5 Configuring the Receiver 5 3 1 Advanced Operation Mode for Real Time Reference Stations The A
206. er C INF F4 lets you assign new information blocks to the selected code Press CONT F1 to select a code from the list Type in the attribute or add a new attribute with NEW I F4 To add an attribute value to an existing choicelist of an attribute highlight the line of the according attribute and press ENTER 8 Coding Le ee Free Free Code Description oldf ashionec br andrew 1 Dese ir a AT ee ee Type in the new attribute value then press ADD F2 STORE F1 records the code and returns to the Main Survey screen 8 Coding Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The CONFIG key can be used at any time to make temporary alterations to any parameter in the Configuration Set There are some configurable para meters that can only be accessed through the CONFIG key and are not contained in the sequential Configuration Nevertheless they are part of the Configuration Set The other parameters that are available through the Sequential Configuration are described in Chapter 5 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Press CONFIG CONF I GURE Ate ON CAF 1 Survey 2 OFer atior 3 Gener al 4 nterf aces CONT STORE COHFG You can configure any parameter for the current Configuration Set You may make changes to any configurable option contained in items 1 4 After making the change you will press CONT F1 You will return to whichever screen you were in previo
207. er a Geoid Field File From the PC Card To the Sensor then a Geoid model will be automatically created Geoid File Select the Geoid Field File Press ALL F3 to select all the Geoid Field Files 13 Transfer 13 9 CSCS Field File 13 10 Firmware Enables you to transfer CSCS Field Files between Sensors and PC Cards Enables you to transfer Receiver firmware from the PC Card to the Sensor rs Fair miWware PC Card Seh SoOr To n Sensor To CSCS File T Jersin OMT Pre TT CONT Version Select the firmware version that you wish to transfer Select From where you wish to transfer the CSCS Field File The device To which the CSCS Field File will be transferred will be automatically selected Note that for PC Card capacity reasons the firmware is available in separate sections as well as one file If you transfer a CSCS Field File From the PC Card To the Sensor then a CSCS model will be automatically created This enables different sections to be uploaded via the PC Card if the complete file will not fit on the PC Card CSCS File Select the CSCS Field File Press ALL F3 to select all the CSCS Field Files Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 13 11 Firmware TR500 Enables you to transfer Terminal firmware from the PC Card through the Sensor to the Terminal Firmware TRSbe From PC Card D Sensor Version a CONT Version Select the firmware version that you wish to tran
208. eseees 245 7 5 7 Using the Redraw function ccceeceseseseeerees 217 9 0 General Stan OD seregei 245 7 5 8 Picking up a new point sssnnnnoeeennnseserrrnneeerrreee 217 9 7 General TR500 ccceccececeeeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeees 246 7 5 9 Using the INIT Key ccceccecseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 217 9 8 General Identification c cccccececececeneeeeeess 247 7 5 10 Using the NEAR key eee 218 9 9 Interfaces ooo ceecccceceecceesseeseeeseesseeeeeeeseesnneeess 247 3 rier Seopa ET ATETA E E EE TEST oa 9 10 Interfaces Real Time fja 247 5 UU PU er 7 5 13 Point Stake Out Procedure ceeeeeeees 220 Bee ee SO eas iaaierearaceenetues ao 9 12 Interfaces ASCII Input cc eeeeceeeeeeeees 249 7 5 14 Slope Stake Out Procedure ccceeeee 222 l 7515 Grid Stake Out Procede f 296 9 13 Interfaces Hidden Point 253 9 14 Interfaces GSI User Out ccccceeeeeeeeeeee ee 253 8 COGMAG rania 232 9 15 Interfaces Remote ceccececcersecescessesersesesserees 254 8 1 Thematical Coding cccccseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeesaeeees 232 9 16 Interfaces PPS Out c cc ceeccesseeeeeeeeeeeeenees 255 8 1 1 Importing Selecting and Defining a 9 17 Interfaces Event Input 00 cccceeeeceeeeeeeees 256 Thematical Codelist ccccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 233 8 1 2 Defining New Codes and Attributes 234 10 Status RCCL ECE OCCU
209. essed and Point i i i Coordinates Coordinates Further options are available on this interpolated based interpolated based screen in Advanced mode See on Epochs 2 and 34 on Epochs 4 and 5 section 5 2 1 for details Time in Epochs t t Da E 7 O OCUPY Button i Pressed and Point Plan View Coordinates OCUPY Button interpolated based Pressed and Point on Epochs 4 and 5 Coordinates interpolated based on Epochs 2 and 3 Overview of Normal and Instantaneous settings Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 105 5 Configuring the Receiver Id Templates An Id template is used to pre define a Point Id This feature is mainly used in post processed kinematic and real time kinematic operations where many points are collected quickly When set up correctly it will save you having to type in the Point Id at each point OCCUPY PLS Auto Log Poses HHHHHH HHHHHHY 0 Fit Auto Pos CONT o o E OCUPY Pts Displays the Id template selected for use with manually recorded points Auto Log Pos Displays the Id template selected for use with automatically recorded points 5 Configuring the Receiver Select the template that you wish to use Press ENTER to reveal the list of available templates COMFIGURE Id Templates Point Template Inc Crer Time and Date Port HEHEHE 1 ir CONT HE EDIT DEL In this panel two default templates are displayed and also a template that a user has
210. ethods for defining the Configuration You can select Configure from the Main Menu or press the CONFIG key 5 Configuring the Receiver Selecting Configure from the Main Menu enables a sequential configuration Parameters can either be defined one after each other or explicitly selected from a list These parameters are saved permanently in the Configuration Set and will be used as defaults each time the Configuration Set is used Pressing the CONFIG key enters a menu from which you can choose the parameter you wish to define Certain infrequently used parameters are only available through the CONFIG key and are not contained in the sequential configuration It is recommended that the CONFIG key is only used when you are already measuring and realize that you need to change a parameter temporarily for the duration of the current survey or need to configure a parameter not contained in the sequential configuration 5 Configuring the Receiver Configuring the Receiver When Configure is selected from the Main Menu there are two configuration levels available Standard and Advanced Standard is recommended for most users Advanced enables definition of parameters required for specialized applications To start defining a Configuration Set attach the Terminal to the Receiver directly or connect it using a Lemo cable Switch on the Receiver and Terminal by pressing the ON OFF key Technical Reference Manual 4 0
211. etween the two ways in which a line may be defined The two choices are Start Endpoint and Start Dst Bg Startpoint Distance Bearing Depending on your selection different menu items become available Start Endpoint means that a Start Point and an End Point have to be given to define the line Select two points from the list or enter NEW points Start Dst Bg means that a Start Point as well as an Azimuth and a Length have to be given to define the line Select a start point from the list or enter a NEW point Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Height Def Allows the definition of how the heights of the points that will be created are computed The two choices are Slope and Use Start Pnt Ht Use Start Pnt Ht means all created points are given the same height as the start point in the chosen line lf Type Start Endpoint has been selected Slope means that all created points are given a height that is interpolated between the heights of the start and the end point for the chosen line lf Type Start Dst Bg has been selected Slope means that the height of the interpolated points is determined by the entered Zenith angle of the line Method Allows a choice between By Segments and By Interval and defines how the chosen line is segmented By Segments means that the number of segments by which the line will be divided can be entered lf By Segments is chosen the next line in the panel reads
212. evice This is usually due to satellite shading Satellite shading can be caused by the close proximity of tall buildings trees etc Tnelude Hat Pos ltu Hat Gilby OMT Include Hgt Will compute a height for a hidden point and include a quality component for height difference Pos Qlty The position quality defined here has to come from your own knowledge or experience with the device you are using System 500 will not check any recorded measurements against the position and height qualities It will however be used in any least squares adjustment that may be carried out later Hgt Qty The height quality defined here has to come from your own knowledge or experience with the device you are using System 500 will not check any recorded measurements against the position and height qualities It will however be used in any least squares adjustment that may be carried out later Press IFACE F5 and then select YES for Use Device to choose the port and device to be used Use Device Por t z 2 0i t got Dist Of fsets Da m Hat Offset Inst amp Trat Hatt Inst Height A DAA m Trat Height sa DAA mM CONT ERO a DENCE Port Use the right or left cursor keys to select the port to where the device will be connected This will normally be port 2 5 Configuring the Receiver Pressing DEVCE F5 allows the device to be chosen System 500 supports several devices such as Leica Disto me
213. ey were recorded and the coordinate quality and class Should a point fall outside of these threshold settings this panel will be accessed automatically Common reasons for this happening are an incorrect antenna height or a wrong point Id The use flag for this point is then set to N for no You may either Press ESC to return to the survey screen check and correct the antenna height or point Id then rerecord the interval Your previous incorrect interval will be deleted or Highlight an interval that is incorrect and press DEL F4 to delete the interval Then press CONT F1 to return to the survey screen or With INFO F5 toggle between different information for each interval or Highlight an interval and press USE F2 to include or exclude a measurement from calculating the absolute coordinate difference An absolute coordinate difference can only be calculated between two measurements After having set the use flag for two measurements to Y press DIFF F3 to display the absolute coordinate differences 7 Measuring with System 500 MANAGE Abs Diffs 1000 Easting 4 881 M Mor third a AFAR fM Height E 1 999 m Cartesian x 1 334 mM Cartesian Y A225 mt Cartesian zZ 1 472 mi CONT a a The absolute differences for Easting Northing and Height can only be displayed if the survey is carried out in a local coordinate system An asterisk identifies those which exceed the threshold settings
214. f STORE n Enter the data and press STORE F1 The data will be stored with a time tag During long observation periods you may need to store several sets of meteorological data as a the weather changes 7 Measuring with System 500 7 3 Real Time Reference Stations This chapter assumes that you will use the default Real Time Reference File Set up the equipment as described in Chapter 2 Attach the Terminal but only attach the radio modem if you are sure that the port is correctly configured Attaching a radio modem to an incorrectly configured port may result in damage to the radio modem Switch on The Main Menu will be displayed The system will automati cally start searching for satellites Select Survey and press CONT F1 Contig Sethe FT_REF JOE z Def aul Coord Sys UTM se Antenna ATSeS Tripod ea ee 7 Measuring with System 500 Config Set Defines the Configura tion Set to be used The last Configu ration Set used or created will be taken by default although any other Configuration Set may be selected Job Defines the Job to be used This is the Job where any point and observation data will be stored Coord Sys Displays the coordinate system that will be used for the display of coordinates This coordi nate system is attached to the se lected Job Press CSYS F6 to change the Coordinate System Information on determining the coordinate system is given in section 11 1
215. f NMEA messages certain symbols are used as identifier for the field types They are Special Format Fields A yyyyy yy ECCEEC CEEC naANNnANA ANN Appendix E Status Latitude Longitude Grid Easting Grid Northing Single character field A Yes Data Valid Warning Flag Clear V No Data Invalid Warning Flag Set Fixed Variable length field degreesminutes decimal 2 fixed digits of degrees 2 fixed digits of minutes and a variable number of digits for decimal fraction of minutes Leading zeros are always included for degrees and minutes to maintain fixed length Fixed Variable length field degeesminutes decimal 3 fixed digits of degrees 2 fixed digits of minutes and a variable number of digits for decimal fraction of minutes Leading zeros are always included for degrees and minutes to maintain fixed length Fixed length field At the most 6 fixed digits for meters and 3 fixed digits for decimal fractions of meters Fixed length field At the most 6 fixed digits for meters and 3 fixed digits for decimal fractions of meters hhmmss ss mmddyy Time Date Defined Field Fixed Variable length field hoursminutesseconds decimal 2 fixed digits of hours 2 fixed digits of minutes 2 fixed digits of seconds and a variable number of digits for decimal fraction of seconds Leading zeros are always included for hours minutes and seconds to maintain fixed length Fixed length field
216. fers with each setup Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Meas Type Also enter the means by which the Antenna height was measured For the majority of GPS Antennas including all Leica antennas this will be Vertical The height of some non Leica GPS antennas can only be measured by taking the slope distance to the outer edge of the Antenna If this is the case select Slope and enter the value You will then be required to enter a Horizontal Offset also See Section 2 15 3 for more details on measuring slope height Note that the settings from the currently highlighted antenna setup are taken over as suggested default values To select an antenna setup highlight Ant Name and press ENTER to open the drop down box All of the existing antenna configurations are listed COHF IGOUFRE Antenna ir CONT HEM JEDIT DEFLT OHM Most Real Time Reference Stations a are setup on a tripod or pillar You may select from this list or enter your own Antenna configuration by pressing the NEW F2 key Note that the settings from the currently highlighted antenna setup are taken over as suggested default values When a factory default tripod setup is chosen the Vertical Offset is automatically set at 0 36m You will need to measure the Antenna Height with the height hook when setting up 5 Configuring the Receiver Setting up on a pillar will require that you use the default pillar setup Advice on calculating
217. fferent Point Id if required Add a code if required Coding is explained in Chapter 8 Use the ADD F5 key to adda Hidden Point and or Point Annotations When you have the pole level press STOP F1 The DIFF F2 key is available Pressing this key reveals the differences between the design grid point and the as staked grid point If you have chosen to record a LONG log file these values will also be stored in the log file Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Press STORE F1 to store the point Orierit Hor thr O Line i Out 1f 535 m B Left 61 59 m Cut A Ae mi GDOP 4 4 4 ir CUP Y POLAR REWRS REDRM PCEUPLIMIT The next target is automatically selected according to the increment value The value given in the Directory Bar also shows this Carry on staking and recording points in this way until you reach the end of the row You can then choose the way in which you wish to proceed to the next row 1 Increase the offset and start the next row in either direction from the last recorded grid point 7 Measuring with System 500 2 Increase the offset and start the next row in either direction adjacent to the first grid point 7 Measuring with System 500 To use option 1 highlight the Line and press ENTER Press PARAM F5 to enter the Grid parameters STAKE OUT Grid Station Eeg 16 888 m Hotz ff et 4 888 m Werk OF FSebe HABE m Station INC 2 000 M
218. fic external devices approved by Leica Geosystems Both GPS raw data and external sensor data can be directly output to an external remote control software package Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en With a radio modem attached the receiver can be used to transmit data for RTK operations using proprietary as well as standard RTCM CMR and CMR formats The RS500 cannot receive Reference Station broadcasts and therefore cannot be used as a Real Time rover receiver The receiver and measurement performance is the same as with the SR530 The RS500 tracks the L1 C A code and L2 P code to reconstruct the carrier phase When Anti Spoof ing A S is activated the receiver switches to a patented P code aided tracking technique that provides full L2 carrier measurements and L2 pseudoranges Appendix J RS500 Standard Features The RS500 includes the following standard features which are not available in the SR5xx sensor types One PPS Output port Two Event Input ports Ring Buffer logging Support for external sensors Meteo Tilt Data Storage The RS500 supports all standard Leica Geosystems PCMCIA card types The internal memory option may be installed as well This enables data to be stored internally for post processing Appendix J Outside World Interface OWI External control of the RS500 via remote interface is achieved through use of the Outside World Interface OWI command language The AS
219. figuring the Radio COMFIGURE Aber ow ONF 1 Surveu 2 OFeOr atior 3 Gener al 4 nterf aces CONT STORED CONE From CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight the interface e g Real Time you want to use with the Radio and press EDIT F3 A Time Iata Data Format Poor t Ref Sensor Ref Antenna Rover Leica WAK nown WAK nown Use PRASE Hor Radio Down Don t Log Obs OMT PECL Press DEVCE F5 to access the device list Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Certain localised versions of the above radios may require extra configuration before use with System 500 In this case highlight the radio model used and press NEW F2 Enter a name e g Satelline Italy and enter the applicable device param eters To configure a third party radio highlight Unknown Radio and press NEW F2 Enter a name e g Radio XY and enter the applicable device parameters CONFIGURE Hew Pork Settings Hame Radio xy Baud Rate lata Parity Hone Data Bits cr Stor Bits i Flow Contrl Hone Te ee The port settings are the parameters used for the communication between the Sensor and the radio If required edit them to suit the radio settings or change the radio settings Radio Modems and Channel Switching Channel switching is supported with Satelline 2ASx 2ASxE 3AS 3ASd and Pacific Crest RFM96 modems It offers you the ability to set the chan nel on the radio modem This changes the
220. formation the middle gives satellite tracking information and the lower gives memory status O Power Satellite Tracking Z Memory Status L 3 Using System 500 without a Terminal Power LED off No Power Power LED green Power OK Power LED Flashing Green Power Low 3 4 2 Satellite Status LED Satellite Status LED off No Satellites tracked Satellite Status LED flashing green first satellite tracked position not yet available Satellite Status LED Green Enough satellites tracked to com pute position Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 3 4 3 Memory Status LED Memory Status LED off Memory Device not available PC Card not inserted or Internal Memory not fitted Memory Status LED Green Memory capacity OK on selected device Memory Status LED flashing green Memory capacity 75 full on selected device Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Memory Status LED red Memory full on selected device 3 5 Field Record Sheet Field Record Static Rapid Static Survey point Operator Name Start time Local Stop Time Local Point ID Antenna Height Receiver Serial No Date 3 Using System 500 without a Terminal The TR500 Terminal performs three main functions 1 Pro
221. frequency at which the radio operates by a small amount This can be used in the following situations Case 1 Two Real Time Reference stations are set up at two locations each broadcasting on two different chan nels This gives the Rover two advan tages 1 Ifthe signal from one reference station is blocked you can switch channels and try the other one 2 You can obtain two separate fixes for each point providing redun dancy for future least squares adjust ment operations Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Case 2 One Real Time Reference and one Real Time Rover are being used If the signal is blocked due to radio interference you can switch the channel at the Reference and Rover to try a slightly different frequency Note that when using channel switch ing the Ref Stn Id at the Reference should be set to a different Id for each reference site The number of channels available and the frequency spacing between channels will depend on the radio modem used Channel switching on Pacific Crest Radio Modems must be activated by a Pacific Crest dealer and may require a special license Satelline Radio Modems must be in Programming mode This can be set by a Satelline dealer Channel switch ing may contravene radio broadcast ing regulations in certain countries Make yourself aware of the regula tions in force in the area in which you are operating Appendix H Channel switching is available via C
222. ge and Offset height excluded If the height computation for a hidden point has been enabled within the configuration the follow ing options apply in addition to those on the previous page SURWEY Point A Delta Hat Point Hidden Pt Ching amp orr _ When working with devices without inclinometer the height difference can be estimated and typed in manuallly Use the I T H F4 key to check or enter the instrument height at the standpoints A and B and target heights m E37 M Trist Ht at Poirit a Trat Height CONT F1 to return to the previous panel and continue with the calcula tion of the hidden point For further information on the Hidden Point application and configuration refer to Appendix H as well as chap ter 5 4 1 Delta Hgt CAngae from Chainage AHAA m OF Set AHAA m ALG T H HEHE Inst Ht at Point n 1 395 M Ii Point Ar Trat Height A ISTF Mm ONT a EL T The default values as defined in the configuration are displayed but can be edited Use the DEFLT F5 key to reveal the default values again Delta Hgt Height difference between the center of the external device and the aimed point De vices with inclinometer like the Laser Locator will transfer the measured height difference auto matically into this field as long as Include Hot in the panel CONFIG URE Hidden Point is set to YES Trgt Height will only be available if the settings have been done accord ingly i
223. ght you may use it to initialize This method is used when it is proving difficult to initialize on the fly On The Fly Initializes as you are moving with the Antenna This is the most common and useful method and is used automatically by default It may be used again here after a successful initialization on the fly as a quality check Select the method you wish to use and press CONT F1 When Static and On the Fly have been chosen the initialization procedure will begin immediately When Known Point has been chosen you will be prompted to select the point you wish to use to initialize on This point must be contained in the Job you are working in 7 Measuring with System 500 7 4 9 Using the ADD key When the Advanced Mode is selected the ADD F5 key is available SURWEY Def sult Point Id n Ant Height GDOF be CUP a This key can be used to add Point Annotations Meteorological Data and Hidden Points Press ADD F5 SURWEY Add Hernu 1 Point Annotations Z Meterecnlogical Data 2 Hidden Poirnt ss CONT a a 7 Measuring with System 500 Adding Point Annotations Point Annotations may be used as an electronic notepad where events notes etc may be written They are then taken with the Point Id information into SKI Pro To add Point Annotations select Point Annotations from the list and press CONT F1 Vs Point annotations n Chased bu Dos Hr Tree
224. gram the GPS Receiver 2 Enable input of information to the GPS Receiver 3 Display information from the GPS Receiver i The Terminal must be connected to the GPS Receiver to function It can be connected using a cable or mounted directly onto the receiver Once connected the Terminal and Receiver can be switched on using the ON OFF key on the Terminal A GHT28 handstrap beltclip is available which fits on the rear of the Terminal This improves handling of the Terminal in applications where it is held con stantly in the hand E g GIS applications 4 TR500 Terminal Overview 4 TR500 Terminal Overview TR500 Terminal Overview r n a 7 5 6 ner esc SHIFT ce Oo Q 20000000 000000000 e0000008 TR500 Terminal attached to GPS Receiver with cable Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 4 1 Screen Layout When activated for the first time the Terminal runs through several boot up screens and then the Main Menu appears The basic layout consists of a row of status icons over a main display area with a row of six softkeys F1 F6 at the bottom The Status Icons provide information related to basic Receiver functions The Directory Bar gives your location within the menu structure The Main Display Area shows infor mation regarding the receiver and or ongoing survey operation The Softkeys F1 F6 indicate which command may be executed by pressing the relevant key Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en
225. gt Line Feed 1 Example GSA a X XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX X X X X X X hh lt CR gt lt LF gt 330 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en GSV GPS Satellites in View Format Content SGPGSV Header incl Talker ID message sent from Receiver X Total number of messages 1 to 3 X Message number 1 to 3 XX Total number of satellites in view XX Satellite PRN number XX Elevation degrees 90 maximum XXX Azimuth degrees True 000 to 359 XX SNR C No 00 99 dB null when not tracking REENER 2nd 3rd SV xx XX 4th SV XXX XX l hh Checksum lt CR gt Carriage Return lt LF gt Line Feed Note Satellite information may require the transmission of multiple messages The first field specifies the total number of messages minimum value 1 The second field identifies the order of this message message number minimum value 1 A variable number of PRN Elevation Azimuth SNR sets are allowed up to a maximum of four sets per message Null fields are not required for unused sets when less than four sets are transmitted LLK Leica Local Position and GDOP Format SGPLLK hhmmss ss mmddyy eeecee cee M nnnnnn nnn M X XX X X X X xhh lt CR gt lt LF gt Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 3i o Content Header incl Talker ID message sent from Receiver UTC time of position UTC date Grid Easting meters Meter fixed text M
226. gth of time specified After this time the point will be automatically recorded and the Main Survey screen will be shown Alternatively if you wish to cut the single point processing short press STOP F1 As soon as the Main Survey screen is shown observation data will be broadcast Up to this point only Point ld and battery status etc will be broadcast Single Point Processing is generally used in preference to the navigation position as a means of defining reference station coordinates when 179 either there is no previously measured point available and the baseline distance from the reference to the rover exceeds 10km The HERE and SPP methods are only suitable for use at the start of a project On subsequent days reference station coordinates should be the results of the previous days work When the reference point has been defined and the Main Survey panel is shown there is little more to be done Data will be transmitted and if so configured will also be recorded lf working in Advanced mode you may use the ADD F5 key to add Point Annotations or Meteorological data To shut the Receiver down press STOP F1 and then switch OFF The store function is executed automatically 7 Measuring with System 500 7 3 2 Using the ADD key When the Advanced Mode is se lected the ADD F5 key is available ee ee Le lt Point Id z Refi Ant Height 1 24354 M Time at PL M216 GOOF z Tad S
227. h more than one associated measured point will still be shown as average here CTRL Point user entered or held fixed with no accuracy matrix Use NEW F2 to enter a new point Enter the new point Id and the coordinates Use the COORD F2 key to switch between Coordinate Systems MANAGE Hew Point Point Id z Local E eS ee M Local H roe sos n ddA m Ortho Hgt co 30A M STORE COOP T n ELL H Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en If the panel shows local grid coordinates you may use the ELL H ORTHO F5 key to switch between entering orthometric or local ellipsoidal heights When you have entered the point details press STORE F1 to store the point and return to the previous screen Use EDIT F3 to view the coordinates and point annotations of a selected point or to edit the point ID Unless set otherwise the coordinate displayed is that which corresponds to the highest coordinate class available Use the COORD F2 key to switch between Coordinate Systems Use the INFO F5 key in the same way as in the MANAGE screen to switch the information displayed about the point Additionally when a Configuration Set is being used where Advanced mode is set the averaging functionality in Threshold Settings is set to Avg and the point contains more than one measurement the AVRG F6 key is available TEEI U5 SA 24 03 0 00S 0 04 Y idiii 24 05 8 6604 8 002 Y ir CONT USE EL TAr O Press U
228. h with ABORT F1 7 Measuring with System 500 Once the nearest point has been found its point ID is automatically copied into the field of the Target Point HEAR TAKE OLIT i z HOF thr OF ient POITHT amp z apia Dt Ay ri Pr i ee Left A DAS M Cut A 8is m SO Gli a 62 m Bb OCUP POLAR REWAS REDRAW PCEUP INI n Stake out the point as usual 7 5 11 Graph A map of the 30 last measured points can be displayed by pressing SHIFT and then GRAPH F3 Each point is given a temporary ID between 1 and 30 Sta oy tp Bp l ii M 1541 is ir zoghH zogi ID FILT SCHLE SCALE F2 displays a linear scale consistent with the current zoom level The map is displayed Use ZOOM F3 and ZOOM F4 to zoom in and out ID F5 reveals a list with the tempo rary point IDs and the real point IDs Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 5 12 Aux Pt FILT F6 allows to change the filter settings for the currently selected Job More information about filter settings can be found in section 11 3 Press SHIFT to reveal REDRW F4 This redraws the map to the original scale You may also scroll the map left right up down by using the cursor keys Auxiliary points are used as aids when trying to find a stake out point Two auxiliary points are recorded to form start and end points of a line The chainage and offset or distance from each auxiliary point to the
229. he baseline the location of the offset point in relation to the baseline and the bearing from the offset point to the baseline Press CONT F1 to return to the COGO Offsets menu Input P1 Start point of line E N h P2 End point of line E N h P3 Offset point E N h Output d Distance o Offset Perpendicular Distance 11 Applications Set Point by Distance Offset This function enables you to calculate a point by using the distance chainage and offset values from a line The line is defined by two points Point Id 1 AY Point Id EY Distance 46 2550 Pere Dist 15 230 M Enter the first and the second point of the line or press NEWOC F5 to measure new points Enter the Distance along the line and the Perpendicular Distance Offset Enter a negative Distance if the point lies behind the start point of the line P1 P2 Enter a negative Perp Dist Offset if the point lies on the left hand side of the line P1 P2 11 Applications Instead of entering the values manually you may calculate them from two existing points by pressing INV F2 Press COMP F1 to start the compu tation COGO Offset Results Point Ig Local E THARAT ADS M Local H Z30015 r4 m Ortho Hgt Z50000 M STORE COOP e TA KE Easting Northing and Height of the offset point are displayed Enter a Point Id change the Height if neccessary and press STORE F1 will bring you bac
230. he geoid model used is displayed CSCS Model The name of the CSCS model used is displayed Note that the details that are displayed depend upon the type of transformation used Certain types of transformation do not use all of the described parameters to calculate local coordinates Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Logging In addition to the functionality given in Standard mode you can also specify the observables to be recorded and access further functionality via the FILES F6 key not on the GS50 GS50 Loy Static Obs Obs Rate Loy Hovinga Obs Static Init ObSer Vab les n Loy Auto Positions Hovinga Ant Height 7 888 M Ce I LEE Observables Defines what is recorded in the raw GPS data Extended records extra observables including the Doppler observable Full details of what is recorded in each mode is given in Appendix D Pressing the FILES F6 key enables you to configure further options Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Log File teamernts Auto Del Low Files Hever t OMT a T Log File Segments will split up the recorded data into files of a specific length unless 1 File is selected If a time is selected the option Split Tracks will become available Select No will only record data into a new file if the time is reached and a new track is observed Auto Del Log Files will delete the recorded data after the specified length of time unless Never is se lected Press CONT
231. he Configuration Set System 500 supports two coding methods Thematical Coding and Free Coding The principles of both methods of coding are explained in Chapter 8 a Thematical Coding SURVEY Def sult Point Id Point 1 Point Code 141 Code Hame n Control Ant Height ME EEE ri GOOF z B 6 Ls The fields Point Code and Code Name will be displayed as above Highlight the Point Code and either 7 Measuring with System 500 1 Use the left or right cursor keys to cycle through the code list or 2 Press ENTER and select the code from the list or 3 Type in the first few characters of the code until the desired code is displayed The Code Name will be displayed for the Point Code that you have chosen Enter any attributes for the code using the ATRIB F4 key The code is stored then along with the Point Id information Auto logged points may also be coded if a coding system has been defined The procedure will be the same as with Occupy Points described above For further information on how to use codes with Auto logged Points refer to chapter 7 4 7 Using the AUTO key Free Coding Point Id Last Code A zLa ast Code oa Ant Height ARE M GDOF did F CUP CODE The Last Code and second last code 2Last Code that were used are shown The CODE F4 key will be available Press this key to access the codelist es a Free Coding Free Code 168 Descripti
232. he close proximity of buildings etc This feature is used by Real Time Rovers only There are two possibilities for inputting hidden point data You may attach a Hidden Point device such as Leica Disto memo Disto pro Disto prot or Disto pro a Or you may measure to the hidden point using a tape When using a Hidden Point device remember to set the correct Port parameters For details refer to Appendix H Having selected Hidden Point from the ADD menu you have 5 choices SURVEY Hidden Point 1 Fearing and Distance Double Besring 3 Double Distance 4d Chainage and Offset gt Backward Bearing amp Distance CONT 7 Measuring with System 500 Bearing and Distance height excluded SURVEY Point A Fearing Distance ABORT EHE Point A GPS point on which bearing o is measured Bearing Bearing Angle to the Hidden Point in units configured Distance Horizontal distance from Point A to the Hidden Point in units configured Use ABORT F1 to abort the procedure When Point A is highlighted use NEWOC F5 to occupy that point before you start measuring the hidden point When Bearing is highlighted the BRNG F6 key is available This 7 Measuring with System 500 function may be used if you do not know or have no device for determining the bearing Select a point that lies on the line AH see diagram Occupy the point and press BRNG F6 SURVEY OOCUPUY Ansi liartuy P
233. he local ellipsoid is displayed Projection The name of the projection used is displayed Geoid Model The name of the geoid model used is displayed CSCS Model The name of the CSCS model used is displayed Note that the details that are displayed depend upon the type of transformation used Certain types of transformation do not use all of the described parameters to calculate local coordinates 5 Configuring the Receiver Logging In addition to the functionality given in Standard mode you can also specify the observables to be recorded and access further functionality via the FILES F6 key Lod Static obs YES Obs Rate 15 8 5 Loy Hovinga Obs Hor ObSer Vab les n Hor mal Loy Auto Positions Now OMT FULL Observables Defines what is recorded in the raw GPS data Extended records extra observables including the Doppler observable Pressing the FILES F6 key enables you to configure further options 5 Configuring the Receiver Lowa File Segments Auto Del Low Files Hever CONT a a Log File Segments Will split up the recorded data into files of a specific time based length unless 1 File is selected If a time is selected the option Split Tracks will become available Select No will only record data into a new file if the time is reached and a new track is observed Auto Del Log Files Will delete the recorded data after the specified length of time unless Never is se lec
234. he modem Dial This is the dialing string used to dial the phone number A placeholder shall be used to insert the phone number as defined in Modem Con nection Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Hangup This is the hangup se quence used to end the network connection Escape This is the escape se quence used to switch to the com mand mode before using the hangup sequence The characters below may be used to define the AT commands AM Inserts a carriage return and send command Inserts the phone number as defined in GSM Connection AS Bearer Service Speed Proto col and NetDataRate C Bearer Service Connection Element Inserts a delay of 1 4 second a Insert character Please refer to the instruction manual of your modem for information about which AT commands to use Using the Modem The way a modem is used is very similar to a GSM phone Please refere to the section GSM on how to use a modem Appendix H RTB Module CSI The RTB Real Time Beacon Module receives DGPS corrections from U S Coast Guard or other differential correction beacons It is used for Real Time applications in the meter or submeter accuracy range The module consists of a combined GPS Beacon antenna and a radio module that is available in a detachable housing Appendix H Configuration CONF IGURE Inter f aces ae Port Denice 1 HMEA OU Put ASCII Input Hidden Point ir
235. held stationary Moving The GPS Antenna may move The Position Mode is governed by the type of operation defined in the Configuration 4 TR500 Terminal Overview No Visible Satellites The number of theoretically visible satellites according to the current almanac are displayed i When the Track Mode is set to MaxTrak this will be indicated with a little T being added to the icon No Satellites used on L1 L2 When an Accuracy Status icon is displayed the number of satellites currently used for the position compu tation are shown Satellites that are tracked but with a poor signal quality are not shown When no Accuracy Status icon is displayed the number of tracked satellites are shown irrespective of the signal quality Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Radio Status a Radio Transmitting blinks iil Radio Receiving blinks If two radio modems are being used simultaneaously the icon will alter nate between each modem Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en GSM Status The GSM phone is connected to the network If this icon blinks the GSM phone is either trying to connect to or discon nect from the network Memory Status Internal Memory selected PC Card selected Safe to remove PC Card Memory level Indicator Has 12 levels between Memory Empty and Memory Full 4 TR500 Terminal Overview Observation Recording Status mas The Receiver is recording raw GPS obse
236. her Configuration Set may be selected Job Defines the Job to be used This is the Job where any point and observation data will be stored Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Coord Sys Displays the coordinate system that will be used for the display of coordinates For this type of work a local coordinate system should be used although this is not strictly essential Press CSYS F6 to change the Coordinate System Information on determining the coordinate system is given in section 11 1 Antenna Defines the Antenna setup to be used The Setup defined in the Configuration Set will be taken by default although any other setup may be selected For Real Time Rover work this will normally be AT501 502 Pole Press CONT F1 when you have made your selection 7 Measuring with System 500 7 4 1 Overview of Procedure As soon as data is received from the Reference and the Rover itself is tracking sufficient satellites the ambiguity resolution process will begin This processes the data and calculates the baseline from Refer ence to Rover to within 1 5 cm When the ambiguities are resolved the Accuracy Status Icon will show the position to be between 1 and 5cm Additionally the Coordinate Quality Quality in the Main Survey screen should show between 0 01 and 0 05 To record a point place and level the pole Input the Point Id and Code if required If configured you will also be able to enter a
237. hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Content Header incl Talker ID message sent from Receiver Course over ground degrees 0 0 to 359 9 True fixed text T Course over ground degrees 0 0 to 359 9 Magnetic fixed text M Speed over ground Knots fixed text N Speed over ground Km h fixed text K Mode Indicator A Autonomous mode D Differential mode N Data not valid Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Note The Magnetic declination is set in the Receiver using the CONFIG key Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en ZDA Time and Date Format SGPZDA hhmmss ss XX XX XXXX XX XX hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Content Header incl Talker ID message sent from Receiver UTC time UTC Day 01 to 31 UTC Month 01 to 12 UTC Year 1997 to Local zone description hours 13 to 13 Local zone description minutes 00 to 59 Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed Note This message is given high priority and is output as soon as it is created Latency is therefore reduced to a minimum Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Appendix E Appendix F Pin Assignments and Sockets Port 1 Function RTS CTS GND Rx TX Vmod Bat 12V 5 Appendix F Port2 PWR Pin O AOUON Function Bat 12V2 GND Rx Tx Function RTS CTS GND Rx Tx Vmod Bat 12V2 ITT A A mn RD LEICA SIRE vm EY 6
238. his arrow to find the point to be staked out Use Beep Will make the system beep whenever you are within the distance of the chosen target point set in Dist from Pt Diff Check Possible options to check the difference between the design coordinates and the staked coordinates are by Height only Position only Pos Hgt or not to check the difference at all None 5 Configuring the Receiver This functionality will make the system automatically display the differences if the defined Limit is exceeded Use DTM Appears when the DTM Stakeout option has been purchased and enables you to use a Digital Terrain Model as the height datum and will show cut and fill values relative to the DIM DTMs are stored on the PC card or sensor internal memory When ASCII File is selected in Stake from the ASCII F4 key becomes available Use this to define the format of the ASCII file CONF IGURE Delimiter Id Pos z Fast POS 2 Pt ASCII File Format Comms Horth Pos TF Height Poss 1 Example Ids E Ashis22 223 OMT EFL Delimiter Sets the character used to separate the various point compo nents Choose from Comma Line Feed new line Semicolon and Space blank ID Pos Sets the position of the Point Id Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en East Pos Sets the position of the easting North Pos Sets the position of the northing Height Pos Sets the position of the height
239. hmmss ss 1111 11 a YYYYY YY a c c XX X X X X XXXX hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Appendix E Content Header message sent from Receiver XX GP GPS only XX GL GLONASS only XX GN Combined GPS GLONASS UTC time of position Latitude Hemisphere N S Longitude E W Mode Indicator N No Fix A Autonomous GPS Nav Fix D Differential DGPS Fix P Precise Nav no deliberate degradation such as SA R Real Time Kinematic RTK Fix F Float RTK Number of satellites in use 00 99 HDOP of all satellites used in computation Antenna altitude above below mean sea level meters Note if no orthometric height is available the local ell height will be exported If the local ell height is not available either the WGS84 ell height will be exported Geoidal separation meters Age of Differential GPS Data null when GPS not used Differential reference station ID 0000 1023 Checksum Carriage Return Line Feed GSA GPS DOP and Active Satellites Format Content SGPGSA Header incl Talker ID message sent from Receiver a Mode M Manual forced to operate in 2D or 3D mode A Automatic allowed to automatically switch 2D 3D X Mode 1 Fix not available 2 2D 3 3D XX PRN numbers of satellites used in solution this format is repeated 12 times and null for unused fields X X PDOP X X HDOP X X VDOP hh Checksum lt CR gt Carriage Return lt LF
240. hnical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Appendix H RS232 Port 1 2 and 3 of the Sensor are standard RS232 interfaces If you are using an external device that is not directly supported you may use the default RS232 configuration By default a standard RS232 device is available in the list RS232 Standard parameters with 9600 baud rate To create a new standard RS232 device highlight RS232 and select NEW F2 ee tPacific Crest POL KP SaCiF ic Crest RFMI6H ees 7 I m de oe lle ir OMT HEM JEDIT DEFLT Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Enter a name and change the para meters according to the specification of your external device Hem Pork ettinys Baud Rate lalla Parity n Hone Data Eits 5 mh Stop Eits iF Flow Contrl Hone a a Press CONT F1 to store the device Appendix H Radio and Repeaters Radio devices are normally used to transmit or receive Real Time data Additionally a Radio device may also be used to steer and communicate with the Sensor e g to download raw data from a remote location etc The following radio devices are supported with System 500 Satelline 1AS 2AS Satelline 2ASx Satelline 2ASxE Satelline 3AS 3ASd Pacific Crest RFM96W Pacific Crest PDL AT RXM500 Akasaka Tech Dataradio T 96S Australia only Teledesign TS4000 USA only The Teledesign TS4000 requires a specific housing to be purchased from Leica USA Appendix H Con
241. hnical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Integration assistance and OWI documentation is available on request from Leica Powering the MC500 The MC500 requires 12VDC power to be supplied externally as there is no option to connect standard Camcorder batteries Turning the MC500 On Off Due to the ruggedised housing of the MC500 there is no on off switch on the front of the sensor The MC500 can be powered on or off by the TR500 Terminal or by a remote control command OWI Like the Sr5xx sensors the MC500 will automatically power itself up and return to the previous operating mode after any temporary power failure Cabling Connections Options Cable connections are identical to other System 500 receivers Refer to MC500 Equipment list Dozer 2000 Installation and Maintenance Guide for cabling options Please see Front Panel Diagram for cable connection information Appendix Port 1 Function RTS CTS GND Rx TX Vmod Bat 12V Appendix Port2 PWR Pin akOwN Function Bat 12V GND Rx TX Port 3 Pin Function RTS CTS GND Rx TX Vmod Bat 12V CONOOBRWN Terminal Pin J 2 3 4 5 Function KDU_ON KDU_PWR GND Rx TX PWR Pin Function 1 Bat 2 12V 3 GND A ze 5 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Operating and Storage Tempera tures The range of the operating and storage temperatures of the MC500 is greater than that of the SR5xx
242. ht The instrument height is considered If the delta height be uA 7 Aa tween the center of the external Hgtrrgt ii A device and the aimed point is mea X sured or estimated the result is the Inst height difference between the rover Height tins point on the ground and the aimed point Enter the instrument height into the corresponding new line Inst Height amp Trgt Height Instru ment as well as target height to be Hotira gt Inst Height Delta Hgt Trgt Height considered If the delta height be a tween the center of the external device and the aimed point is mea Appendix H Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en If you are using a device that mea sures azimuths press EAO F3 to enter an external angle offset Select the Method Permanent and enter a value or select New for each Point and the program will prompt for a value during each Hidden Point measurement Press CONT F1 to confirm In order to connect a device to the receiver use only the cable delivered with the device Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Appendix H Introduction The MC500 is an OEM GPS receiver that can be integrated into complete positioning systems The MC500 receiver has a rugged housing that meets high shock and vibration environmental specifica tions This makes the receiver ideal for use in high vibration and other difficult environments such as Machine Control Details of these specifications can b
243. i Sharh Time 15 59 Be GOOF z a Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Initially the time displayed in Start Time is the current time with the seconds rounded to zero Enter the time in Start Time in hours minutes seconds 7 1 6 Measuring procedure Measuring procedure without starting time Press the OCUPY F1 key to begin recording observations The icon changes to a tripod indicating that the Receiver should remain stationary SURVEY Defa lt Point Id z Ant Height 1 24354 M Static Obs a GOOF z Bc if STOP PT Static Obs Time The method by which you have selected to count time will be shown In Advanced mode you may select to display the amount of data required according to one of four criteria If this has been set a percentage value will be shown next to the expired Epochs Time 7 Measuring with System 500 This percentage value is the amount of data recorded with 100 being the amount required If Auto Stop was selected the recording of observations will automatically stop when 100 is reached The ADD F5 key is available Further information is available in the next section Further information about the Stop and Go indicator satellites tracked data logged etc can be accessed through the STATUS key More information about this key is given in Chapter 10 When the required length of time has passed press the STOP F1 key to stop raw observation recording If
244. ical coding For this reason the panel cannot be exited with CONT F1 if no codelist is available You can define a new codelist or load a configuration file from the PC Card This change applies from chapter 5 1 to 5 4 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Configuration Stake Out The Stake Out Configuration is available under the name Navigation The STORE gt Job configuration option when staking from an ASCII file stake points is not available This applies to chapter 5 4 Configuration Point Template User Mask The configuration of the Cursor Pos is not used in the GIS Data Collection program although it can be configured on the GS50 GS50 This change applies to chapters 5 2 and 5 4 The use of the Point Template mask differs for the GIS Data Collection program and the Survey program For this reason the working examples given in chapters 5 2 and 5 4 do not apply to GS50 GS50 Time and Date templates can be configured with EDIT F3 to use either the Code or the Sensor ID as the prefix for the Point ID Appendix K If a user defined point template mask is used on GS50 GS50 for example Point with an increment value 1 the Point Id is shown in the first line of the attribution panel Assume the last measured point was Point 202 then the next proposed id is Point 203 The Point Id cannot be overwritten manually Nevertheless the enumeration value 203 is changea
245. ign a particular screen to each of the keys F7 F10 so that when one of these keys is pressed that screen is displayed ir m The Receiver can hold up to two languages Use the DEL F4 key to delete any languages that are not required 9 The CONFIG Key Kes COMFIGURE Position F Eey CONFIGURE Id Templat FQ Eey APPLICATION Point Mat Fifi key COMFIGURE Hot keus OMT a a Select the key you wish to configure and press ENTER A list of all available screens is displayed Select the screen and press ENTER Note that you can also configure the function keys F1 F6 to the hot keys or select NEXT Dialog Call to switch between all previously opened screens Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 9 5 General Time and Initial Position It is important that the local time date and initial position are approximately correct in order for the Receiver to quickly locate and track satellites 2 amp Inmitial Pos 1 soe tm a r Time Zone z ha Local Date 16 12 96 Local E Sdd7d4 503 M Local H S2d7268 588 m Local EHat 511 627 m OMT JCOORD PHL Check that the Local Time is ap proximately correct This will be updated every time GPS satellites are tracked Check also the Time Zone for your current location and Local Date Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Then check your local position If you have a local Coordinate System defined this will be available in grid coordinate
246. ilable This function may be used if you do not know or have no means of calculating the bearing Select a point that lies on the line AH see diagram Occupy the point and press BRNG F6 SLRUE Y Point Id J An 1 Towar g Dcue AUziliard Point Direction Ant Height SD Quality 8 82 m I TIT Input a Point Id and the Direction Toward or Away from the hidden point Then press OCUPY F1 and STOP F1 STORE F1 according to the Occupation Settings The Bear ing will be calculated using this point and the point you are measuring from A Point from which Bearing A is measured B Point from which Bearing B is measured C Auxiliary Point optional D Auxiliary Point optional H Hidden Point a Measured Bearing from A B Measured Bearing from B Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Double Bearing height included without inclinometer the height CONT F1 to return to the previous difference can be estimated and panel and continue with the If the height computation for a typed in manuallly calculation of the hidden point hidden point has been enabled within the configuration the Use the I T H F4 key to check or For further information on the Hidden following options apply in addition to enter the instrument height at the Point application and configuration those on the previous page standpoints A and B and target refer to Appendix H as well as heights chapter 5 4 1 SURVEY Hidden Pt Bra amp kBr
247. ing buffer Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en COMFIGURE Bind Buffer Rina Buffer Woe SLAbLus Ach ie Obs Rate n H iF Data Interval 16 mins Flay Obs z Z aticY Denice PC Card OMT STorP Note that it is not possible to activate more than one Ring Buffer at a time To log data to another ring buffer with a different configuration requires the currently active ring buffer to be stopped before starting the new one Once data has been logged to a ring buffer and logging has been stopped then the data in this ring buffer can be deleted by pressing DEL F4 Pressing START F3 restarts logging It is not possible to change the configuration parameters of a ring buffer once data has been recorded to the buffer Only after deleting the recorded data stored in that buffer can the configuration parameters be edited A ring buffer does consist of several files sharing the same file name with incrementing file extension The number of files a ring buffer consists of depends on the data interval specified and is automatically determined For example a one hour interval will consist of 6 files each of 10 minutes length and a seventh file which is currently logged data to when the ring buffer is active The ring buffer consists only of MDB Measurement DataBase files No additional job GeoDB files will be created Appendix J The ring buffer data will be stored on the chosen memory device in the follo
248. ing this data internally The above external devices can be connected to Ports 1 2 or 3 of the RS500 Specific interface cables are available from your Leica Geosystems representative which provide power to the external sensors from the RS500 thus creating a much neater Reference System installation Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Configuring Meteo Devices Press the CONFIG button and then choose 4 Interfaces and then 6 Meteo TEZY 1 RieaeF 1 8 Use Device Por t Data Rate Loy to Files Hor Hokifu Moa Hone iri CONT PEC E Use Device Set to YES to activate using a Meteo device and access the configuration options Port defines the port to where the Meteo device will be connected Data Rate Defines the rate at which data will be requested from the Meteo device Select between 0 1 to 3600 seconds Note the maximum rate possible also depends on the type of Meteo device attached Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en If the rate is set higher than the device is able to deliver data it may happen that no complete data sets can be received at all or the data will not have changed from the previous measurement Please refer to the documentation related to the attached device Log to File Select YES to activate direct logging of the Meteo data toa file Data will be logged always into the same file job where the GPS raw data is being logged to No data will be logged unless r
249. ing the GSM Phone CLOMFIGURE Interfaces Port Device E Hidden Point Heten ir ONT JEDIT TL From CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight the interface e g Real Time you want to use with a GSM phone and press EDIT F3 Press DEVCE F5 to access the device list ee LL Ports thavecom Weons ir CONT HEM JEDIT DEFLT Select a standard GSM phone from the list To select the Bosch 908 909 the Sagem MC850 or the Siemens S25 S35i highlight GSM and press EDIT F3 Press OPT F4 Under Type select the equivalent GSM To define any other GSM device highlight GSM and press NEW F2 Enter a name e g GSM XY and enter the applicable device param eters GURE Hew Port Settings x Geha Baud Rate 13268F Parity n Honet Data Bits 3r Shop Eits i Flow Conteris ARTZ CTE CONT ET The port settings are the parameters used for the communication between the Sensor and the GSM phone If required edit them to suit the GSM phone Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Press the OPT F4 key to access the GSM options The GSM options enable you to define the AT com mands used for communiction between the sensor and the GSM phone JSer AT amp FESH 1512 35 h ATHAM ATHCEST 5 B ACAH ATD gt M OMT a ELT Under Type select User and modify the remaining parameters Alterna tively select a standard GSM phone type from the list and press SET U F5 to turn these parameter
250. io Down Don t Loa Obs ir OMT EMCE RTE Set R Time Data to Rover and set the Data Format to either RTCM 1 2 or RTCM 20 21 Press DEVCE F5 to access the device list Select SMARTgate and press CONT F1 357 Press CONT F1 to return to the CONFIGURE Interfaces panel 1 Real Time 1 2MARTaate HMEA OU PUt ASCII Input Hidden Point OMT EDIT CTRL LLM Press CTRL F5 to access the CONFIGURE SMART gate panel Profile z Profile Hos a Ref Selects Profilet CONT Profile Select one of the User Profiles stored in the SMART gate box Profile No Displays the number of the selected profile Appendix H Ref Select Choose the criterion by which the Reference Station shall be selected Choose Profile to select the refer ence station according to the given profile Choose Frequency to select the reference station according toa frequency different to the given profile The Frequency has to be manually specified Choose Phone No to select the reference station according toa phone number different to the given profile The Phone No has to be manually specified Choose Station No to select the reference station according toa station number different to the given profile The Station No has to be manually specified Appendix H Viewing the Status of SMARTgate To access the SMART gate status press STATUS Interfaces highlight the SMART gate device and press DEVCE F5
251. ional Parallel Offset and the Horizontal Distance for the end point Press COMP F1 followed by STORE F1 to return to the COGO Menu Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Input P1 Start point of line E N h a Bearings Azimuths d Horizontal Distances Output P2 First traverse point E N h P3 Second traverse point E N P4 Third traverse point E N h h Side Side point E N h Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 11 Applications Intersection Bearing Bearing This function enables you to calculate the intersection point of two lines The lines may be defined by a point anda bearing azimuth 4 Intersect iot Point Id i a Besar iid S50 20A Ae PFarall 05 A Ae Point Id amp EF Bear ing 323021705 Enter the start point of the first line or press NEWOC F5 to measure a new point Enter the Bearing Azimuth and the optional Parallel Offset Enter the start point of the second line together with the Bearing and Parallel Offset Instead of entering these values manually you may calculate them from two existing points by pressing INV F2 11 Applications Press COMP F1 to start the compu tation Zt Local E THARS2 LSS M Local H S3HH1S 691 mM Ortho Hgt z580 000 M STORE COOP e TA KE Easting Northing and Height of the intersection point are displayed Enter a Point Id change the Height if neccessary and press STORE F1
252. ions are smoothed and most of the noise in height component is eliminated In the diagram below smoothed heights are shown in red Smoothed versus ursmoothed height component height m _ uremoothed smoothed time Sec 5 Configuring the Receiver Real Time Time Data Rover ata Formats Leica Or eo FESLELLInNEG ZAY zef Sensor SASS F zef Antenna ATSeS Tripod Js6e Phase n 430 gi Down Don t Log Obs POMT TEE Use Phase Enables you to define whether or not to use the phase data broadcast from the reference station For normal centimeter level Real Time surveying this will be set to YES When MaxTrak is selected Use Phase will automatically be set to NO and the ability to edit the Use Phase option is disabled For further information on MaxTrak refer to chapter 9 1 Survey Satellite Radio Down Enables you to log raw GPS data in the event that radio contact is lost to the reference station 5 Configuring the Receiver The observation rate is fixed at 1 second When Radio Down is set to Log Obs two further options appear Log After Defines the length of time that should elapse without radio contact before logging commences For minimum Defines the length of time that GPS raw data will be logged for after an interruption is detected Even if radio contact is re established raw data logging will continue for the specified time If radio contact is lost again
253. ions first and then changing USE ANNOT to NO With setting USE ANNOT to YES again the last annotations are remembered Point Annotations are remembered until the system is turned off Point annotations can be viewed in Point Management See chapter 11 3 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The logging of Auto Positions may also be configured from inside the AUTO POS panel See chapter 7 4 7 Using the AUTO key for more information When Distance is selected a posi tion will be recorded every time the distance from the previously recorded point matches the value set in the Log Every line You can also define the Quality Info recorded with the point in the same way as when Time is selected When Height is selected a position will be recorded every time the height difference from the previously re corded point matches the value set in the Log Every line You can also define the Quality Info recorded with the point in the same way as when Time is selected Press CONT F1 to return to the CONFIGURE Logging screen Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Press CONT F1 to continue to the next screen Occupation Settings CONF IGURE OCCUPY Modes Occupation Sett iny Hor mal AULO Shores Hor CL a ee OCUPY Mode Seis the way in which coordinates will be recorded for a point Normal means that the coordinates will be recorded using an average of the positions calculated between pressing OCUPY and STO
254. ipment Setup Real Time Rover All on Pole direct clip of TR500 on to Sensor 48 2 11 Equipment Setup Real Time Rover All on Pole TR500 and Sensor separated 51 2 12 Equipment Setup Real Time Rover GIS Rover 54 2 13 Equipment Setup Repeater Station and Repeater Box cccccccscccseceeeeceeeceeceeeeeeesaeesaeeees 58 2 14 Using the Minipack ccceeeeseeeeseeeseeeeeeeeneeees 61 2 15 Measuring Antenna Heights cc ccceeeeeneeees 63 2 15 1 Mechanical Reference Planes cccecceeees 64 2 15 2 Antenna Height component cecceeeeeee 65 2 15 3 Measuring Slope Heights ccccssseeeeesseeeees 69 3 Using System 500 without a Terminal 70 3 1 Setting up the Equipment ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 71 IL ODOORN soa eee eee ee ee en eee one 71 9 0 ONU DOWN sicinsinsnannonesinditonssorseumieviinsticasiandvensdeanious 71 3 4 LED GIG ONO 5 dairesinin 72 394 1 Power LED wanuenmcasasaosncansceecesepesccerausan TAN NANEN 72 3 4 2 Satellite Status LED ec cccceceseeeeseeteeeeeees 72 3 4 3 Memory Status LED cccccccseseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeees 73 3 5 Field Record Sheet ccccseeceeeceeeseeesseeeeeeeees 73 4 TR500 Terminal Overview 00 74 4 1 Screen Layout cece ceececsecceeeeceeeseeseeeeseeeeseeees 75 4 2 Status ICONS ccccceccsseccsecceeccersaserseenseecueeeanensees 77 4 3 KeyDoaArd
255. is entered To select the press F1 The function keys will then change as follows Press F3 to select the 6 4 TR500 Terminal Overview 3 Selecting items from list boxes At times you will have to select an item from a list box This could be a point Id Job code etc There are two types of list boxes 1 The list box appears as the whole screen 2 An item appears with an arrow next to it indicating a drop down list box When a list box appears on the whole screen a search field will appear in the directory line with a blinking cursor If you know the name of the item you are search for you may type in the first few letters The item s that match what you type will be automati cally highlighted This is case sensi tive List boxes that contain more lines than is possible to fit on the screen have a scroll bar at the side This indicates your position within the list Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en COMFIG SET F Description PP_STAT Default AT REF DeF 31 t RT_Ro Default ir CONT HEM JEDIT DEL PIMP O john Alternatively you can move down the list item by item using the cursor keys Pressing Shift will reveal HOME F2 END F3 PG UP F4 Page Up and PG DN F5 Page Down keys You may also use these keys to scroll up and down the list When a drop down list box is avail able a small arrow appears next to the selected item as with Ant Name shown below
256. ith System 500 ee es a Free Coding Free Code n Description 1 OF code Fa fae z STORE LAET NEWS I DEFLTCLERF FONDY Edge of Hater 27 CPP eo Lake Lowiste The fields Free Code and Description will be displayed as above wa Highlighting the Free Code you may either select a code from the given codelist or enter a new code The Description will be displayed for the selected Free Code Using the NEW F4 key you may enter up to 20 attributes Infos for the code Press STORE F1 to record the code 7 Measuring with System 500 To start the logging of Auto Points press the Start F6 key AUTO PoS Auto Pe Id Def sult n Time and Date Moy Ant Ate SI GUSLlItu A D M l T P r EE LETART To view or change the configuration of the Auto Position logging press the POS F5 key which accesses the CONFIGURE Position Logging panel For further information on how to configure the logging of Auto Positions see chapter 5 4 Cofiguring the Receiver for Real Time Rover Operations If you also wish to measure normal Occupy Points whilst still recording auto logged points press the SURV F3 key to move back to the main Survey panel Note that the storing of Auto Positions stops as soon as OCUPY F1 is pressed When STOP F1 is pressed to stop the measurement on the Occupy Point the system will start again with storing Auto Positions As soon as STORE F1 is pressed the AUT
257. ith WGS84 coordinates will be taken Local Pts Select the Job or ASCII file from which the points with local coordinates will be taken Use LOCAL F4 to define the source of the local coordinates from Job or ASCII Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en eo Local Point Format Local PS OMT ASCII When ASCII is selected the ASCII F4 key is available Use this key to define the format of the ASCII file When you have selected the source for the local points Press CONT F1 until you return to the COORDSYS Determination Begin screen Use the CSYS F6 key to view the list of current Coordinate Systems C1lassic 1 2Lep Classic MGS64 Geodetic ir OMT HEM JEDIT DEL IMFO Jahr Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Use NEW F2 to define a new coordinate system Note the difference between define and determine Here you can define a Coordinate System using an existing transformation When you determine a Coordinate System you also determine a new transformation using point data If you have known parameters for the Coordinate System you may enter them directly in CONFI G Survey Position Use EDIT F3 to edit the selected Coordinate System Use DEL F4 to delete the selected Coordinate System Use INFO F5 to display the date when each coordinate system was created Press CONT F1 to return to the COORDSYS Determination Begin screen 275 Press CON
258. ith a star indicate where the highest residuals lie Use INFO F5 to view the height residuals Use RESLT F3 to view the transformation calculation result the calculated transformation parameters The information given will differ with the type of transformation performed 11 Applications Classical Transformation Results SYS Par aneter s n Coord Sys 1 Bur sa Wolt 132452 2962 M 464 8975 m SHARES GS7 M Trans models Shift dx Shift diy Shift gz OMT S The Name and Trans formation Model Trans model used are displayed Then the calculated translation parameters are displayed Shift dX dY dZ Shift along X Y and Z axes Rotation X Y Z Rotations about X Y and Z axes Scale Scale factor between the two datums 1 STEP 2 STEP Transformation Results Position Shift dx Shift gY SSHBd6 1d4d6 mM TESS 9G S5ee M S 754 6498 3 STR pem Rotat ion scale Height CONT EDIT SCALE AMS The transformation is split into a 2D Helmert transformation for position and a Height Interpolation For a 1 Step transformation the center of gravity of the points on the WGS84 Datum is calculated A temporary central meridian is then constructed through this center of gravity and a Transverse Mercator projection applied continued Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en For a 2 Step transformation first the pre transformation is applied to obtain auxiliary cartesian coo
259. ix Hone Reply n Hone CONT Depth Sounder Note that because the depth sounder is streaming data the depth measurement that is stored with the point will be the last measurement received by the sensor before the point is stored the point can be stored either by pressing STORE F1 or using Auto Store functionality The co ordinates of points can now be measured over the lake and additionally the depth of the lake at that point is also recorded as an annotation 9 The CONFIG Key Working Example 2 You need to complete a survey on contaminated waste land and using a gas analyser you wish to measure the level of different gasses at various locations When a button is pressed on the gas analyser it will measure the level of 4 different gasses and outputs the results as an ASCII string This ASCII string has the following format GS1 2 786 lt CR LF gt GS2 0 034 lt CR LF gt GS3 1 395 lt CR LF gt GS4 0 025 lt CR LF gt where GS1 to GS4 is the Message ID for the 4 different gasses followed by the gas reading itself in ppm 9 The CONFIG Key You wish that when a point is sur veyed this ASCII string is split and that each individual gas reading is recorded as a separate annotation such that annotation 1 would contain the value 2 786 annotation 2 would contain the value 0 034 etc To achieve this each annotation should be configured to accept only one particular gas reading The Message I
260. k to the COGO Offset menu Alternatively press STAKE F5 to switch to the stakeout screen and use the coordinates directly for stakeout Input P1 Start point of line E N h P2 End point of line E N h d Distance Chainage o Offset Perpendicular Distance Output P3 Offset point E N h Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 3 Point Arc P3 This function enables you to calculate Local E 703681 S74 m P2 the centre point and the radius of an ea 4 Pes ae arc defined by three points STORECOORT IS TAREHORE oo Sane hn Easting Northing and Height of the o ane Ee as centre point are displayed To display the Radius press MORE F6 Aro PL 3 CY Enter a Point Id change the Height if TETEE heccessary and press STORE F1 will bring you back to the COGO Enter the three points on the arc or Arcs menu press NEWOC F5 to measure new points Alternatively press STAKE F5 to Input switch to the stakeout screen and use P1 First point on arc E N h Press COMP F1 to start the the coordinates directly for stakeout P2 Second point on arc E N h computation P3 Third point on arc E N h P Output C1 Centre point of arc E N h r Radius 11 Applications Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Distance on Arc This function enables you to calculate a point on an arc defined by three points and based on the arc distance COGO Distance of ARG Are PR i1 n
261. l Height Reading VE1 Vertical Phase Center Eccentricity for L1 VE2 Vertical Phase Center Eccentricity for L2 MRP Mechanical Reference Plane Although an AT501 502 Antenna is shown the same principles apply to the AT504 and AT303 The Vertical Height VR value is measured from the pillar benchmark to the Mechanical Reference Plane of the Antenna As there is no accessory avail able to measure the Vertical Height in this case it is usually obtained through levelling Refer to the details on the next page for help in measuring the Vertical Height The Vertical Offset is not required in this case and therefore is input as zero The Vertical Phase Center Eccentricities are stored in the Receiver for all Leica System 500 Antennas and any non Leica Antenna that you define As long as the correct antenna is chosen there is no need to enter any value into the Receiver These values do need to be calculated when a new type of Antenna that does not exist in the Antenna Setup Records is used 65 2 Set up and Connection Pillar Setup Il Carrier and Adapter dimensions All dimensions are shown in millime a ters and may be required when determining the Vertical Height Reading on a pillar or other nonstand ard setup They allow you to deter mine the height to a surface on the carrier which is probably easier than determining it to the Mechanical Reference Plane and then add the remaining value to the Mechanical Reference Plane
262. le is selected If a time is selected the option Split Tracks will become available Select No will only record data into a new file if the time is reached and a new track is observed Auto Del Log Files will delete the recorded data after the specified length of time unless Never is selected Press CONT F1 to return to CONFIGURE Logging Occupation Settings Additional functionality available in this panel over Standard mode is Auto OCUPY Auto Stop STOP R TME and END Survey CONFIGURE Occupation Settings OCCUPY Modes Mor malY Auto OCUPY TEZY AuUbO Shop HOF STOP R THE EE AU O Shores HOF EMD Sur wes Manual CD A a ee Auto OCUPY will automatically occupy the point as soon as the survey is started Timed is chosen for automatic point occupations ata certain time The time is specified in the SURVEY panel Auto Stop will automatically stop the measurements according to the setting in the STOP R TME function The measurements stop when the criteria for the setting reach 100 5 Configuring the Receiver STOP R TME Defines the method used for Auto Stop when Auto Stop is set to YES When Auto Stop is set toNO a percentage value will be displayed next to the Time or Epochs in the Main Survey screen This indicates how much of the Auto Stop criteria has elapsed The Auto Stop criteria is defined using the R TME F3 key see below The criteria available to automatically stop a real time R
263. ley Angle Grade Cae os CONT CONT F1 returns to the previous panel and displays the calculated horizontal distance and height difference For further information on the Hidden Point application and configuration refer to Appendix H as well as chapter 5 4 1 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 Measuring with System 500 7 4 10 Using the NEAR key Search for the nearest point to the current sensor position by pressing SHIFT and then NEAR F2 The current sensor position is the position at the time when the NEAR key is pressed SURWEY Road Point Ig J Ant Height Z000 m SD Quality 0 01 m HELP WEAR GRAPH THOT UIT Stop the search with ABORT F1 Once the nearest point has been found its point ID is automatically copied into the Point ID field This can be helpful when it is necessary to make a second measurement of a previously measured point It saves having to remember and then type in the point ID 7 Measuring with System 500 Survey the point as usual Point Id Ant Height Z000 m a0 uality AAZ M ir OCU IT 7 4 11 Radio Down Infill Radio Down Infill is used when contact between the Reference and Rover is lost and a Real Time position cannot be calculated This option is set in the Configuration Set When contact is lost the ambiguities will also be lost after a few seconds The Accuracy Status Icon will display a navigated position lt 100m D
264. listed To edit a station highlight it and press EDIT F3 To delete a station highlight it and press DEL F4 To enter a new station press NEW F2 Mew GSM Station Station ble Humber ae rad a Protocol ISDH W118 Use Coord T q z 4765065 295 M HG S4 Y z e2e2016 255 M HG S4 Z z 4675087 2154 M ee a eS a Enter the Station name telephone Number and the type of GSM Proto col Analog ISDN V 110 or ISDN V 120 ISDN V 110 is equivalent to the UDI Unrestricted Digital Informa tion mode found in firmware versions earlier than V4 0 Use COORD Set to YES to include a GSM station in the search for the nearest GSM reference station If YES is set coordinates can be entered and COORD F2 can be used to switch between coordinate systems Press CONT F1 to accept the settings and return to the station list and CONT F1 a second time to return to panel CONFIGURE GSM Station Change the NetDataRate Network baud rate if necessary Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Appendix H Press the CODES F3 key to input your PIN code CLOMFIGURE GSM Codes FIH Code Seo oR a PUR Code OMT TET lf for some reason the PIN code is blocked E g the wrong PIN was entered input the PUK Code to be able to access the PIN DEL F4 will delete both the existing PIN and PUK code Press CONT F1 to return to previ ous screen Appendix H Press Shift and then CMD F4 to SEND F3 an AT c
265. lthy satellites OK healthy satellites and satellites for which no data is avail able are listed 10 Status CONT IELEJA SME TTPO Displays a sky plot showing positions of the satellites and related informa tion of the highest 6 satellites On the graphic north south corre sponds the central vertical line The rings show the elevations of 15 30 and 60 from the outside to the inside The satellites are shown in their relative positions ELEOO F2 Sets the elevation mask to O for this panel only in order that you may view the satellites below the cutoff mask This key then changes to ELExx which enables you to set the elevation mask back to its original value SYMB F3 Toggles the display of the satellites in the graphic to satellite symbols INFO F5 Toggles the displayed satellite information between tracking information Signal to Noise Ratio and Quality Indicator Information Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 10 6 Point Log Status REF F6 A log of all points in the currently PPRC fit ph Post processed GPS selected job is displayed in order of phase float position ambiguities not This key is available when the Re time resolved ceiver is configured as a real time PPRC fix ph Post processed GPS rover E phase Ambiguities fixed eS OT RTME Code Real Time GPS position code only RTME fix ph Real Time GPS phase position Ambiguities fixed CONT O 0 INFO aNu
266. ly 2 Aluminium poles are used You may replace them with their Carbon Fiber equivalents without any change to these instructions 2 Set up and Connection Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Equipment Checklist 1 2 0 A OQ OONO 10 GPS Antenna AT501 or 502 GLS18 Upper half aluminium pole with screw GHT25 Grip for pole GHT26 Holder for GPS Receiver GLS17 Lower half aluminium pole GEV141 1 2m Antenna cable 2 GEB121 Batteries TR500 Terminal SR510 520 or 530 GPS Re ceiver MCF XMB 3 PCMCIA flash card Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 Set up and Connection How to set up the equipment 1 Screw the two halves of the pole together 2 Slide the grip onto the pole Attach the GPS Receiver holder and tighten the screw 3 Screw the GPS Antenna onto the top of the pole 4 Attach the TR500 to the GPS Receiver Screw the GPS Receiver to the GPS Receiver holder 5 Insert the PC Card into the Receiver and plug in the GEB121 batteries 6 Connect the GPS Antenna to the Receiver using the 1 2m antenna cable 7 Switch on the system using the ON OFF button on the TR500 2 Set up and Connection The Next Steps If the Receiver has been pre pro grammed and the TR500 is being used further guidance is available in Chapter 7 If the Receiver requires programming with the TR500 further guidance is available in Chapter 5 When using
267. ly hot temperatures He a OOO POOO RR DOO WO Xi OOOO ek XY DOO 2 Set up and Connection Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 15 Measuring Antenna Heights The height of the GPS Antenna above the point consists of several components the Height Reading the Vertical Offset and the Phase Center Eccentricities When a standard System 500 Antenna mounted on standard System 500 accessories is selected the only measure ment you will have to input is the Vertical Height shown as VR in the following section When a pole is used even this value is automatically suggested by the Receiver as 2 00m the height of the System 500 pole This means that for most operations you will only need to input the height measurement from the height hook or use the default height measurement of 2 00m for the pole However there may be cases when you need to calculate the height components such as when using non Leica accessories or Antennas or when not using a tripod or pole It is also important to realize where the Antenna Heights are measured to This Datum is referred to as the Me chanical Reference Plane This varies for different Anten nas It is also the datum from which the Phase Center Eccentricities are calculated Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Phase Center Eccentricities of Leica Antennas are handled automatically by System 500 They will have to be entered manually when using non Leica Antennas Advice o
268. mains and the cursor will be in the position defined in the current Point Id template Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en You may also enter a completely different Point Id if required Press STOP F1 STAKE OUT Occupy Point Point Id Line 1 e Ant Height Z000 m Quality Aas m T RE DIFF ADD SKIP If a codelist has been defined you may select a code Details on adding codes are given in section 7 4 4 The DIFF F2 key is available Pressing this key gives the differ ences between the startpoint of the line and the staked point STARKE OUT Occupy Differences Shake Id Point aS Store Id Point oS Diff Our of M Diff Right A ASS mM Diff Cut A rol m Total Diffs of 003 M STORE e Diff In Out Horizontal distance In Out to the startpoint Diff Left Right Horizontal distance Left Right to the startpoint Diff Cut Fill Vertical distance to the a Startpoint of line Total Diff Length of vector from startpoint to measured point If you have chosen to record a LONG log file these values will also be stored in the log file Press STORE F1 to store the point 7 Measuring with System 500 7 5 15 Grid Stake Out Procedure Grid Stake Out can be used to stake out grids relative toa defined reference line SE Defined Reference Line D Distance to Station Begin H Horizontal Offset V Vertical Offset Increment 7 Measuring wi
269. mo Disto pro Disto pro and Disto pro a All of them are hand held lasermeter that can be used to record otherwise inaccessible points You may also use a simple tape to measure to such points and input the measurements manually Press CONT F1 to return to the previous panel Dist Offset Enter a distance offset if necessary Refer to Appendix H for more information Hgt Offset Available if Include Hgt in the previous panel and Use Device in the current panel are set to YES The options are 5 Configuring the Receiver None Neither instrument nor target height is considered The result is the delta height between the center of the external device and the aimed point This delta height can be measured estimated or left as zero Inst Height The instrument height is considered If the delta height between the center of the external device and the aimed point is measured or estimated the result is the height difference between the rover point on the ground and the aimed point Enter the instrument height into the corresponding new line Inst Height amp Trgt Height Instrument as well as target height to be considered If the delta height between the center of the external device and the aimed point is measured or estimated the result is the ground height difference between rover and aimed point Enter the values in the corresponding two new lines Refer to Appendix H for a complete list of all su
270. mplate If required you may also add a code if a coding system has been configured Details on adding codes are given in section 7 4 4 When you are satisfied with the input press STOP F1 The DIFF F2 key is available Pressing this key gives the differences between the design coordinates and staked coordinates of the point STARKE OUT Occupy Differences Shake Id Point aS Store Id Point oS Diff Our r 001 M Diff Right AASS mM Diff Cut Aa rol m Total Diffs of Bes M STORET 7 Measuring with System 500 lf Diff Check has been set to either Position only Height only or Pos Hogt in the CONFIGURE Stake Out screen then the STAKE OUT Occupy Differences panel will be displayed automatically if the differences exceed the defined Limit Diff In Out Horizontal distance In Out to the Target Point Diff Left Right Horizontal distance Left Right to the Target Point Diff Cut Fill Vertical distance to the Target Point Total Diff Length of vector from Target Point to measured point If you have chosen to record a LONG log file these values will also be stored in the log file Press STORE F1 7 Measuring with System 500 7 5 14 Slope Stake Out Procedure A check will be performed according Slope Stake Out has two main to the Required Coordinate Quality applications set in the Configuration If the point is within the Required CQ it will be stored and no special
271. n Procedure 1 2 10 11 2 Set up and Connection Place and lock the GRT 146 Screw the Antenna onto the Check that the Tribrach is still Connect the GPS Receiver to The Next Steps If the Receiver has been pre pro grammed and the TR500 is not being used further guidance is available in Chapter 3 If the Receiver has been pre pro grammed and the TR500 is being used further guidance is available in Chapter 7 If the Receiver requires programming with the TR500 further guidance is available in Chapter 5 If a pillar plate is being used locate it on the pillar Screw the tribrach to the pillar plate or the pillar Level the tribrach Carrier in the Tribrach Carrier level the Antenna using the GEV120 Antenna cable Plug the GEB121 batteries into the GPS Receiver Attach the TR500 Terminal to the Receiver if required Insert the PCMCIA Flash Card into the Receiver Switch on the system using the ON OFF button The Receiver can be placed in the Transport Case for additional protection When Using the GAD31 adapter and GRT 144 carrier ensure that the Antenna and GAD31 assembly slide down the full length of the GRT144 stub An incorrectly mounted Antenna will have a direct effect on your results In wet conditions the Re ceiver can be placed in the transport case during use for extra protection Try to shut the case as completely as possible
272. n Antenna configuration by pressing the NEW F2 key Note that the settings from the currently high lighted antenna setup are taken over as suggested default values Most Static and Rapid Static Surveys or Reference Stations are carried out using a tripod or pillar setup When a factory default tripod setup is chosen the Vertical Offset is auto matically set at 0 36m You will only need to measure the height with the height hook when setting up over a point 5 Configuring the Receiver Note that factory default antenna setups contain an elevation depen dent correction model This is not seen by the user When setting up your own configuration with the Receiver this model is not taken over This model is required for real time rover operations If you need to input your own antenna setup and it re quires an antenna correction model use SKI Pro to configure the antenna setup and transfer it to the Receiver Advice on calculating Antenna heights and offsets for Leica and non Leica Antennas is given in Chapter 2 15 Use the EDIT F3 key to edit the highlighted Antenna configuration Note that factory default Antenna configurations can only be viewed and not edited Use the DEL F4 key to delete an Antenna configuration 5 Configuring the Receiver Use the DEFLT F5 key to reveal factory default Antenna configurations with current System 500 GPS Anten nas This will then change to ALL Use ALL F5 to
273. n how to create a new Antenna Type for non Leica Antennas is given in the Online Help of SKI Pro Antenna Management Finally the Antenna Height is sometimes calculated by taking a slope distance from the point on the ground to the outside edge of the Antenna In this case the Vertical Height must be calculated using the Slope Height and a Horizontal Offset Special care must be taken when using System 300 GPS Antennas with a System 500 Receiver or when using the AT501 502 GPS Antenna on the System 300 pole 2 Set up and Connection 2 15 1 Mechanical Reference Planes The Mechanical Reference Plane or datum to which the AT504 Antenna Height is measured and from which the Phase Center Eccentricities are calculated is shown for each 0 1897m Leica System 500 Antenna AT501 and AT502 0 03845m The Mechanical Reference Plane is the underside of the The Mechanical Reference Plane is the underside of the MRP threaded metal insert Preamplifier Housing The AT504 is built to a JPL design specified by the IGS for Reference Stations The Me AT503 chanical Reference Plane is always referred to as the Bottom of Preamplifier or BPA by the IGS MRP 01501m The Mechanical Reference Plane is the underside of the Antenna itself 2 Set up and Connection Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 15 2 Antenna Height components 1 Pillar Setup Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en VO Vertical Offset VR Vertica
274. n on the left side of the display will change as you get closer to the point The stages are 500m 100m 25m 5m 1m and 0 5m Note that the orientation direction is denoted by the arrow at the top center When the Reverse function is activated this arrow will appear bottom center of the graphical display Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The graphical display is a square until the 0 5m level is reached At this stage it will turn into a circle TAKE OLT Orierit Def sult I Left Ut z GUSLlitde CUP POLAR REWRSTREDRM PC KUP IHI m When you are at the point to be staked the measurements to the point must be at or nearly zero Make sure that the pole is level and press OCUPY F1 If you had to level the pole ensure that the measurements to the point are still good before pressing OCUPY Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Depending upon what has been set in the configuration the following screen may appear TAKE OLT Dcue Point Point Id Ant Height i 2 888 M Time at Pt i HEI Guality a 85 m STOP PT The Point Id of the Target Point will be taken by default If you wish to enter a new point Id you may but remember that this will then be considered a separate point If you simply wish to add aditional text to the suggested point Id press Enter The point Id in the display remains and the cursor will be in the position defined in the current Point Id te
275. n the Configuration Set You may select a different one if required Ant Height The default Antenna Height defined in the Configuration Set You may enter a different height if required Use LOG F3 if you want to generate a report file of the staked out points Select between Short Long or None A report log file will be stored on the PC Card or Internal memory in the Log sub directory A Long log file will contain the design and as staked co ordinates the differences in easting northing and height between the design and staked points and the antenna height Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en A Short log file will contain the design co ordinates the as staked height coordinate and the differences in height between the design and staked points Use ASCII F4 to select whether you want to stakeout from an ASCII file or from a Job For more information on staking out from an ASCII file see section 5 4 7 5 2 Stake Out Types 1 Point Simple point stakeout Points are defined as targets and staked from a predefined list The distance in out and left right or distance and bearing are given to the target together with the cut fill Orientation can be made in a variety of ways including orientation parallel to a line 2 Slope Stake points along a slope Line is selected as orientation no points are available as orientation The cut and fill are relative to the slope of the line 3 Grid
276. n the configuration Otherwise only the instrument height will be taken into account 7 Measuring with System 500 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Backward Bearing amp Distance height excluded SURVEY Hidden Pt Era amp Dist Point A n Fearing Distance Al ABORT EWC Point A GPS point towards which bearing o is measured Bearing Bearing Angle to Point A in units configured Distance Horizontal distance from the Hidden Point to Point A in units configured Use ABORT F1 to abort the procedure When Point A is high lighted use NEWOC F5 to occupy that point 7 Measuring with System 500 Go to the Hidden Point When Bear ing is highlighted the BRNG F6 key is available This function may be used if you do not know or have no device for determining the bearing Select a point that lies on the line HA see diagram Occupy the point and press BRNG F6 SURVEY OCCUPY Auxiliary Point Point Id n Direction Ant Height Toward YHA M SD Quality 8 82 M I TIT Input a Point Id and the Direction Toward or Away from Point A Then press OCUPY F1 and STOP F1 STORE F1 according to the Occupation Settings The Bearing towards Point A will be calculated using the auxiliary point and Point A N A GPS point towards which bearing o is measured B Measured Distance from H to A C Auxiliary Point optional H Hidden point a Measured Bearing from H to A Te
277. nd azimuth from the start point Point Id 1 a Bear ind AOR Bd Parall 0 H AAR f Horz Dist 46141 m COMP TH TRAJ SIDE Enter the start point of the line or press NEWOC F5 to measure a new point Enter the Bearing Azimuth the optional Parallel Offset Single point computation Press COMP F1 to start the compu tation COGO Traverse Results Point Id BAS 2 181 m Local H SAG SSS M Ortho Hgt 465 754 M STORE COORD A KE Local E Easting Northing and Height of the new point are displayed Enter a Point Id change the Height if neccessary Press STORE F1 will bring you back to the COGO Menu Input P1 Start point of line E N h a Bearing Azimuth d Horizontal Distance Alternatively press STAKE F5 to switch to the stakeout screen and use the coordinates directly for stakeout and the Horizontal Distance Instead of entering these values manually you may calculate them from two existing points by pressing INV F2 Output P2 End point of line E N h 11 Applications Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Multiple point computation Press TRAV F3 to start a sequential traverse COGO Traverse Results Point Id Local E BbeS7 2 181 m Local H SAG SSS M Ortho Hgt 465 754 M STORE COORD STAKE Easting Northing and Height of the first new point are displayed Press COORD F2 to toggle between coordinate types Press STAKE
278. nd the result is displayed ped Calculation Results H of Seq Area z S5 T95 m Hectares A AAG Perimeter 36 1835 mM COMT LIST PLOT The units as set in CONFIGURE General Units are used to display the E results Press LIST F3 or ESC to return to the Create Area screen and modify the area definition 11 Applications ee ee ee PLOT F5 displays a praphical screen showing the outline of the defined area Press CONT F1 to return to the APPLICATION Menu 11 8 Line Division This application allows a line to be created and then this line can be segmented creating any number of points along this line These points can then be staked out if required Access the Line Division application from the Application menu APPLICATION Menu Al Determine Coord System AS Point Managdenent AS Calculator Ad Wake up Sessions AS CoGdo FE Area t Line Division OMT Ps Choosing this application leads to the LINE DIV Begin panel Beir Job AT Sample THR z Shar t tEnNgJeDintY Sharh Point 3070F Eng Point J055 Height Def s Slope Met rod BY I nterwal Tniter val Z0 5 a a a ee Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Job Allows access to the standard JOB panel with full functionality The job that is shown on entering this panel is the currently active job Select the job containing the points from which the line will be created Type Allows the selection b
279. next section for details Enter the new Code and its Code Name To add or edit attributes press ATRIB F4 CONT HEM Enter a meaningful name for the Attribute Hen Abt bute Default Code 141 Code Name Tree CONT HEM Move to the next field with the cursor You may enter a default value for the Attribute Press NEW F2 to add another new attribute Press CONT F1 to con tinue Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 8 1 3 Defining and Activating Deactivating Layers Layers Codes and Attributes can be Press NEW F2 to create a new added to a Codelist Whena layer Input the Layer name and press Thematical Codelist has been se CONT F1 lected the CODES F3 and LAYER F5 keys will be available To activate deactivate individual Layers select the Layer and press aa Ie Se USE F4 to toggle the Layer on off Coding Type To deactivate all Layers press NONE F5 This key then changes to ALL F5 Use this to activate all the con CODES Laven nadie Codelist z Codelist 1 To create a new Layer or activate deactivate an existing Layer press LAYER F5 ir OMT HEM USE MONE ott Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 8 Coding 8 1 4 Adding a Thematical Code to a Point When a Thematical Codelist has been selected for use within a Con figuration Set it will be possible to add a Thematical Code to a point when measuring SURVEY Det au1t Point Id
280. nformation on the Disto family of products please visit http www leica geosystems com Right The Impulse by Laser Technology is a laser rangefinder from Laser Technology with a range up to 500 meters with an accuracy of about 15cm For more information on The Impulse please visit http Lasertech com Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Above The LEICA Laser Locator and Laser Locator Plus are modern high performance binocular They combine the functions of four instru ments in one compact handheld unit binocular observation distance measurement northfinding and inclinometer For more information on the Vector family of products please visit http www leica geosystems com Appendix K Compact Flash and Sensor Transfer Sensor Transfer with SKI Pro GIS DataPRO Using the Remote interface it is possible to download data directly from the memory device of the sensor into SKI Pro or GIS DataPRO through the serial port of the PC without having to remove the TR500 from the Terminal port Configure the Remote interface to the appropriate port and device as described in chapter 9 15 Interfaces Remote This should normally be Port 2 and RS232 device using the standard System 500 download cable Connect the sensor to the PC Data can now be downloaded to the PC in the normal manner using the Sensor Transfer component in SKI Pro Appendix K Compact Flash Directory Structure and Transfer
281. ng in the bottom of the Minipack flap From RTS RTB modul down through a cable brake and To Terminal to GPS antenna port then plug into the Receiver Refer to the diagram og 2 Set up and Connection Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The Next Steps If the Receiver has been pre pro grammed and the TR500 is being used further guidance is available in Chapter 7 If the Receiver requires programming with the TR500 further guidance is available in Chapter 5 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Ensure a dry plastic weather protection cap is fitted to the socket on the TR500 that is not connected to the sensor If moisture or water should en appear in the socket that is not used on the TR500 allow the socket and plastic weather protection cap to dry naturally g Advice on using the Minipack is given in Section 2 14 2 Set up and Connection 2 13 Equipment Setup Repeater Station and Repeater Box Use a The repeater box attaches to a tripod and the radio modem to the repeater box An external battery also attaches to the tripod The Radio Antenna is mounted on the tripod One connection is made from the battery to the repeater box Another connection is made from the radio to the radio antenna For more information on repeaters and the repeater box see Appendix H Assumptions 1 2 3 A RTK reference is set up pre programmed according to chapter 5 3 and running according to chapter
282. ng procedure with starting time Switch on the instrument Select Survey Select a Real Time Rover Configuration Set in which auto occupy has been set to Timed in the Occupation Settings During this time the unit should acquire satellites and should pick up the signal from the Reference When enough of the same satellites are tracked simultaneously at the Rover and Reference and the signal from the Reference is received the Receiver will automatically start the ambiguity resolution process Note that if code only measurements are being used the ambiguity resolution process is not required and therefore will not start Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The ambiguity resolution process will run When the ambiguities are resolved the baseline from the Reference to the Rover is calculated to between 1 5cm The Accuracy Status Icon will be displayed as follows i Additionally the Coordinate Quality should show between 0 01 and 0 05 To record a point place and level the pole Input information such as Point Id Code if required and start time If working in Advanced mode use the ADD F5 key to add point annotations Press the OCUPY F1 key SURVEY Defaglt Point Id z Ant Height Z000 m Start Time 1 52 00 SD0 uality A A M OCUP T INIT The line Start Time changes to Time to go The time before the measurement starts automatically is displayed in hours minutes seconds and is counted
283. nical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Range of Pt Id s Define a start and end Point Id Only points that fall either alphabetically or numerically within this range will be available Pt Id Wildcard Specify a wildcard that you wish the point Id to contain E g NT will look for all points with 5 characters ending in NT Only points that contain this wildcard will then be available Time Specify a start and end date and a start and end time Points that were recorded outside of this time window will not be available Class Select a point class All points that are not in this class will not be available Note that when class MEAS is selected points with class AVRG will be split into their MEAS components and be displayed sepa rately Coordinate Type Select the type of coordinates you wish to make available WGS84 only Local only or WGS84 and Local Code Select the Code s for the points that you wish to make avail able All points that do not have those codes attached will not be available Press CODES F3 to toggle the use status of individual Codes to YES or NO Layer Select the Layer s for the points that you wish to make avail able All points that do not have those Layers attached will not be available Press LAYERS F5 to toggle the use status of individual Layers to YES or NO 11 Applications By pressing STAKE F6 you may select an additonal stake out filter The options No Filter
284. nsport Case 2 Set up and Connection Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Procedure 1 2 3 10 11 Set up the tripod Mount and level the tribrach on the tripod Place and lock the GRT 146 Carrier in the Tribrach Screw the Antenna onto the Carrier Check that the Tribrach is still level Insert the Height Hook into the Carrier Connect the GPS Receiver to the Antenna using the GEV120 Antenna cable Plug the GEB121 batteries into the GPS Receiver Attach the TR500 Terminal to the Receiver if required Insert the PCMCIA Flash Card into the Receiver Using the hook on the rear of the unit hang it on the Tripod leg or place it in the box Switch on the system using the ON OFF button on the Receiver Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The Next Steps If the Receiver has been pre pro grammed and the TR500 is not being used further guidance is available in Chapter 3 If the Receiver has been pre pro grammed and the TR500 is being used further guidance is available in Chapter 7 If the Receiver requires programming with the TR500 further guidance is available in Chapter 5 When Using the GAD31 adapter and GRT 144 carrier ensure that the Antenna and GAD31 assembly slide down the full length of the GRT144 stub An incorrectly mounted Antenna will have a direct effect on your results In wet
285. nt The full Hidden Point Configuration is available under the different name Offset This applies to chapters 5 4 1 and 9 13 Appendix K The STATUS Key Described below are the changes that refer to the use of the STATUS key The main status menu uses the wording GIS Data Collection instead of Survey This difference applies to chapter 10 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Data Collection with the GS50 and GS50 Described below are the changes that refer to data collection with the GS50 GS50 Due to the different measurement program the chapters 7 1 7 2 and 7 4 are not applicable at allona GS50 GS50 The manual Getting Started with GS50 GS50 is available describing the GS50 GS50 main programs in detail Chapter 7 3 describing realtime reference station operations is fully applicable Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en GIS Navigation Update Chapter 7 5 describing Staking Out is similar for most operations The small differences are described here HAWLGAT ION DF ient Def allt Mor tA Sa 03 l i OCUPYIORTHOREVRS NESTD Ua Lita The PCKUP button is replaced by the NESTD button which is also used in the GIS Data Collection program It simply leads to a new data collection procedure After data collection is complete navigation is continued OCUPY differentiates if the target point is taken from a job or from an ASCII file For an AS
286. nt occupation As soon as the receiver has enough information the DOP will be displayed 7 Measuring with System 500 The Moving Icon is displayed at this point This indicates that the Antenna can be moved around and that no Static Observations are being recorded Use the OCUPY F1 key to start data recording The icon changes to a tripod indicating that the Receiver should remain stationary Press STOP F1 when you have enough data and STORE F1 to record the point information The ADD F5 key is available in Advanced mode and is explained in section 7 1 7 Further details about this procedure are given in the sections that follow 7 1 2 Adding the Point Id SURWEY Def sult Point Id n Ant Height GDOF 6S a ee The Point Id is an identifier for a particular point It also collates all measurements made on that point and all other associated data such as codes point annotations and meteorological data If a point Id template has been configured in the Configuration Set a Point Id will be suggested You can overwrite this with a different Id if required If no point Id is suggested then enter a point Id By default if the point Id contains any numerical values these will be incremented by 1 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en To break the auto numbering press Shift INDIV F5 and enter an indi vidual Point Id After this point has been stored it will return to the pre
287. nt i Trat Height CONT EL T The default values as defined in the configuration are displayed but can be edited Use the DEFLT F5 key to reveal the default values again Trgt Height will only be available if the settings have been done accord ingly in the configuration Otherwise only the instrument height will be taken into account CONT F1 to return to the previous panel When Distance is highlighted use SLOPE F5 to enter a slope dis tance and either an elevation angle or a grade in External devices work here as well Slope Dist Eley Angle Grade Ce CONT CONT F1 returns to the previous panel and displays the calculated horizontal distance and height difference For further information on the Hidden Point application and configuration refer to Appendix H as well as chapter 5 4 1 7 Measuring with System 500 Double Bearing height excluded Besririd A Point E Bearing E 1 ARR A ABORT PEO Point A The point from which Bearing A is measured Bearing A Bearing Angle a to Hidden Point in units configured Point B The point from which Bearing B is measured Bearing B Bearing Angle to Hidden Point in units configured Use ABORT F1 to abort the procedure When Pt from is highlighted use NEWOC F5 to occupy the point you are currently at before the hidden point is mea sured 7 Measuring with System 500 When Bearing is highlighted the BRNG F6 key is ava
288. nt rover position If the orthometric heights are unavailabel the height difference refers to the local ellipsoid Should this not be available either the WGS84 ellipsoi dal is used instead Horz Dist Horizontal grid distance between the origin point and the current rover position If local grid coordinates are unavailable thehorizontal distance refers to the local ellipsoid Should this not be available wither the WGS84 ellipsoid is used instead Slope Dist Slope distance between the origin point and the current rover position in local grid If local grid is unavailable local ellipsoidal coordi nates are used instead Should those not be available either the WGS84 ellipsoidal coordinates are used Bearing Bearing between the origin point and the current rover position Displayed if the method is Known Point or Last Point 10 Status 10 4 Logging Status Information about the raw GPS data logging Is given ETTE Ce VES Moving Obs J All Static obs 7 All Moving Obs 36 t DE Pts a7 t Auto PLS 7 OMT FILES ORE Logging Indicates whether raw GPS data logging is active or not StaticObs Moving Obs The num ber of Static or Moving observations epochs recorded in this interval Static or Moving Obs are displayed depending on the current measuring mode All Static Obs The total number of static observations epochs recorded in the current Job All Moving Obs The total
289. nter Eccentricity for L2 Mechanical Reference Plane If you are using the Slope Height Reading the antenna height is calculated as follows Antenna Height V SR HO VO If the Offset Point on the antenna is above the Mechanical Reference Plane MRP the Vertical Offset VO is negative The Slope Height Reading is measured from the point on the ground to the outside edge of the antenna The Antenna used for this example is a Dorne Margolin T Leica AT504 as specified by the IGS The Mechanical Reference Plane will differ depending on the Antenna type used 2 Set up and Connection 3 Using System 500 without a Terminal The SR510 520 and 530 receivers can be used without the TR500 attached a Applications and set ups most suited to this type of configuration are Reference Stations for Post Process ing and Real Time and Static Rapid Static measurements The receiver can be programmed in the office using the TR500 This greatly reduces the knowledge required to operate the instrument in the field Full instructions on how to program the receiver are given in Chapter 5 3 Using System 500 without a Terminal Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 3 1 Setting up the Equipment The Receiver and Antenna will usually be mounted on a tripod or pillar Refer to Chapter 2 for details of equipment set up and connec tions Measure the Antenna Height using the Height Hook Note this value down You will need t
290. nternational Feet to 1 8 inch US feet US feet 1 8 in US feet to 1 8 inch Kilometres or Int Miles International Miles Angle Select from 400gon 360 decimal 360 or 6400mil Use ANGLE F6 to define further options for this unit Velocity Select from km h kilome ters per hour mph miles per hour or knots Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Date Select the date format from dd mm yy mm dd yy or yy mm dd where dd day mm month and yy year Time Select the time format from 12 hours or 24 hours Temp Select the units used for temperature from Celcius C or Fahrenheit F Pressure Select the units used for atmospheric pressure from millibar mbar mm merc mm Hg inch merc inch HG hectopascal hPa or pounds in psi Use the ANGLE F6 key to configure the direction reference and direction base for angular measurements CONFIGURE Anale Formate Dirctr Aef Dircthy Bases CONT Dirctn Ref Defines the direction reference or the direction from which angles are measured Dirctn Base Defines the Direction Base as either True or Magnetic When Magnetic is chosen input the current deviation of Magnetic North from True North 9 The CONFIG Key 9 3 General Language Select the Language in which you wish the Terminal Interface to be displayed The language is associated with the Configuration Set 9 4 General Hot Keys You may ass
291. number of moving observations epochs recorded in the current Job 10 Status DB Pts Total number of points contained in the Job s database i e manually recorded points as well as Auto Points AUTO Pts The number of points that have been recorded automati cally in the current track i e the current START STOP sequence Use the FILES F4 key to view information about the logged data files STATUE Loqqed data files Current Job Def aut Ho Size a LZ 7 15 KE Size Obs 3 EE Total 3126 30 KE Ober TObS 0 Memory Free 1 3 ME CONT e Current Job The name of the currently selected Job Size Pts The number of and memory occupied by the points in the current Job Size Obs The memory occupied by the raw GPS data in the current Job Total Size The memory occupied by the current Job Other Jobs The memory occupied by all other jobs on the current memory device Memory Free The amount of free memory on the current memory device The REF F6 key is available when the Receiver is configured as a real time rover Pressing this key gives information about the logging status on the Reference station Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 10 5 Satellite Status Information about the satellites is given GIL HIZ 33 J9 iz t 5A T wl 5 zr t Ta 155 vl 5i 33 J9 16 t 65 265 2A 5i 33 99 ia 52 Bl 49 5A 33 99 16 4 z5 J 45 dqr 33 JZ z4 24 S55 dd 46 39
292. o SURE gt Point A Ai tase Ht at Point A i Fearing A A ABA y Delta Aat Treat Height E3 mi Point 5 E Inst Ht at Point E 1 595 m Bearing Bs Telta Hat Trat Height A ISr M TETE mm eT Delta Hgt Height difference The default values as defined in the between the center of the external configuration are displayed but can device and the aimed point be edited Use the DEFLT F5 key to Devices with inclinometer like the reveal the default values again Laser Locator will transfer the measured height difference Trgt Height will only be available if automatically into this field as long the settings have been done as Include Hgt in the panel accordingly in the configuration CONFIGURE Hidden Point is set Otherwise only the instrument height to YES When working with devices will be taken into account Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 Measuring with System 500 Double Distance height excluded SURVEY Point A z Distance As Point z Distance Fs Location Left of Line ABT APORT EHE Point A Point from which Dis tance A is measured Distance A Horizontal distance from Point A to the hidden point in units configured Point B Point from which Dis tance B is measured Distance B Horizontal distance from Point B to the hidden point in units configured Location Locates hidden point to left or right of Line AB 7 Measuring with System 500 Use ABORT F1 to abort the proc
293. o define and navigate to a target All functions are available as in Real Time Point Stakeout except for the fact that positions cannot be recorded When working in advanced rover mode you may use the BLINE F3 key to see information about the baseline Baseline information however can only be displayed if the reference coordinate is sent as part of a the data format used for broad casting 10 Status In the rover advanced mode you may also use the GRADE F5 key In the subsequent panel STATUS Grade information about the grade between an origin point and the current rover position is displayed based on four different methods Method Origin Id Grade 1e gt Grade ne Hat Diff Horz Dist Slope Dist OMT Known Point 1 According to the update rate the individual values are updated automatically Note that the highest update rate in this panel is 1 second even though the general update rate might be set to a value lt 1 second To define the method highlight the Method field and press ENTER 10 Status Known Point The origin point of the grade is a selected known point Last Point The origin point of the grade is the last measured point Distance The origin point of the grade is not a fixed point as it is the case with the Known Point or Last Point method It is updated with the current rover position after the rover has been moved over a certain distance The application
294. o enter it into SKI Pro when you get back to the office You should also note the Point ld and start and stop times A suggested form for recording necessary data is given in section 3 5 The Receiver needs to be configured correctly before it will work The parameters that are especially important for working without a Terminal are in Occupation Settings Full details are given in Chapter 5 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 3 2 Operation Once the equipment is set up switch it on using the ON OFF switch on the Receiver The equipment will automatically begin to acquire and track satellites and record data as set up in the Receiver configuration Wait at the point for the required time Note that the required observation time does not begin until the Satellite Status LED is constant green see next section A list of approximate observation times for Rapid Static and Static baseline measurements is given in Appendix B 3 3 Shut Down To shut down the equipment press and hold the ON OFF button for 3 seconds The LED indicators will not be lit when the equipment is switched off 3 Using System 500 without a Terminal 3 4 LED Indicators 3 4 1 Power LED Every System 500 Receiver has three LED indicators that inform the opera tor of basic Receiver status The LED indicators are located at the top of the a Receiver and are only visible when the TR500 Terminal is not attached The top LED gives power in
295. ode is described from here on The extra configurable features available when Advanced is selected are described in section 5 1 1 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Antenna Select the Antenna configuration that you are using CONF I GURE Ant Hame Wert OF FSebe A S688 M Defilt Hgt AHAA m Heas Tupe Vert icalt a a ee ee Ant Name Displays and selects the currently selected antenna setup Vert Offset Displays the vertical offset defined in the Antenna setup Ant Name Deflt H gt Displays a default height for the Antenna setup This is of little use for Static or Rapid Static applica tions where the Antenna height differs with each setup Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Meas Type Also enter the means by which the Antenna height was measured For the majority of GPS Antennas including all Leica anten nas this will be Vertical The height of some non Leica GPS antennas can only be measured by taking the slope distance to the outer edge of the Antenna If this is the case select Slope and enter the averaged value You will then be required to enter a Horizontal Offset also See Section 2 15 3 for more details on measuring slope height To select an antenna setup highlight Ant Name and press ENTER to open the drop down box All of the existing antenna setups are listed CONF IGURE Antenna ir CONT HEM JEDIT DEFLT OHM You may select from this list or enter your ow
296. oint Point Id Direction Ant Height ToWar g z ADA M SD Quality 8 82 m I TIT Input a Point Id and the Direction Toward or Away from the hidden point Then press OCUPY F1 and STOP F1 STORE F1 according to the Occupation Settings The Bearing towards point H will be calculated using the auxiliary point and Point A A GPS point on which bearing o is measured B Measured Distance from AtoH C Auxiliary Point optional H Hidden point a Measured Bearing from A to H Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Bearing and Distance height included If the height computation for a hidden point has been enabled within the configuration the follow ing options apply in addition to those on the previous page SURVEY Hidden Pt Brakbist Point A AiY d 22A0A of EEEE i Fearing Distance Delta H tt ABORT TT HELOPE Delta Hgt Height difference between the center of the external device and the aimed point De vices with inclinometer like the Laser Locator will transfer the measured height difference auto matically into this field as long as Include Hgt in the panel CONFIG URE Hidden Point is set to YES Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en When working with devices without inclinometer the height difference can be estimated and typed in manuallly Use the I T H F4 key to check or enter the instrument height at the standpoint and target height LEST M TASE Ht at Poi
297. olt Be Ant Height Positions GUaLlity if i a a Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Working Example 1 cont Field Proc You now wish to survey points with the Id SURVEY Det Sault cont Road starting with Id Road0723 Enter this point Id into Survey panel The next point Id will Ant Height automatically be Road0724 Positions GUS lib a A T T You now wish to survey one individual point and give AIZERFHEMD it the point ID BM98 In the Survey panel press ee SHIFT and then INDIV F5 and enter this point Id Ant Height Survey this point and upon pressing STORE the stated next point Id will revert back to Road0724 Es Note Should you wish to store any new point Id as a template into the library then access the CONFIGURE ID Templates panel CONFIG 1 Survey 5 Point Id Templates and then press CONT F1 The point Id currently in use is now stored as a template Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 5 Configuring the Receiver Working Example 2 Requirement You are completing a survey where you need only one point ID that needs an incrementing number behind the text These points will need the point ID Point However you will also survey some individual points that will need unique point Ids COHMFIGURE OCUPY Ps Pid Mode Change to Indiy Id P oint HHHH In CONFIG OCUPY Pts set up a point ID Num Start template as shown here Auto TAC
298. ommand to the GSM Note that this functionality can only be employed in Advanced Mode Press CONT F1 in the CONFIG URE GSM Connection panel to return to CONFIGURE Interfaces When a GSM Phone is configured a softkey CONEC F4 or DISCO F4 becomes available upon pressing SHIFT in the MAIN SURVEY and STAKEOUT screen SLake Out Applications Ubilitiebs Jor Conf igure Transfer i HELP TOKE On obs This enables you to quickly connect to the selected Station or disconnect immediately after the survey is completed in order to save air time Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Status of the GSM phone To access the GSM status press STATUS Interfaces highlight the GSM device and press VIEW F3 STATUS GSM Fir tiWwar ee Revision 7 8 Ofer ator Donald Duck SLatus 1 Registered nomet Oe OMT a a Information about the connected GSM phone is displayed Firmware Current firmware release Operator GSM network operator Status Registration status Signal Level Indication of received signal strength on the GSM network Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Appendix H Modem A Modem device is normally used to communicate with the Sensor e g to download data or to transmit NMEA messages etc The following modem communication settings are as standard included with System 500 U S Robotics 56K Sprint PCS Motorola Timeport P8167 Eg If you
299. on Fence Line Info 1 STORE LAST NEH I DEFLT CLEAR Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en To select the code 1 Use the left or right cursor keys to cycle through the code list or 2 Press ENTER and select the code from the list or 3 Type in the first few characters of the code until the desired code is displayed Z0RVEY Free Coding Free Code gt 126 Fence Line ae zA Fence Post TAR Shori Drain Road Gully ir CONT MEW LAST C IHF late An asterisk next to a code indicates that it has attributes Press CONT F1 to select the code Further information about Coding Systems is available in Section 8 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Auto logged points may also be free coded if a corresponding coding system has been defined The procedure will be the same as with Occupy Points described above For further information on how to free code Auto logged points refer to chapter 7 4 7 Using the AUTO key 7 4 5 Adding a Starting Time It will be possible to add a starting time for a point occupation if auto occupy has been set to Timed in the Occupation Settings of the Configuration Set SURVEY Def au1t Point Id z Ant Height 1 2454 M Start Time 12 242588 GLIP z Bc Initially the time displayed in Start Time is the current time with the seconds rounded to zero Enter the time in Start Time in hours minutes seconds 7 Measuring with System 500 7 4 6 Measur
300. on location within SHOW F4 to reveal all of the Main were created or last edited the System 500 file system for points Menu choices Keys to help you navigate through the All points that are recorded will be s list are available by pressing SHIFT stored within a particular Job This Job may cover a whole project or part SUF Wey SLake Out APPlications sass i a of a larger project It may cover Utilities 3 7 Job Cort igure certain classes of points for a project TR anSfer aan ie if ih as control points detail points CONT IE Whole Jobs can then be downloaded Select Job and press ENTER to and uploaded from SKI Pro Jobs are downloaded to SKI Pro for post processing operations or for data transfer to a further program such as a GIS Points contained within Jobs that are uploaded can be used for Real Time Stakeout operations ir CONT HEW EDIT DEL DEUCE MUM A copy of the Coordinate System that was used with the last active Job will also be stored 6 Jobs Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Creating a New Job l Press NEW F2 to create a new Job Device Sets the device upon which Editing a Job the Job is stored Note that Internal To edit an existing Job press EDIT Memory is not fitted as standard and F3 The Job Name Description therefore may not be an option Creator and Device are displayed cel ee and are available for editing eae A Press CONT F1 to
301. onfigures the parameters used for Real Time operations If needed it is possible to configure two real time interfaces al Time i RA Time Data Reference Tata Formats Leicar Port z 2 RSZSSF Rate wh ir CONT DENCE L REF R Time Data defines the operation mode of the receiver Select Reference to broadcast real time data Data Format Defines the format used to broadcast the real time data Port defines the port to which the Real Time data will be sent Normally a radio modem or GSM phone will be connected to the port When the radio modem is a Satelline Pacific Crest or GSM phone it will be mounted in the radio housing box and attached to Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en either Port 3 or Port 1 You may also attach a radio modem or phone via a cable to any port Use the right or left cursor keys to select a port for transmission of real time data The device that is currently assigned to this port will be displayed Rate Set the rate at which you wish to output messages System 500 supports rates of 0 1 to 60 seconds To define the Data Format highlight the Data Format field and press ENTER Leica is the proprietary Leica real time GPS data format This is the best format to use when working exclusively with Leica System 500 Rover units CMR and CMR are compacted formats used to broadcast data for third party receivers RTCM is for use when Rover units from a different man
302. onfiguring the Receiver Threshold Settings These settings are used as checks if more than one set of measured coordinates are recorded for the same point CONFIGURE Threshold Settings Ava Abs Diffs H Ava Limits POS m AVS Limits H tt ap m Monitor C Pot Height GUSLity n AASA m OMT a E Avg Abs Diffs A check can either be defined as an averaging functionality or as an absolute coordinate difference for X Y Z and E N H with local coordinate system Avg is the default option When selecting Abs the average position is still calculated Regardless of whether Avg or Abs is selected points with more than one associated measured point will still be shown as average in Point Management 5 Configuring the Receiver Avg Limits Pos Only available if Avg is selected Sets the averaging limit for position When two or more coordinates are recorded for the same point the system will compute an average for the positions and check that each position does not differ from the average by more than the defined amount If they do differ by more than the defined amount you will be alerted and can then decide whether to raise the averaging limits and record the coordinates or to ignore the coordinates Avg Limits Height Only available if Avg is selected Sets the averaging limit for height The system will compute an average for the heights and check that each height does not differ from the a
303. ons can be accessed through the STATUS key at any time TATUS 1 Survey x Logs 3 Gener al 4 Interfaces Heni CONT a a Status is divided into 4 main sub menus 1 Survey Status of survey related functions 2 Logs Logfiles of what has been recorded 3 General Status of hardware and firmware 4 Interfaces Status of the interfaces ports and external devices Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Real Time Status is available when a Real Time reference or Real Time rover is being used The information available differs with the operation mode The panels below describe what would be seen when an RTK reference or rover is being used with Leica data format Different data would be seen if RTCM corrections were being used or code only data was being transmitted and received 10 Status 10 1 Real Time Input Status 1 Real Time Rover STATUS Real Time nput Data Formats Leica fabs Li Le TA TY Last recug i a Pecud x 39 OMT PATA AMET O EEE Data Format The data format being received Sats L1 L2 The number of satellites on L1 L2 being used in the computation Last recvd The amount of time since the last message was received from the reference station recvd The Receiver compares the amount of data received through the GPS Antenna with the amount received from the reference station and displays this as a percentage 10 Status Press DATA F3 for
304. oranges Data can be stored for post processing Baselines can be calculated with a precision of up to about 3 10mm 1ppm With a radio modem attached the receiver can be used for real time measurements accepting RTCM code corrections Coordinates can be calculated with a precision of up to about 0 5m SR530 Tracks the L1 C A code and L2 P code to reconstruct the carrier phase When Anti Spoofing A S is activated the receiver switches to a patented P code aided tracking technique that provides full L2 carrier measurements and L2 oseudoranges A radio modem attaches and the receiver can be used for RTK operations Coordinates can be calculated with a precision of up to about 1cm Data can also be stored for post processing Baselines can be calcu lated with a precision of up to about 3 10mm 1ppm System 500 GPS Receivers can be operated with or without the TR500 Terminal see section 1 3 The TR500 is used for field data acquisi tion and for configuring the receiver Details of using the Receiver without a Terminal are given in Chapter 3 1 Introduction MC500 A ruggedized version of the SR530 designed specifically for Machine Control Can also be utilised as a dedicated GPS Reference Station Please refer to Appendix for specific details RS500 A dedicated GPS Reference Sation receiver designed for perma nent installation Please refer to Appendix J for specific details GS50 This receiver ha
305. ould be sent 9 The CONFIG Key 248 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Use Choose Yes to output the message sensors were sending their position message back at exactly the same time as would be the case with Immediately In this case the second and third sensor could delay their output so the control station receives the message from each sensor at a slightly different time Output Time A message may be sent either at an exact epoch or immediately At Epoch means that the message will be sent at the exact epoch as defined by the Rate Immediately means that the message is sent as soon as it is available A full description of each NMEA message is given in Appendix E Output Delay If the message is sent At Epoch then additionaly the message may be delayed before it is output through the chosen port The time of delay can be a value up to the rate at which the message is output This may be useful if 2 or more sensors are being used to monitor the position of an object The position of each sensor is being output as a NMEA message back to a master control station The control station may not be able to cope with all the positional data messages if all Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 9 12 Interfaces ASCII Input The ASCII Input interface enables you to configure port and device from which you want to receive and store ASCII strings from external devices such as depth sounders barometers digit
306. over are Accuracy Stop when a specified accuracy is reached Positions Stop after a set number of positions have been calculated Note that these are positions position recording rate and not raw observa tions STOP amp GOlndicator Stop when the Stop and Go Indicator has reached 100 5 Configuring the Receiver Auto Store Will automatically store the point information and GPS data when the survey is stopped END Survey Sets how the Survey operation will be ended Manual lets you exit the survey yourself Auto matic will exit the survey automati cally Auto amp Shut down will exit the survey and turn the sensor off Id Templates You may also configure Id Templates for Auxiliary Points in exactly the same way as for normal points Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Threshold Settings In addition to the functionality given in Standard mode you can also specify a DOP limit If the limit is exceeded no position will be recorded CONFIGURE Threshold Settings Ava Abs Diffs H AYA Limits Pose AASA m AV Limits H tt ae Monitor Co Pos Height GUS lity AASA m OMT oe Press DOP F3 OMT a a Limit Select the type of DOP limit If no limit shall be active select None DOP Enter the DOP limit value Press CONT F1 to continue Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Hidden Point A hidden point is defined as a point that cannot be measured by GPS but by an external d
307. own position can be sent to the device which then receives correc tions based on a virtual reference Station In CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight the Real Time and press CTRL F5 Ref Het le th ee eee eae Fe Fee Change Ref Net to Yes if corrections for a virtual reference shall be used Press CONT F1 to close the control panel Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Using a SMARTgate box SMART gate is a device which has GSM and Radio as well as the functionality of the SAPOS Box integrated see www navsys de The device is connected to the sensor in the Leica radio housing To operate this device special user profiles have to be transferred to the SMART gate box Such a user profile contains information on the kind of communication the service em ployed the account used a list of reference stations an acceptable minimum distance etc The parameters of the user profiles are neither deletable or editable nor may they be copied to the sensor You may select from differently configured profiles on the sensor though Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Configuration COMFIGURE Interfaces Port Device 1 Fe HHEA OU Put ASCII TApPut Hidden Point ir ONT JEDIT J TL In the CONFIGURE Interfaces panel highlight Real Time and press EDIT F3 R Tithe Data Data Formats Poor t z 1 FSMARTOateY Ref Sensor WAK AoWwr Ref Antenna WAK AoWwr Use PRASE TEZY Rad
308. po tatestccuanticnnscdeueta hie xeccnmnddeeseduinedeetengnieee 82 4 4 General Operating Principles ccccseeeeeees 83 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Contents continued 5 Configuring the Receiver ssassn 86 5 1 Configuring the Receiver for Static and Rapid Static Operations i oicctcasscenchccdewoceedistexaneseadsogs lt coseeiiiacwess 88 5 1 1 Advanced Operation Mode for Static and Rapid AUC seep EEE 95 5 2 Configuring the Receiver for Post Processed Kinematic Operations ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 99 5 2 1 Advanced Operation Mode for Post Processed Kinematic ccceccceeecceceeceeeceeeecseeteeseceeeeneeeesas 112 5 3 Configuring the Receiver for Real Time Reference OPEratONS stecescsoceasieccesaencctcsteccontsestseauecsminascesss 116 5 3 1 Advanced Operation Mode for Real Time Reference Stations ccccccccecessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 124 5 4 Configuring the Receiver for Real Time Rover Operations cdc oe csacectussecontadanelheidncidaaccedinantadess 127 5 4 1 Advanced Operation Mode for Real Time Rover 148 6 Jobs and POINtS ccseeeseeeeeeeeeeeneees 156 6 1 Management of JODS ccseecesseeeceeeeeneeeeeees 156 7 Measuring with System 500 158 7 1 Static and Rapid Static Survey Post Processed Kinematic Reference c cccceseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 159 7 1 1 Overview of Procedure ccccceeceeeeeeeeseeeeees 160 7 1 2 Adding the Point Id
309. pported Hidden Point devices their configurations sketches and more information on hidden points Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en EAO F3 allows the default method to be set that will be used to enter an External Angle Offset when measuring hidden points using a device that measures azimuths Met rod n Per manent Of FEEt n A AADA Y OMT a a The options are None Permanent or New For Each Point If permanent is chosen a default EAO can also be entered If None is chosen it will not be possible to enter an EAO during the measurement of hidden points Press CONT F1 to continue Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Seismic You can set whether or not to store a seismic record with each point If Use Seismic Record is set to YES the seismic records for manually occupied points are stored in point annotation 4 The same holds true for auto logged points as long as Store Pt DB and Use Annot in panel CONFIGURE Position Logging are set to YES For detailed information see section 5 4 The format for seismic records is given in Appendix C Press CONT F1 to complete the configuration 5 Configuring the Receiver 6 Jobs and Points Jobs and Points 6 1 Management of Jobs Jobs exist in order for you to be able Jobs are managed from the Job The currently available Jobs are to structure and organize your work option in the Main Menu Press displayed together with the date they They define a comm
310. previously defined Inc stands for Increment and denotes the amount by which any specified number will increment at each point Crsr stands for Cursor and denotes the character number at which the cursor will be automatically placed The arrow means that this template is set to operate in the Remain Running mode No Template Used if this option is selected the last Point Id entered in the Survey panel will be displayed The Point Id will be automatically incremented if that Point Id contains any numerical characters If you overtype this Point Id the auto increment will start from the new Point Id Time and Date will automatically use the current local time and date as the Point Id Point automatically writes the word Point followed by an automatically incrementing 5 figure number denoted by Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en To define your own Id Template press Id Displays the way in which the Num Inc Defines the amount by NEW F2 template is currently configured You which any automatically incrementing sane SEN STS may also enter any standard text here number will increment You may enter es Mode i MEMsAmEea aaea that you would like to see in the Id a negative increment if required Hum Start ii Template In this example the eee 3 wee standard text is the word Point The Cursor Pos Defines the position at A i a ERRE tes symbols indicate automatically which th
311. r of satellites available Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Moving Mode STOPEGO Indicator STATUS 2 tats Since A Ae POOP Obs Rec Rate Moving Obs CONT a a Cmax T 3 1 4 Gly om 5 Sats since The length of time that 5 satellites have been observed for In Kinematic on the Fly operations it is important to observe 5 satellites for about three minutes or so without interruption at the beginning of the chain GDOP The current calculated value for PDOP or GDOP Obs Rec Rate The Observation Recording Rate currently set Moving Obs The number of Moving Observations epochs recorded in this interval Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 10 3 Position ETATUS Position Local Time 08 55 22 1 88 gt Local E SA47RbS d TS M Local J Sz d 4d5 567 Mm Local EHgt SA Gd M HOOP 1 4 WOOP 3 6 Local Time The local time is displayed followed by the time latency to UTC in brackets The position is then given Use the COORD F2 key to switch between WGS84 geodetic Cartesian and local coordinates Note that local coordinates are only available if a local coordinate set has been defined Accuracy indicators for the current position in horizontal and vertical components are given Press VELCY F4 to view velocity information Your velocity in the horizontal and vertical directions is given together with the bearing for the horizontal direction Press TARGT F6 t
312. r for further illustration 2 Set up and Connection Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Equipment Checklist 1 Q1 O OON O h oh 12 Combined RTB or RTS GPS antenna GAD32 Telescopic Rod GEV141 1 2m Antenna Cable RTB or RTS differential receiver module 0 3m GPS receiver to RTB or RTS module cable MCF XMB 3 PC Card GEV97 1 8m 5pin Lemo cable T R500 Terminal 2 GEB121 Batteries GS50 GPS Receiver Handstrap with beltclip for TR500 Terminal GVP603 Minipack Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 Set up and Connection How to set up the equipment 5 Connect the RTB RTS module to 1 Insert the PC Card into the the Receiver GPS antenna port I Receiver and plug in the using the 30 cm antenna cable GEB121 batteries 6 Switch on the system using the To GPS RTB or RTS antenna 2 Place the Receiver front panel ON OFF button on the Receiver up in the Minipack with the batteries facing outwards Fasten the strap around the Receiver Connect the RTB GPS Antenna to the Receiver using the An tenna cables Connect the cable to the RTB RTS module and route the cable around the bottom of the Receiver and up to to the GPS antenna Refer to the diagram 4 Connect the TR500 to the port labelled Terminal on the Receiver using the 1 8m cable Pass it through the openi
313. r real time operations See section 5 4 for details Moving Ant Height Sets the Antenna Height when the receiver is in moving mode When a standard System 500 pole setup is used the suggested default will be 2 00m Press CONT F1 to continue to the next screen 5 Configuring the Receiver Occupation Settings These settings control the way in which points are occupied and recorded CONF IGURE OCCUPY Modes ae ee ee oe Mor mal AU Shores Hor CONT ee OCUPY Mode Seis the way in which coordinates will be recorded for a point Normal means that the observations will be recorded when the STOP key is pressed A type of averaging is performed on the measurements observed over the time spent on the point This helps filter out effects of slight movement E g trembling hands Instantaneous means that a time tag will be recorded when the OCUPY Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en key is pressed During post processing A coordinate will be Normal interpolated between the positions at the neighboring two epochs OCUPY Button STOP Button Pressed Pressed Time in Epochs For post processed kinematic surveys it is possible to use either of the settings Post processed coordinates computed by averaging resulting positions of epochs Auto Store Allows you to E automatically store a point after the Instantaneous STOP key has been pressed OCUPY Button OCUPY Button Pressed and Point Pr
314. rdi nates Then the specified map projection is applied on the given ellipsoid For both methods this results in a temporary auxiliary grid A 2D Helmert transformation is then performed between the auxiliary grid and the given local system The position transformation results are given first Shift dX dY Shift along the X and Y axes Rotation Rotation about the Z axis Scale Scale factor between the two datums Then the Height transformation information is given Slope dH dX dH dY Slope of the height interpolation plane when looking along the X or Y axis Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Shift HO Height of the interpolation plane at the point it intersects the Z axis Origin X0 YO Coordinates of the center of gravity of points in the auxiliary local grid Use the RMS F5 key to display calculated accuracies for each of the transformation parameters Use the SCALE ppm F4 key to switch between ppm and scale factor values Use the EDIT F3 key if you wish to edit the previously calculated 1 Step or 2 Step parameters a Edit Shift gY Rotation Eley Factors Scale Factrs APRPIlY Elen Comb Factors C a TeSZ92 S584 M 19357 54 649 T 3116 ppm Tocar pem 3 SSR pem ABORT Shift dX dY Rotation Scale Factr The position transformation results can be edited if required This may be necessary in some circumstances where you have computed a One Step transforma
315. recorded Note that automatically recorded points will only be displayed if Store Pt Db is set to YES in the CONFIGURE Position Logging panel see chapter 5 4 for details Coordinates for the same point recorded on different datums are displayed separately Each point is displayed with its highest Point Class only Press INFO F5 to reveal the Crd Source the source from which the coordinates were generated Calculated calculated WGS84 from other sets of coordinates Calc Grid calculated Grid from other sets of Coordinates E g via COGO routines GPS Navigtd GPS navigated position PPRC Code Post processed GPS code only PPRC fit ph Post processed GPS phase float position ambiguities not resolved PPRC fix ph Post processed GPS phase Ambiguities fixed RTME Code Real Time GPS position code only RTME fix ph Real Time GPS phase position Ambiguities fixed GPS RTCM Real Time GPS posi tion from RTCM code corrections Unknown Unknown source User enterd WGS84 coordinate entered by user User Grid Grid coordinates entered by user Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Pressing INFO F5 again reveals the CQ coordinate quality and the coordinate class The coordinate class in ascending order may be MEAS Point measured once AVRG Point measured more than once and coordinates averaged Regardless of whether Avg or Abs is selected in the Threshold settings points wit
316. red manually The parameters for Hidden Point measurements can be configured in CONFIGURE Survey Point Hidden Point Refer to Chapter 5 for further details Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 9 14 Interfaces GS User Out The GSI User Out interface enables you to export a job with a format file through a port on the sensor to a total station or any other device The port 1 2 or 3 and the device are displayed Set the focus on GSI User Out and press EDIT F3 to modify the GSI User Out port and device If you want to use a GSI User Out device set Use Device to YES Select the port to which the device is connected Use the DEVCE F5 key to configure the device itself Leica TPS300 700 Geodimeter and Zeiss REC500 total stations as well as the SOKKIA SDR33 datalogger are currently Supported When Leica TPS300 700 is selected and connected to the GPS receiver select the Job Number to which job the data should be sent The Job Name of existing jobs in the TPS instrument is displayed For a new job type inaname COMFIGURE GSI User Out Use Device MEE Fort Z Leica TRSs0er Job Humber iv Job Hame Tr ansf er OMT IEC E If data is being transferred to a Geodimeter total station then the total station must be in a mode ready to receive data SOKKIA devices can only handle numeric point IDs If Renumber is set to YES all points are transfered but renumbered starting from 1 If NO is selecte
317. reveal System 300 Antenna configurations also You can pick out the Antenna configurations that you will use the most and delete the rest All possible factory default Antenna configurations may still be accessed in the future by using the DEFLT and ALL keys Position This screen defines the way in which position is displayed These settings are mosily used for Real Time Rover setups Position Maka MHGS54 Geodet ict Coord Sys CONT a e Update Rate Defines the rate at which the position will be updated on the display Coord Sys You may select a coordinate system which will be used to display the positions The WGS84 coordinate system will always be available and should be sufficient for Static Rapid Static work You may determine other coordinate systems in SKI Pro and upload them or you may determine other coordinate Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en systems in the field using Applications Determine Coord System see section 11 1 Further options are available on this screen in Advanced mode See section 5 1 1 for details Highlight Coord Sys and press ENTER to reveal the list of coordinate systems currently available ir CONT HEM JEDIT DEL TMPO Lch Select the coordinate system that you wish to use Use NEW F2 to define a new coordinate system Use EDIT F3 to edit a coordinate system Use DEL Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en F4 to delete the selected coordin
318. reveal the default values again Trgt Height will only be available if the settings have been done accordingly in the configuration Otherwise only the instrument height will be taken into account CONT F1 to return to the previous panel When Distance A or Distance B is highlighted use SLOPE F5 to enter a slope distance and either an elevation angle or a grade in Slope Dist Eley Angle Grade Ce Ce ee External devices work here as well CONT F1 returns to the previous panel and displays the calculated horizontal distances and height differences For further information on the Hidden Point application and configuration refer to Appendix H as well as chapter 5 4 1 7 Measuring with System 500 Chainage and Offset height excluded SURVEY Hidden Pt China F Point A n Ai Point E gt ee Fo CAMS from Point AF i 0AA Chainage Of FSet n ABBE m APORT EHE Point A Point A on line Point B Point B on line Chnge from Point from which chainage starts Chainage Distance along line Offset Offset from line ites A GPS Point A point Negative value left of line B GPS Point B Positive value right of line C Chainage O Offset Use ABORT F1 to abort the H Hidden point procedure Use NEWOC F5 to occupy the point you are currently at before the hidden point is mea sured Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 Measuring with System 500 Chaina
319. rmation is presented when surveying Format Grid The format of grid coordinates if they are being used Format Geodetic The format of geodetic coordinates if they are being used Quality Type The way in which the quality of a position is displayed in the Main Survey screen This is Hard wired to DOP for Real Time Reference Configurations It will display a Dilution of Precision according to the components defined 5 Configuring the Receiver Defined by Defines the components used to calculate the DOP The definitions of the DOP are as follows Height VDOP Pos HDOP Pos Hgt PDOP Pos Hgt Time GDOP OCUPY Counter Defines how the length of time spent occupying a point is displayed Select from Time normal time or Observations the number of computed navigation solutions recorded Coding Normally when setting up a Real Time Reference Station the Reference Point will be selected from a predefined point list These points will have been measured previously and any required code already assigned Therefore a Coding System is not usually required If you still wish to select a coding system press ENTER and choose from Thematical or Free coding Complete descriptions of the coding systems used by System 500 are given in Section 8 Press CODES F3 to review the codes in the chosen codelist You may also edit the codelist here Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Real Time 1 2 C
320. rminal provides the basic functionality to set certain operation parameters port configurations and all transfer capabilities including the upload of new firmware Via the STATUS hard key all status informa tion is available For the majority of applications the RS500 has to be operated using Leica Geosystems ControlStation or other appropriate reference system control software Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Using the TR500 with the RS500 When the RS500 is turned on using the TR500 the following screen will appear Jor 6 Conf igure T TRAaNnSter i OMT a a The RS500 has the same main menu panel as the SR5xx sensors except that the first three menu options are removed It is also not possible to perform the real time configuration for the RS500 This needs to be done using remote control software All data management job control and sensor status operations required by an RS500 user are possible using the menu options shown above Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The RS500 also has reduced CONFIG and STATUS options Only the options that are relevant to operating an RS500 are available Full details on the CONFIG and STATUS menu options available are described in the main body of this manual TR500 configuration options unique to the RS500 sensor are described in the following sections Ring Buffer Functionality The RS500 is supplied as standard with ring buffer functionality The ring b
321. rth in the active coordinate system Sun The reference direction from which all measurements are displayed to Target points is the sun The Receiver contains an almanac and can calculate the position of the sun irrespective of local time or position Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Last Pt The reference direction from which all measurements are displayed to Target points is the Last Point that was recorded Known Pt The reference direction from which all measurements are displayed to Target points is a point contained within the current Stake from Job Select the point from the list that is presented when this option is chosen Arrow If Arrow has been selected the graphical display will show a moving arrow pointing in the direction of the point to be staked SD G1tu SCUPVPOLAR ETF se Line The reference direction is parallel to the selected line Lines may be defined based on points in the Job Defining a new Line for Orientation A new line for orientation may be defined between any two points that exist in the current Job used In the Orient field selected Line oe ee Oriert Der Su 1t Stskei Ct z 1 25 mM Left n S 46 mM Cut z AAA M GUSlitwe H A1 mM CUP POLAR REWR S REDRE PC KUP IMI m A new entry field will appear below Orient This field will be empty if no lines are defined Move to this field and press ENTER to access the line list box 7 Measuring
322. rvations in Stationary mode The Receiver should be held stationary map The Receiver is recording raw GPS observations in Moving mode The Receiver may move 4 TR500 Terminal Overview Auto Position Recording Status Will appear when Auto Position Recording has been activated in the Configuration Set Positions are being recorded Ti according to distance Positions are being recorded h according to time Local Time The local date can be set to display either 12 or 24 hour clock Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Battery Status i Battery Voltage OK Due to the discharge characteristics of the batteries the lengths of time Batt ving 2 3 k between the four voltage level icons F o atery Suppying paa may not be consistent The voltage voltage level will decrease more quickly the lower it gets Battery supplying 1 3 peak E voltage q__ Battery empty The battery being used is denoted by the letter next to it A and B are the plug in camcorder batteries E is the external battery This example shows that an external battery is fully charged and is being used to power the system The system will always use the battery with the highest voltage level 4 TR500 Terminal Overview Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 4 3 Keyboard The Terminal keyboard is a QWERTY layout designed for use in temperture extremes and also for gloved hands if necessary The six keys F1 F6 at the top of the
323. s Auto Del Loy Files Hever t OMT a E Log File Segments Will split up the recorded data into files of a specific length unless 1 File is selected If a time is selected the option Split Tracks will become available Select No will only record data into a new file if the time is reached and a new track is observed Auto Del Log Files Will delete the recorded data after the specified length of time unless Never is se lected Press CONT F1 to return to CONFIGURE Logging Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 5 4 Configuring the Receiver for Real Time Rover Operations This section covers configuration of the receiver for Real Time Rover Operations Note that Real Time Rover Operations are only possible with an SR530 Real Time to centimeter level or an SR510 or 520 that has the RTCM 2 0 option activated DGPS to 0 5 5m level Highlight the Configuration Set you wish to edit and press EDIT F3 Note that you cannot edit default Configuration Sets You have to create a new Set and then edit it If the only existing Configuration Sets are default Sets highlight the Set that corresponds to the type of operation you wish to configure in this case RT_ROV and press NEW F2 After entering the Name etc select the new Configuration Set and press EDIT F3 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Operation Mode Select the Operation Mode that you require The Operation Mode defines which Configuration screens
324. s NEWOC F5 to measure new points Press COMP F1 to start the computation Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Local coordinate system attached CGO Point Code Point Id E Point Code E Grid Bearing 156 18 26 Grid Dist n 12 5278 Hat Diff 21 261 OMT TGEOD a The Grid Bearing Azimuth Grid Distance and the Height Difference are displayed To display Geodetic Azimuth and Ellipsoidal Distance press GEOD F2 coGo Point Code Point Id s Ei Point Code Geod AZ 156 sr ig FEllip Dist 12 527 Hat Diff 1 461 COMT GRID To get back to Grid Bearing and Grid Distance then press GRID F2 Press CONT F1 to return to the COGO Menu No local coordinate system attached coGo Point Code a Point Id 5 Ei Point Code es Geod AZ 156 sr ig Elli Dist iv woe Hat Diff 1 461 CONT a a The Geodetic Azimuth Ellipsoidal Distance and the Height Difference are displayed Press CONT F1 to return to the COGO Menu 11 Applications 11 Applications Input P1 Start point of line E N h Lat Long h P2 End point of line E N h Lat Long h Output a Grid Bearing Geodetic Azimuth d Grid Distance Ellipsoidal Distance Height Difference Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Traverse This function enables you to calculate one or more new points by defining a start point and entering its distance a
325. s STORE F1 will bring you back to COGO Inter section Alternatively press STAKE F5 to switch to the stakeout screen and use the coordinates directly for stakeout Input P1 Start point of first line E N h a Bearing Azimuth P2 Centre point of circle E N h r2 Radius Output P3 1 Intersection point E N h P4 2 Intersection point E N h 11 Applications Intersection Distance Distance This function enables you to calculate the intersection point s of two circles The circles are defined by a the centre point and the radius CGD Dist Dist Intersect iorn Point Id 1 Ay Distance Point Id EY Distance 38 00A M Enter the point 1 of the first circle or press NEWOC F5 to measure a new point Enter the optional Parallel Offset and the radius Distance Enter the values for the second circle Instead of entering the values manu ally you may calculate them from two existing points by pressing INV F2 Press COMP F1 to start the computation 11 Applications COGO Dist Ditt Insters Results o PS Point Id Local E THEBES ocd M Local H SIAR SS ASE M Ortho Hgt 258 HE M STORE COORDIOTHER STAHKE Easting Northing and Height of the first intersection point are displayed The first intersection point is the point left of the line P1 P2 To display the second intersection point press OTHER F3 Enter a Point Id change the
326. s as well as WGS84 Geodetic and WGS84 Cartesian Use the COORD F2 key to switch between coordinate systems The NAV F6 key enables you to activate or deactivate the navigated height solution For most applications this will be deactivated as it enables a navigated position calculation with only 3 satellites Certain aerial applications may need to switch this to NO thereby activat ing the navigated height solution 9 6 General Start Up Defines the screen that will be dis played when the Receiver is switched on and the behaviour after power failure Panel AuULOOR PowerPFail CONT a E Panel Select the screen you wish to be displayed upon switching the Receiver on AutoOn PowerFail should be selected for system restarts after an abrupt power failure like a short circuit or unplugging batteries by mistake ExtPowerLow PowerFail should only be selected when the system is powered by an external main AC DC as is the case with reference stations power supply but not by batteries 9 The CONFIG Key It is recommended for possible slow drop in voltage or an abrupt power failure Zs The option ExtPowerLow PowerFail is not recommend for systems running with batteries This option could then effect a deep discharge on the battery and could destroy the battery The ExtPowerLow PowerFail option can only be set temporary After manual turn off and on again the option is always reset to Po
327. s been specifically designed for GIS applica tions Please refer to Appendix K for more information that is specific to the GS50 and the corresponding PC software GIS DataPRO 1 Introduction Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The TR500 Terminal provides a full user interface to all System 500 GPS Receivers It can be used to set parameters in the receiver and to steer the GPS measurement operation The TR500 can be used to set and store parameters in one GPS receiver and then removed and used to set parameters in another System 500 receiver The receiver can then be used in the field without the TR500 attached Note that whilst this is possible when measuring in any mode for a Reference or Rover it is recommended that the Receiver only be used without a TR500 at Refer ence stations or with Static Rapid Static Rovers The TR500 is connected either directly to the receiver or via a cable Data input is via a fully alphanumeric QWERTY keyboard and an LCD display of 32 x 12 characters which may be illuminated Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en TR500 mounted on the Receiver 000000000 0000008 CONFIG SPACE ENTER s STATUS 6 1 gt TR500 connected using the cable 1 4 Data Storage Data is stored on either an Internal Memory or PC Card The PC Card is the preferred data storage medium The Internal Memory is an option The PC Card is inserted into the slot on the front of the GPS Recei
328. s given in Chapter 11 When you have set the parameters press CONT F1 to return to the CONFIGURE Position screen When using EDIT F3 the same descriptions apply Press CONT F1 to return to the CONFIGURE Position screen 5 Configuring the Receiver Format Grid For mat radeto Zt Hor tA H tt Lats Lon H tt Duality Type DOP Defined by PostHattT ine OCUPY Counter Observations Ce a ee ee You can configure the way in which information is presented when sur veying Format Grid The format of grid coordinates if they are being used Format Geodetic The format of geodetic coordinates if they are being used Quality Type The way in which the quality of a position is displayed in the Main Survey screen This is Hard wired to DOP for Post processed Kinematic Configurations It will display a Dilution of Precision according to the components defined Defined by Defines the components used to calculate the DOP The definitions of the DOP are as follows Height VDOP Pos HDOP Pos Hgt PDOP Pos Hgt Time GDOP OCUPY Counter Defines how the length of time spent occupying a point is displayed Select from Time normal time or Observations the number of observations recorded Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Coding If you wish to select a coding system press ENTER and choose from Thematical or Free coding Complete descriptions of the coding systems used by Sy
329. s into user parameters and then modify them Init 1 and Init 2 This is the initialisa tion sequence to initialise the phone Between Init1 and Init 2 a check for the PIN is inbuilt Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Dial This is the dialing string used to dial the phone number A placeholder shall be used to insert the phone number as defined in GSM Connec tion Hangup This is the hangup se quence used to end the network connection Escape This is the escape se quence used to switch to the com mand mode before using the hangup sequence The characters below may be used to define the AT commands AM Inserts a carriage return and send command Inserts the phone number as defined in GSM Connection S Bearer Service Speed Proto col and NetDataRate AG Bearer Service Connection Element Inserts a delay of 1 4 second ok Insert character Please refer to the instruction manual of your GSM phone for information about which AT commands to use Using the GSM Phone The way in which GSM phones are used for Real Time GPS differs from radios The Rover contacts the Reference The Reference phone just has to be switched on One Rover can then dial in to the Reference Station phone As soon as the Refer ence is contacted it sends the data to the Rover that has called it Therefore you can pre define several GSM Connections and use them to switch between different Reference Stations
330. seeeseeeeneeeneaes 284 11 4 Calculator c ccccccsseccseeeceeeceseceeeesesseeeeeeaaes 288 11 5 Wake up Sessions ccceeceseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaees 288 T6 COGO ssinirnpe E E E aE 290 MNO a E A 303 11 8 Line Division ccccecceecceeeeeeeseeseeeseeeseeenens 304 T2 UUES seisein run EEE 307 12 1 Directory of Memory Device ccccceeeeeeees 307 12 2 Format Memory Module cccceceeeeeeeeeeees 308 12 3 Enter Security Code ccccccceseeeeeseeeeeeeeneees 309 12 4 Self WO SU sacesacesseccoseacuesaerscesedeecea dn E eii 309 13 TRAWSICR ciccccteeccteeteeecteccssescretevcessbesuneccu 310 aS JOD eee ee eee rr es ee ee ene ee ee 310 13 2 Config SOU iscescecssaenccndencbwnwscconsnaduearededennexntazende 310 13 3 Coordinate System cccccccssseeeeseeeseeeesseeeess 311 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 13 4 Antenna Info 2 0 cece ececeseeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeennenes 311 135 0 0 gt gee ne ee 311 13 6 ASCII GSI to JOD woo cecceseeseeseeeneeneenes 312 Vy USEI torreones 314 13 8 Geoid Field File cece ceceeceeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeaes 316 13 9 CSCS Field File 2 2 0 0 cece ceccecceccecceccecceccecceeees 316 13 10 Firmware oo cece ccc ec eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeevaueeeenenes 316 13 11 Firmware TR500 cece ec eee cess eeeeevees 317 13 12 Language Version cccsececeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaees 317 13 13 Application TeXt cccccseccseeseeeseeeseeesee
331. sent from Receiver Receiver GGQ Sentence Formatter ula ells eee si Latitude hhmmss ss UTC of Position Fix a Hemisphere N S mmddyy UTC date YYYYY YY Longitude 1111 11 Latitude a B W a Hemisphere N S hhmmss ss UTC time of position yyyyy Yy Longitude A Status a Ery A Data valid X GPS Quality Indicator V Data not valid 0 fix not available or invalid a Mode Indicator 1 No Realtime position navigation fix A Autonomous mode 2 Realtime position ambiguities not fixed D Differential mode 3 Realtime position ambiguities fixed N Data not valid XX Number of Satellites in Use hh Checksum Common satellites between ref and rover lt CR gt Carriage Return Values between 00 to 12 may be different lt LF gt Line Feed from the number in view KeK Coordinate Quality EHT Ellipsoidal height X X Antenna altitude above below mean sea level The Mode Indicator field supplements the Status field The Status field Note if no orthometric height is available the is set to A for the Mode Indicators A and D The Status field is set to V local ell height will be exported If the local ell for the Mode Indicator N height is not available either the WGS84 ell height will be exported M Units of altitude meters fixed text M hh Checksum lt CR gt Carriage Return lt LF gt Line Feed Appendix E Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en GNS GNSS Fix Data Format SXXGNS h
332. sfer Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 13 12 Language Version Enables you to transfer Local Language files of the system software to the Sensor from a PC Card PC Card To n Sensor Jersin COMT a a Version Select the language version that you wish to transfer 13 13 Application Text Enables you to transfer a language file for the optional Application programs from the PC Card to the Sensor e lication Text POC Card TO Sensor Version m Ce Version Select the Language File for the optional Application program 13 Transfer 13 14 Almanac Enables you to transfer GPS Satellite Almanac Files to the Sensor from a PC Card PC Card To Sensor Almanac gt E CONT ee ee ee Almanac Select the Almanac that you wish to transfer 13 Transfer 13 15 Account File Enables you to transfer a Telemax Account File between PC Card and Sensor Plemax Account File Ta n Sensor File LEeicamun tmt CONT AL E Select From where you wish to transfer the Account file The device To which the Account file will be transferred will automatically be selected File Select the Account file to be transferred Up to two files may be selected on each sensor Since Account files are sensor specific only the appropriate files will be indicated to you for selection Press ALL F3 to select both files at once 13 16 CFC Log Mask File Enables you to transfer a Cultivated
333. signed for use where the utmost precision is required Typical applica tions include Static Surveys of long baselines Tectonic Plate monitoring Reference Stations etc Use the AT503 and AT504 with the SR520 or SR530 Receiver Use the Single Frequency Choke Ring with the SR510 Receiver Also available is a combined GPS RTB or GPS RTS antenna Refer to Appendix K for further information AT502 Antenna AT504 Antenna Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 1 2 The GPS Receiver The GPS Receiver is the instrument that processes the GPS signals received by the GPS Antenna There are six different models of GPS receiver in System 500 The model number is printed on the PC card lid See the detailed descriptions of each of these receivers given down below SR510 Tracks the L1 C A code and uses it to reconstruct the carrier phase Data can be stored for post processing in SKI Pro Baselines can be calculated with a precision of up to about 5 10mm 2ppm With a radio modem attached the receiver can be used for real time measurements accepting RTCM code corrections Coordinates can be calculated with a precision of up to about 0 5m Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en SR520 Tracks the L1 C A code and L2 P code to reconstruct the carrier phase When Anti Spoofing A S is activated the receiver switches to a patented P code aided tracking technique that provides full L2 carrier measurements and L2 pseud
334. ss CONT F1 to return to COORDSYS Type Selection Projection Available if a Classical or a 2 Step Transformation Type is selected Select the Map Projection from the list or open the list and input the parameters for your local map projection see box over When used for the first time this list will contain only non standard map projections Non standard map projections available include Czech and Slovak Danish Bornholm Danish Jylland Danish Sjelland Dutch RD Stereographic Finnish KKJ Hungarian Malaysian New Zealand Romania Stereo 70 Swiss Swiss 95 276 Geoid Model If a Geoid Model is to be applied press ENTER and select it from this list kangar oo bea 4207 4 SYS Lem if CONT JPCARDIEDIT DEL IMFO ont Geoid Model Field Files can be exported from SKI Pro onto the PC card or internal memory in the Data GPS Geoid sub directory They can either be transfered to the Sys tem RAM or be read directly from the PC card Use PCARD F2 to update the list with Geoid Model Field Files existing on the PC card To edit the name of the Geoid Model press EDIT F3 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Use INFO F5 to see where the geoid model is stored which ellipsoid the model is based on and the date and time of creation Use SHIFT PARAM F5 to view the parameters defining the Geoid Model Field File Press CONT F1 to return to COORDSYS Type Selection For det
335. start time for the point occupation If working in Ad vanced mode use the ADD key to add point annotations and or hidden points 7 Measuring with System 500 Then press the OCUPY F1 key Then according to what has been set in the Occupation Settings press STOP F1 and STORE F1 When working with DGPS code only corrections the accuracy will be around 0 5 5m Ambiguity resolution will not be attempted The Accuracy Status Icon will show between 0 5 and 5m The Coordinate Quality Quality in the Main Survey screen should show between 0 5 and 5 0 Raw GPS observation data may be logged during the Real Time survey with no change to the procedure 7 4 2 Adding the Point Id SURWEY Def sult Point Id n Ant Height GDOF 6S a ee ee The Point Id is an identifier for a particular point It also collates all measurements made on that point and all other associated data such as codes point annotations and meteo rological data If a point Id template has been configured in the Configuration Set a Point Id will be suggested You can overwrite this with a different Id if required If no point Id is suggested then enter a point Id By default if the point Id contains any numerical values these will be incremented by 1 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en To break the auto numbering press Shift INDIV F5 and enter an individual Point Id After this point has been stored it will return
336. starts when a distance has been entered The rover position at that time is taken as the first origin from where the grade is calculated Time The origin point of the grade is not a fixed point as it is the case with the Known Point or Last Point method It is updated with the current rover position after a certain time interval The application starts when a time has been entered The rover position at that time is taken as the first origin from where the grade is calculated Origin Id Available for the methods Known Point and Last Point This is from where the grade is calculated With Known Point select from the list of known points in the current job With Last Point the point ID of the last measured point is automatically displayed Distance Available for the method Distance Set a distance in meters after which the position of origin is updated Time Available for the method Time Set a time intervall in seconds after which the position of origin is updated Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Grade lt 1 gt Grade between the first point and the current rover position grade 1 slope AV AH positive for cut slopes negative for fill slopes av av icd AH AH cut slope fill slope Grade lt gt Grade between the first point and the current rover position in percent Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Hgt Diff Orthometric height differ ence between the origin point and the curre
337. stem 500 are given in Chapter 8 Press CODES F3 to review the codes in the chosen codelist You may also edit the codelist here Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Real Time For Static or Rapid Static postprocessing operations select None and press CONT F1 Logging m Da i g Log Static Obs YES Obs Rate 1 8 Log Mowing Obs YES Static Init gt EEE Loy Auto Positions Hor Moving Ant Height 8 888 m a ee ee Log Static Obs Switches logging on or off when the Receiver is in Static mode The receiver has to be stationary This is used when performing Static Initializations or when occupying distinct points in a kinematic chain Obs Rate The rate at which observations will be logged when the receiver is stationary or when it is moving For Static intializations or occupying distinct points ina kinematic chain the rate should be set at between 0 1 2 seconds 5 Configuring the Receiver Further options are available on this screen in Advanced mode See section 5 2 1 for details Log Moving Obs Only available when Log Static Obs YES Acti vates observation recording when the receiver is in moving mode The rate is set in Obs Rate Static Init Sets whether a Static Initialization will be performed at the beginning of a kinematic chain When using the SR510 set this option to YES Log Auto Positions Will automati cally log positions at a specified rate This is mostly used fo
338. stinct points in a Kinematic chain Technique Post Processed Kinematic on the Fly Not possible with SR510 Requirement You wish to automatically stop recording and store each point after pressing OCUPY Settings COMFIGURE Occupation Settings OCUPY Modes Auto OCCUPY AULO Shop TOP FP PRC ObSer vations AULO Shores TEZY EHD uru Hanu alt OMT E PAE Other Settings Use P PRC F5 to set the Observations to 1 or 2 Field Procedure At the point you wish to measure place and level the pole on the point Press OCUPY The point will be recorded and stored automatically as soon as the set number of observations are recorded Note that the Point Id must be correctly defined and any code if required se lected BEFORE OCUPY is pressed due to Auto Store being set to YES Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 5 Configuring the Receiver 5 3 Configuring the Receiver for Real Time Reference Operations This section covers configuration of the receiver for Real Time Reference Operations Note that Real Time Reference Operations are only possible with an SR530 Real Time to centimeter level or an SR510 or 520 that has the RTCM 2 x option activated DGPS to 0 5 5m level Highlight the Configuration Set you wish to edit and press CONT F1 Note that you cannot edit default Configuration Sets You have to create a new one and then edit it 5 Configuring the Receiver Operation Mode Select the Opera
339. t 2 and RS232 device using the standard System 500 download cable Connect the sensor to the PC Data can now be downloaded to the PC using the Sensor Transfer component in SKI Pro in the normal manner Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 9 16 Interfaces PPS Out The PPS Out interface enables you to configure the PPS Pulse Per Second output port and parameters This function is available only if the necessary hardware exists Select PPS Out and press EDIT F3 Set PPS Out to Yes Set the PPS Rate at which the pulse shall be output Select between 0 1 20 seconds If an external device is connected to the sensor an OWI or LB2 message can be transmitted at the time the PPS is output Change Notify msg to ASCII OWI or Binary LB2 and press NPORT F5 to select the port and device through which the mes sage shall be transmitted Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The ASCII message takes the following format PLEIR HPT sssssssss nnnn hh lt CR gt lt LF gt Format Content PLEIR Header HPT Message identifier High Precision Time sssssssss GPS time of week of next PPS pulse in msec nnnn GPS week number hh Check sum lt CR gt Carriage return lt LF gt Line feed The message will be sent at least 0 5 seconds prior to the next pulse For this reason messages are only sent when the PPS rate is greater than 1sec 9 The CONFIG Key The Limit Error is the time limit within which PPS shall be g
340. ta collection methods The Racal Landstar satellite differental module and antenna can be used for Real Time corrections where beacon or reference data is not available The Racal module and antenna attach to the GS50 in the same configuration as the RTB module and antenna see chapter Equipment Setup Real Time Rover GIS Rover Because of the nature of the satellite differential signal coverage is global except in the polar regions Bs Because the RACAL signal correction is porprietary in nature it is necessary to obtain a subscription to the service Appendix K Racal RTS Module Type 90952 3 90 GFU10 and LandStar Mk4 Antenna Type 90952 3 30 Racal Tracs Ltd Surrey England Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Hardware and Accessories cont LASER RANGEFINDERS AND DISTANCE METERS 300 Standard LaserAce F with inclinometer When objects cannot be occupied directly a variety of choices are available for offset location and can be interfaced via port 2 on the GS50 GS50 Optional Compass Module 3 LA a Above The Laser Ace is a laser rangefinder from MDL in the UK It has a range up to 300 meters with an accuracy of 10cm For more information on the Laser Ace visit http www mdl laser com E 300 The LEICA Disto Below The Disto pro and Disto pro a are capable of visible light measurement with a range of 100 meters and subcentimer accuracy For more i
341. target point is then displayed together with a sketch The auxiliary points can have codes assigned to them and can also be downloaded into SKI Pro To start the auxiliary point routine press SHIFT and then AUXPT F5 Enter a point Id for Point A and record the auxiliary point in exactly the same way that you would record any other point in real time Then carry out the same operation for point B After pressing STORE F1 the following screen will appear Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 Measuring with System 500 TAKE OLIT Point 1 Che SE Gade M OF 246 825 M Hat As 0 003 M Hat E 0 003 M OMT T PT The line AB is displayed together with the location of the target point Chg The chainage along the line AB to the target point Ofs The Offset from line AB to the target point Negative value left positive value right Hgt A Hat B Height difference between auxiliary point A B and the target point Press DIST F3 to display the distance from each auxiliary point to the target point instead of the chainage and offset Press CONT F1 to return to the stake out screen 7 5 13 Point Stake Qut Procedure Point is selected as the Stake Type when entering Stake Out The list of Target points are those contained in the Job or ASCII File The as staked points will always be stored in the Job You may also choose to store the Target points defined in the ASCII Fil
342. tatus Hi Depth Sounder Hz 5 Izer fi Izer fd Izer CONT TATA For each annotation you may either view the given description or the last received ASCII string specified by the Message Id Toggle between both views by pressing DATA DESCR F3 2 2 Event Input Pressing IFACE F3 allows you to view the Time Event Count and Event Pulse Count for the selected port s oe Inet Event Port z Time Event Court n Event Pulse Count El Event Port Time CONT a 1 D0 00 0A a AA 00 Ae For further details about Status information for the different devices please refer to Appendix H Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Applications contains a number of miscellaneous functions that are not necessarily related From within this menu item you may determine coordinate systems carry out point management functions access an on board calculator define wake up sessions and access any of the standard and or optional application programs assuming the security code has been entered For further description of the optional Application programs please refer to the appropriate manuals Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en GPS gives coordinates relative to a global datum known as WGS84 This coordinate datum is however relatively new in terms of the length of time that people have been giving specific points coordinates The WGS84 datum is therefore not used as the datum for coordinates in the
343. ted Press CONT F1 to return to CONFIGURE Logging Occupation Settings Additional functionality available in this panel over Standard mode is Auto OCUPY Auto Stop STOP P PRC and END Survey LCOMFIGURE Occupation Settings OCCUPY Mode Mor mal Auto OCCUPY YES9 Auto Shop STOP P PRC Timer Auto Store HOY EMD urve Automat iot OMT PPR Auto OCUPY will automatically occupy the point as soon as the survey is started Timed is chosen for automatic point occupations ata certain time The time is specified in the SURVEY panel Auto Stop will automatically stop the measurements according to the setting in the STOP P PRC function The measurements stop when the criteria for the setting reach 100 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en STOP P PRC Defines the method used for Auto Stop when Auto Stop is set to YES When Auto Stop is set to NO a percentage value will be displayed next to the Time or Epochs in the Main Survey screen This indicates how much of the Auto Stop criteria has elapsed The Auto Stop criteria is defined using the P PRC F5 key see below END Survey Defines how the survey will be ended Manual lets you exit the survey yourself Automatic will exit the survey automatically Auto amp Shut down will exit the Survey and turn the sensor off When one of the STOP P PRC options is selected the P PRC F5 key will become available Pressing this key will enable you to configure
344. tes are defined using the HELTH F4 key For the vast majority of applications there should be no reason to set SV Health to User Track Mode The sensor may also be configured to operate in one of two Track Modes Max Accuracy should be chosen for normal survey applications MaxTrak is suitable for GIS applica tions where a lower accuracy may be acceptable but it is desirable to track satellites under noisier conditions trees built up areas Only a code solution is possible if MaxTrak mode is selected However when the Track Mode is set back to Max Accuracy RTK phase solutions will again be computed Additionally it is not possible to import phase data into SKI Pro that has been collected when the MaxTrak mode was selected Only code solutions can then be computed in SKI Pro LossOf Lock When losing all satellite signals for example due to satellite shading caused by tall buildings trees etc a message Complete loss of lock appears The sensor may be configured to beep with this loss of lock message or not Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 9 2 General Units Enables you to configure units for all types of measurement data displayed and recorded by the receiver Distance Anale n 488 gon Melocitys EmA FF Date n dd a i 44 Time 24 HOURS Tempe n Celsius CH Pressures millibar mbar bY OMT GLE Distance Select from Meters Int Feet International Feet Int Feet 1 8 in I
345. th System 500 The Reference Line is selected or defined Define the distance to the first station along the Reference Line the Horizontal and Vertical Offsets from the Reference Line Define the amount by which the Receiver should incre ment The first Target Point is the first point in the grid Proceed to this point and record it After this point is recorded the next Target point will be shown Carry on in this fashion until you reach the end of the row You may then create a new row by redefining the Horizon tal Offset and switching the Increment to the negative value Follow this row back in the direction from which you came recording the grid points as you go Alternatively you can redefine the horizontal offset and start the next row in the same direction next to the first grid point Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Procedure Grid is selected as the Stake Type when entering Stake Out TAKE OLT Beir Config Set RT_STAKE Stake Pts Det Su 1 9 Store Pts Default Stake Type Antenna ATS 2 Poler Ant Height 2 888 m OMT LOG ASCI T Ce The as staked points will always be stored in the Job If staking from an ASCII file you may also choose to store the Target points defined there in the Job In this way you have the Target points and the as staked points in one Job To start Grid Stake Out press CONT F1 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en GDOP 74 E A OCUP
346. tion Connecting a GEB121 Battery Removing a GEB121 Battery Pull and hold the battery catch Withdraw the battery with the other hand With the Receiver upside down and the Leica logo on the battery facing you locate one end into the battery bay Press the opposite end of the battery down until it audibly clicks into place The battery contains toxic material and must be disposed of in an environmen tally friendly manner Do not dispose of the battery in normal household or office waste Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 1 5 1 Charging the Batteries GEB121 Batteries GEB121 Batteries can be charged using the GKL122 or GKL111 battery chargers The preferred model is the GKL122 GEB 71 Batteries GEB71 Batteries can be charged using the GKL122 battery charger only Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Chargers The GKL122 is an intelligent charger It will charge the batteries by the exact amount required This maxi mizes battery life The GKL122 can charge up to 2 GEB121 batteries at once The GDI121 extension plate enables a further two batteries to be charged from the same charger at the same time Additionally the GKL122 can charge up to two GEB71 batteries The GKL111 battery charger is a simple charger It will charge one GEB121 battery at a time It will charge the batteries by the exact amount required This maximizes battery life The batteries are delivered from the factory totall
347. tion but still wish to use a specific scale or rotation for example Elev Factor Displays the elevation factor calculated from the ellipsoidal height s of the common point s Apply Elev If set to YES the Comb Factor will be calculated as Scale Factor x Elev Factor If set to NO the Comb Factor will be equal to the Scale Factor of the original calcula tion In COORDSYS Edit Parameters press ABORT F5 to go back without any changes or press CONT F1 to accept the Comb Factor and the other 1 Step 2 Step parameters you have changed 11 Applications In COORDSYS Parameters press CONT F1 to proceed Fave Coord System Coord Sys Coord Sus Trans Tupe Claseical Residuals By 1 Distt Hatch Pee T Max Res E Max Res H Max Res H Alz M CONT a An overview of the Coordinate System is given Coord Sys The Coordinate System name Trans Type The type of transformation used Residuals The method by which residuals will be distributed throughout the transformation area is displayed This may help the transformation result be more realistic and help disperse any strains in the 11 Applications transformation 1 Dist 1 Dist and 1 Dist distributes the residuals of the control points according to the distance between each control point and the newly transformed point Multiquadratic distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic interpolation approach The metho
348. tion Mode that you require The Operation Mode defines which Configuration screens will be available to you You may choose between Standard and Advanced Standard is recommended for most users Advanced enables definition of parameters required for scientific research and other specialized applications COMFIGURE Oferation Mode Mode OMT TT When you have made your selection press CONT F1 to go through the fixed order of parameter panels Or press LIST F6 to get a listing of the available parameter panels which can then be accessed individually with CONT F1 Changes are automatically stored at the end of the list Changes in individual parameter panels can be stored with STORE F3 without the need to go to the end of the list The Standard Operation mode is described from here on The extra configurable features available when Advanced is selected are described in the next section Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Antenna Select the Antenna configuration that you are using CONF I GURE Ant Hame Wert OF FSebe A S688 M Defilt Hgt AHAA m Heas Tupe Vert icalt a a ee ee Ant Name Displays and selects the currently selected antenna setup Vert Offset Displays the vertical offset defined in the Antenna setup Ant Name Deflt Hgt Displays a default height for the Antenna configuration This is of little use for Real Time Reference stations where the Antenna height dif
349. tion model and the parameters for the transformation Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Hame n Trans mogel Shift gx Shift gY Shift gz Coord ate 1 CONT ee ee Trans model Select the type of transformation model you wish to use In practice you will only see minimal differences in the transformed coordinates between each model In principle Molodensky Badekas is more numerically stable due to the fact that it takes its rotation origin from the center of gravity of the WGS84 coordinates Bursa Wolf takes its centre of gravity from the origin of the WGS84 datum You may then if required either enter known values for certain parameters and hold them fixed at those values or set the values to 0 Parameters that have the displayed will be calculated 279 To hold a parameter fixed highlight it The FIX F4 key will become available Type in the fixed value In order that the parameter is simply not calculated enter O To reset a fixed parameter in order that it will be calculated select the parameter and press ADJST F4 Press CONT F1 to return to the previous screen Press CONT F1 to execute the transformation calculation 11 Applications Ad St 2 265 ir OMT RESET T E O The residuals of the transformation are displayed This is the difference between the transformed WGS84 coordinates and the original coordinates in the local system Values that are marked w
350. to close the control panel Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Status of the RTB Module CSI To access the RTB Module status press STATUS Interfaces highlight the RTB device and press VIEW F3 S19nal z z5 SH Rataid z dE Frequericy 2B4 68 KHZ Bit Rate Ae CONT TT Information about the connected RTB Module is displayed Signal Strength of the incoming signal in uV m SN Ratio Signal to noise ratio in dB Ex cellent Ver good Stable to Good Intermittent to Stable Intermittent Ne lack Frequency The frequency on which the RTB module is currently operat ing Bit Rate The bit rate on which the TB module is currently operating Appendix H RTS Module Racal The RTS Module Racal receives DGPS corrections from RACAL LandStar satellites It is used for Real Time applications in the meter or submeter accuracy range The module consists of a combined GPS LandStar antenna and a DGPS radio receiver that is available in a detachable housing To receive DGPS corrections from the LandStar satellites a correspond ing license must be available Appendix H Configuration COMFIGURE Interfaces 3 Fort Denice 1 Resl Time HHEA HELE ASCII Input Hidden Point ir ONT JEDIT TL From CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight Real Time and press EDIT F3 Press DEVCE F5 to access the device list Select RTS Module Racal and press CONT F1 to
351. ufacturer will be used RTCM message 3 is always generated irrespective of which other message types are chosen RTCM 18 19 Uncorrected Carrier phase and pseudorange Use for RTK operations where the ambiguities will be resolved at the Rover RTK An accuracy of around 1 5cm rms can be expected after a successful ambiguity resolution RTCM 20 21 RTK Carrier phase corrections and high accuracy pseudorange corrections Use for RTK operations There is little or no difference in the accuracy obtained using these messages as compared to messages 18 and 19 RTCM 1 2 Differential and Delta Differential GPS corrections Use for DGPS applications An accuracy of 0 5 5m rms can be expected at the Rover 5 Configuring the Receiver Pressing the DEVCE F5 key lets you configure and assign a device to the selected port COMFIGURE Devices and Ports Dewi ce KStbelline 4ASx KESLeLLine SASKE KESLellLine SAS SASd KE LEWES Mi Ziemens Mee ir CONT HEM EDIT DEFLT Select the device you wish to assign to the port If no default devices are displayed press DEFLT F5 to reveal them Default devices have an asterisk before the device name Select a device from the list To view the configuration of your chosen device press EDIT F3 If the device you wish to use requires a different configuration select Unknown Radio and press NEW F2 and enter the Name and Port Settings for the device A complete list of
352. uffer allows a second set of GPS raw data to be recorded at a different observation rate as is defined within the standard primary logging configu ration The user can define the time period for storing data into the ring buffer For example if the user chooses to store 1 hour of data into a ring buffer then the last one hour of stored data will always be available Data that is older than 1 hour is automatically over written by the data currently being logged When the logging into a ring buffer is activated a check will be made that there is enough free space on the PC Card or internal memory to log the data with the desired logging rate and duration Appendix J This required space will be reserved so that it cannot be used by other applications e g standard primary logging Ring buffer functionality is primarily designed to be configured using remote control commands from external software and this is how most users will control the ring buffers However it is also possible to configure ring buffers by using the TR500 terminal Appendix J Configuring the Ring Buffer Press the CONFIG button and then choose 2 Operation and then 6 Ring Buffer 4 Rina Buffer Hoe SLatus Inactive Obs Rate z A i Data Interval 16 minsY Flag Ob Static Device FE Car gY OMT TAP T Ring Buffer No Select a ring buffer to configure Itis possible to config ure up to 10 ring buffers Only one buffer can be running
353. using the two Antenna Cables The longest Cable should be connected to the Receiver Pass this cable through a cable brake and down through the slit under one of the reflective strips at the bottom of the Minipack Draw the required amount of cable out of the Minipack and tighten the cable brake Refer to the diagram Connect the TR500 to the port labelled Terminal on the Re ceiver using the 1 8m cable Pass it through the open ing under one of the reflective strips at the bottom of the Minipack up through a cable brake and then plug into the Receiver Refer to the diagram Switch the System ON using the ON OFF key on the Terminal To Radio Antenna 4 To GPS Antenna To Terminal Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en The Next Steps If the Receiver has been pre pro Ensure a dry plastic weather gm When using the upper pole grammed and the TR500 is being protection cap is fitted to the halves with stub ensure that used further guidance is available in socket on the TR500 that is not the Antenna and GAD31 screw stub Chapter 7 connected to the sensor adapter slide down the full length of If the Receiver requires programming the pre ae epee ring An incorrectly mounted Antenna ee eee If moisture or
354. usly The changes will be temporary unless after making the change you press the CONFIG key again and press STORE F3 9 The CONFIG Key The CONFIG Key To choose a different Configuration Set press CONFG F5 Description Default PP_L TAT Default Default CONT HEM JEDIT DEL IMFO Lomi You may select any Configuration Set in the list and press CONT F1 or add a new one using the NEW F2 key Press ESC to return to the CONFIGURE screen 9 The CONFIG Key 9 1 Survey Satellite Enables you to define the Satellite Elevation Mask and also automatic tracking of healthy satellites Elen Mask SU Health AULOMat ict Track Mode Max ACCUP acu LotsOFfLockK Ho Beep Ce ee ee Elev Mask The elevation mask or elevation below which satellite data will not be recorded and below which satellites will not be shown to be tracked For RT applications the Elev Mask should be set to 10 For post processing only applications the Elev Mask should be set to 15 These are the default mask angles used in the system Default Configurations 9 The CONFIG Key SV Health Can be set to Automatic or User When set to Automatic the receiver monitors the incoming satellite signal and if the signal is flagged as unhealthy will not record data from it or use data from it ina real time computation When set to User you may define which satellites are used and which not The satelli
355. value This will normally be 2 00m for 5 Configuring the Receiver Real Time Rover operations You will also get a chance to enter the height for each set up during survey opera tions Meas Type Also enter the means by which the Antenna height was measured For Real Time Rover operations this will usually be Verti cal To select an antenna setup highlight Ant Name and press ENTER to open the drop down box All of the existing antenna configurations are listed CONF IGURE Antenna gt ATSe 1 ee ATSeS Tripod ATHOS Tripod ir COMT HEM EDIT DEFT xM You may select from this list or enter your own antenna configuration by pressing the NEW F2 key and entering the required information Most Real Time Rover Surveys are carried out using the System 500 pole When a factory default pole setup is selected AT501 Pole AT502 Pole the Vertical Offset is set automatically at zero and the Defit Hgt at 2 00m Note that the settings from the currently highlighted antenna setup are taken over as suggested default values Advice on calculating Antenna Heights and offsets for Leica and non Leica Antennas is given in Chapter 2 15 Use the EDIT F3 key to edit the highlighted Antenna configuration Use the DEL F4 key to delete an Antenna configuration Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Use the DEFLT F5 key to reveal default antenna configurations with current Leica GPS antennas This will
356. ve selected 5 Configuring the Receiver When Time is selected set the required observation time for each point The time starts counting when OCUPY is pressed The Receiver stops record ing when the set length of time is reached STOP amp GOlndicator is selected set the baseline range When measuring an observation time will be calculated based on the selected baseline range the number of available satellites and the GDOP This is displayed as a percentage value The Receiver stops recording as soon as 100 is reached Observations is selected set the number of epochs that should be recorded at each point This setting is recommended for post processed kinematic surveys of Sats is selected set the length of time to observe depending on the number of satellites available You may edit the value for each number of satellites Should the number of available satellites change during observations the observations already recorded will be taken into account Should the number of satellites decrease more time will be added Should the number of satel lites increase time will be subtracted The Receiver stops recording when the time limit is reached Press CONT F1 to return to CONFIGURE Occupation Settings Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Id Templates You may also configure Id Templates for Auxiliary Points in exactly the same way as for normal points Working Example Application Picking up di
357. ver PC Cards are available from Leica with varying capacities Note that whilst other PC Cards may be used Leica recommend Leica PC cards only and cannot be held responsible for data loss or any other error that may occur whilst using a non Leica card To insert the PC Card in the GPS Receiver open the card slot door with the Leica Logo uppermost and facing you slide the card into the slot firmly until it clicks into position Press the eject button at the side of the card to remove it 1 Introduction The Internal Memory is available in 8MB or 16MB capacities and resides in the Receiver When data has to be downloaded to SKI Pro connection is made between port 2 on the Receiver and a serial port on the PC The memory device is checked before starting a survey If it is more than 80 full an information mes sage appears Inserting the Card Follow the care instructions shown on the rear of the card Keep the card dry only use within the specified temperature range do not bend the card and protect it from direct shock Failure to follow these instructions could result in data loss and or permanent damage to the card The card can become very hot during use Avoid touching the metal parts of the card after prolonged use Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en PC Card versus Internal Memory The PC Card is the preferred data storage medium as it has the follow ing advantages over internal memory e Faster
358. verage by more than the defined amount If they do differ by more than the defined amount you will be alerted and can then decide whether to raise the averaging limits and record the coordinates or to ignore the coordinates Monitor CQ Allows to check the quality CQ of a point before it is stored It is possible to choose to set a Pos only Height only Pos Height CQ limit or no limit at all None Quality Sets the value for Monitor CQ Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en If Abs is chosen then the Avg Limits Pos and Avg Limits Height are not shown but the ABS F6 key be comes available CONFIGURE Threshold 26 Ava Abs Diffs Monitor C Pot Height GUS lity z AASA mM CONT EE Press ABS F6 to set the limits for the absolute position difference in E N H and X Y Z apia m Mor thi reo a m Height A ArA m Cartesian x z A ArA m Cartesian Y z A ArA m CarhLesian 2 A A m CONT T Press DEFLT F5 to set the default value of 0 07 m in all lines Press CONT F1 to continue Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Stakeout COMFIGURE t 3ke 0ut Stake from STORE Job Show Path z Def rient Use Beep n Dist from Pt Diff Check OMT E Stake from Sets the source from which target points will be taken Job means that the Rover will look for target points from a Job that you use ASCII File means that you can stake out using an ASCII file Th
359. vi ously suggested Point Id If you define a Point Id Template in the Configuration Set you have even more flexibility to automatically define your Point Id s Further information about Point Id Templates and two working examples are given in Chapter 5 2 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 1 3 Adding the Antenna Height SURWEY Point Id Def sult Point 1 Ant Height MEE EEE ri GOOF n D B OEP ee Measure the Antenna Height When using a Tripod this will be measured using the Height Hook When mounted on a pillar you must use some other way of measuring the height Enter the value in Ant Height Further details on measuring the Antenna height can be found in section 2 15 7 1 4 Adding a Code It will be possible to add a code to a point if a coding system has been defined for use in the Configuration Set System 500 supports two coding methods Thematical Coding and Free Coding Both methods of coding are explained in Chapter 8 Thematical Coding AL i 181 Code Hame n Control Ant Height ME EEE GDOP 6 6 Ls The fields Point Code and Code Name will be displayed as above Highlight the Point Code and either 1 Use the left or right cursor keys to cycle through the code list or 7 Measuring with System 500 2 Press ENTER and select the code from the list or 3 Type in the first few characters of the code until the desired code is displayed The Code N
360. water should will have a direct ad on your available in Chapter 5 y appear in the socket that is results not used on the TR500 allow the socket and plastic weather protection cap to dry naturally Advice on using the Minipack gm is given in Section 2 14 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 Set up and Connection 2 10 Equipment Setup Real Time Rover All on Pole direct clip of TR500 on to Sensor Use The TR500 is mounted on the Receiver which is clipped a to the grip Connections are made from the Receiver to the GPS and Radio Antennas Recommended for short periods of use especially where there are many obstacles fences etc Assumptions 1 GPS Antenna is mounted directly using screw fitting If using stub and GAD 31 adapter procedures may vary slightly 2 Aluminium poles are used You may replace them with their Carbon Fiber equivalents without any change to these instructions 2 Set up and Connection Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en Equipment Checklist 1 2 GPS Antenna AT501 or 502 GLS21 Upper half aluminium pole with screw or stub GHT25 Grip for pole GHT27 Holder for GPS Receiver GLS17 Lower half aluminium pole GAT1 GAT2 Radio Antenna GAD33 Antenna Arm GEV141 1 2m Antenna Cable 2 GEB121 Batteries TR500 Terminal SR510 520 530 GPS Receiver Radio Modem in GFU5 6 Hous ing MCF XMB 3 PC Card GEV141 1 2m Antenna Cable Technical Reference Manu
361. werFail to protect the batteries from deep discharging Start Up is particularly useful for operations without the TR500 Terminal Ensure that you start up in SURVEY MAIN and not in SURVEY Begin For further details on how to configure the Sensor to automatically start up and occupy a point refer to Chapter 5 Configuring the Receiver 9 The CONFIG Key 9 7 General TR500 Enables you to configure some general features of the Terminal Tllu Conte Alarm ee Eel ick Hor Deflt HUM Gee OMT a a Illu Contr Switches the screen illumination on or off and sets the contrast level Alternatively use the key combination Alt B for switching the screen illumination on or off Alarm Switches the alarm on or off and also controls the volume The alarm sounds when an important event occurs such as an error message appearing When Illu Contr or Alarm are selected you can adjust the Illumination Level or Contrast and Sound Level by using the 10 F4 and 10 F5 keys Keyclick Switches the Keyclick on or off Deflt aNUM defines the set of extra characters available through the oNUM key or on the F1 F6 function keys whenever you type in an entry Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 9 8 General Identification The Sensor Identification can be defined By default the last four numbers of the serial number are used Type in any other four character Id if required The Sensor Id is displa
362. will be available to you You may choose between Standard and Advanced Standard is recommended for most users Advanced enables definition of parameters required for scientific research and other specialized applications Operation Hode M When you have made your selection press CONT F1 to go through the fixed order of parameter panels Or press LIST F6 to get a listing of the available parameter panels which can then be accessed individually with CONT F1 Changes are automatically stored at the end of the list Changes in individual parameter panels can be stored with STORE F3 without the need to go to the end of the list The Standard Operation mode is described from here on The extra configurable features available when Advanced is selected are described in the next section 5 Configuring the Receiver Antenna Select the Antenna configuration that you are using CLOMFIGURE Antenna Ant Hame ATSeS Pole Wert Of fSetbe A HARE mM Deflt At HHH m Heas Tupe Uert icalt CONT Ant Name Displays and selects the currently selected antenna setup This will normally be AT502 Pole for real time Rover operations Vert Offset Displays the vertical offset defined in the Antenna setup Ant Name Deflt Hgt Displays a default height for the Antenna configuration If the antenna will always be mounted at a fixed height E g on a pole or always at the same fixed location enter the
363. wing directory DATA GPS RINGBUF The static point which is stored into the ring buffer has the following point Id automatically assigned RBxxxxff where XXxX 4 character sensor ID by default serial number of the sensor last 4 digits ff 2 character ring buffer number 00 01 09 Appendix J Additional External Devices The RS500 supports additional external devices which may be required for GPS reference stations serving special applications Currently supported devices are e Meteorological Data Sensors e Paroscientific Inc Met3A Fan Aspirated Pressure Temperature and Humidity Sensing System e Paroscientific Inc Met3 Pressure Temperature and Humidity Sensing System e Vaisala PTU200GPS must be programmed to mimic METS data string e Tilt Data Sensors e Applied Geomechanics Inc MD900 T Digital Analog Clinometer Data received from all of these sensor types can be logged along with the GPS raw data onto the sensor PC card or internal memory if installed The data will be logged into the same raw measurement files as the GPS raw data External application software such as ControlStation is required to convert this data to ASCII readable formats e g RINEX It is further possible to directly pass this data through the sensor and output it directly via the remote communication port to the controlling application software This is possible in addition or instead of direct logg
364. with System 500 STARE OUT Default Line STK Li NS TAT lt gt CONT NEW EDIT DELS TM The list of lines is displayed If the list is empty then there are no lines defined Use CONT F1 to select the highlighted line New F2 to define a new line EDIT F3 to edit an existing WI line and DEL A F4 to delete all the lines in the list Lines are always stored in an ASCII file it is not possible to store lines ina Job Lines are stored in local grid format It is however still possible to define a line with WGS84 Geodetic or Cartesian coordinates even when only the WGS84 coordinate system is being used The sensor will automatically use a standard UTM projection to compute the necessary grid coordinates 7 Measuring with System 500 The ASCII file is always defined as STK_Line txt and is stored on the PC Card or Internal memory in the Data sub directory You may write your own line file on the PC and then transfer it to the PC Card or internal memory The file format is given in Appendix D To define a new line press NEW F2 THRE OUT Line Definition ine Shar tetEndpPoint Local E z AHAA m Local H z AHAA m Ortho Hgt AHAA m Local E AHAA m OMT a E Input a Name for the Line Select the method to use to define the Line in Type You may select from Start Endpoint Start Dst Bg Start Dst Bg H V Start Dst Bg V H Start Dst Bg Hgt S Start Start point E Endpoint
365. y discharged They will require a full charging cycle before the equipment can be used For full instructions on battery charging refer to the manual accompanying the charger you are using 1 Introduction 2 Equipment Set Up and Connection The type of equipment set up that is used will vary with the type of site occupation and the measuring mode This also applies to the way in which the various components are con nected together There are optimal solutions for setting up the equipment on a tripod in a backpack and on the pole 3 a r rS r ph oi 7 Set up on Tripod Set up on Unipole 2 Set up and Connection ee Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 2 1 GPS Receiver ports All other components of System 500 connect to the GPS Receiver The TR500 Terminal fits either directly on the Receiver or can be connected to the Terminal port using a cable A Radio Modem in a housing can also be fitted directly to the Receiver Alternatively if the housing is not being used the radio modem can be connected to Port 1 or Port 3 using a cable The Antenna is connected to the Receiver via the ANT Port External power can be connected via a cable through Port 2 Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en TERMINAL AG O 4 5 Port 3 8 pin Lemo Power data in out Event Input 1 Optional 5 pin Lemo Power Power ON OFF PPS Output Optional GPS Antenna in Event Input 2 Optional SR530
366. yed in the automatic point template log files etc and defines which instrument was used for certain measurements CONF IGURE Igent ification Sencar Id OMT ELT Use the DEFLT F5 key to automatically redefine the Sensor Identification as the last four figures of the serial number Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 9 9 Interfaces Gives an overview of all interfaces and the port and device currently assigned for that interface For example a sensor is being used as a real time rover with a Satelline radio attached to port 1 and hidden points are being collected using a DISTO connected to port 2 1 cK bE1 Line For this type of operation the Interfaces panel would look as shown above A more detailed description on the interfaces is given in the following sections For further details on the interfaces Tilt and Meteo see App J 247 9 10 Interfaces Real Time The Real Time interface enables you to configure the Real Time parameters the port and the device used for Real Time data communication The port 1 2 or 3 and the device are displayed If both real time interfaces are configured both will be displayed in the CONFIGURE Interfaces panel as Real Time 1 and Real Time 2 Set the focus on Real Time and press EDIT F3 to modify the Real Time device and parameters Certain devices allow you to set additional parameters e g channel switch This parameters can be accessed
367. you may need to store several sets of meteorological data as the weather changes Technical Reference Manual 4 0 0en 7 2 Post processed Kinematic Survey Rover Set up the equipment as described in Chapter 2 Attach the Terminal Switch on The Main Menu will be displayed The system will automatically start searching for satellites Select Survey and press CONT F1 Config Sete JOB z Def aul Coord Sys s UTM se Antenna ATOZ Polet CONT EEr Config Set Defines the Configuration Set to be used The last Configuration Set used or created will be taken by default although any other Configuration Set may be selected Job Defines the Job to be used This is the Job where any point and observation data will be stored Coord Sys Displays the coordinate system that will be used for the display of coordinates For post processed work this will normally be WGS84 Antenna Defines the Antenna setup to be used The Setup defined in the Configuration Set will be taken by default although any other setup may be selected For post processed Kinematic work this will normally be AT501 502 Pole Press CONT F1 when you have made your selection 7 Measuring with System 500 7 2 1 Overview of Procedure The Main Survey screen appears SURVEYS Def au1 4 Point Id z Ant Height AAAA m GOOF z Ba From here you can add Point Id Code Antenna Height and observe I the vor If configured

- The University of Texas at Dallas

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents